Human Resource Management: Workplace Shortages And The Related Issues Report College Application Essay Help

Introduction In the competitive environment of the XXI century globalized business field, the problem of lacking workforce might seem a very far-fetched issue; however, weirdly enough, workplace shortages have become a commonly observed phenomenon over the past few decades.

Fighting Workplace Shortages: Strategies Needless to say, a number of strategies preventing the given phenomenon from taking over the business world have been tested, yet none seems to have had any tangible effect on the issue. As reports say, among the most common measures, the following strategies have been spotted:

Raising the retirement age (Australian government);

Workplace mentoring (Jones, 2012).

Workplace mentoring Being the most promising strategy of all three mentioned above, workplace mentoring can be defined as establishing the specific models of behavior for the employees to follow in order to remain competent, growing both professionally and personally, and deal with the lack of enthusiasm or creativity (French, 2011, 136).

With the help of mentoring, employers will be able to bring the rates of workplace shortages down and manage to keep their more integrated, more invested in their work, and more enthusiastic about the future prospects.

Benefits of workplace mentoring According to what the recent researches say, the key asset of the specified approach is that it makes the employees perfect their skills without setting very competitive environment (Gallagher


U.S. Foreign Policy Choices in the Cases of Syria and Libya Research Paper college admissions essay help

Introduction and the identification of the problem The interaction of countries in the international system is often determined by several factors. As opined in theories of international relations like realism, nations often seek to secure their interests when interacting or advancing a number of courses in the international system.

The question that is asked and which forms the basis of argument by most commentators of the international political economy is the reason why countries uses different approaches when formulating and pursuing foreign policy goals in different regions.

This is one of the most debated issues in the assessment of the foreign policy goals and approaches in relation to the developments in Libya and the contemporary political developments in Syria. A difference has been noted in the United States policy approaches to Libya and the kind of approach that the United States is taking in addressing the developments in Syria.

A critical question that comes out here concerns the factors that drive the United State to pursue a given course in a given country or region.

A number of commentators point to the fact that both internal (country-derived) factors, as well as external factors (the forces that emerge on the international stage) determine the approaches of foreign policy by the United States and can be applied to the case of foreign policy response in Libya and Syria by the United States.

The two cases present a similar situation; Libyans were fighting to remove a dictator from power, which is the same thing that is happening in Syria. It is expected that the United States could have taken a more similar approach due to the similarity of the cases. The response of the United States to the political development in Libya was quite fast.

The United States responded directly by offering direct support to the opposition that was amounting against the late Moammar Gadhafi. On the other hand, the United States seems to be quite careful in as far as its direct actions in Syria are concerned. The United States has often been at the forefront in pressing for democracy in the Middle East reason.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, it is questionable whether the United States really seeks to promote democracy in the world or whether it just makes use of democracy as a tool for pursuing its deeper seated interest in the region. Therefore, what makes the United States quite inactive when it comes to the issue of autocracy in Syria?

Why is it that the United States finds it easier to pursue its course in other countries while it becomes quite daunting for the country to advance its interests in other countries? This is what the research seeks to bring out. The research seeks to borrow from the theories of international relations in explaining the relations between the United States and other countries.

Of greater relevance in the research is the exploration of the foreign policy of the United States in relation to the developments in Libya and Syria and the reasons why there is a variation in the approach in both countries that present a situation that is alike.

The United States has often been seen taking an active role in a number of countries in the Middle East region, which has ended up changing the course of political events in those countries. Can similar approaches be applied in the Syria and what reasons are making the United States not to deploy the similar active strategies such as the ones it applied to Libya in Syria?

This is a broad question that can only be responded to by the virtue of studying the models of pursuing foreign policy goals and the guiding factors in each approach that are taken by the United States in pursuing its foreign policy in diverse regions in the world.

How do the domestic and international factors play out in the formulation and execution of the foreign policies by the United States and how have they played out differently in Libya and Syria. Are the strategies of the United States in Syria impeded more by the internal factors and interest of the United States or are they affected by other players in the international scene.

Topic Description (Literature) Duncan, Jancar-Webster, and Switky (2008) observed that there are several theories that were advanced to help in explaining the nature of events in the international political economy. The relation between states can no longer be avoided, especially in the globalized world where there is a lot of cross-national and cross regional transactions across the world.

We will write a custom Research Paper on U.S. Foreign Policy Choices in the Cases of Syria and Libya specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, of greater interest to political economists is the observation and analysis of the manner in which states relate to each other in the international system. States advances their relations with other states through their foreign policies.

Foreign policy goals are developed according to the kind of development on the international stage and the interest of a given country in the matter that prevails on the international stage. It is important to echo the systems theory, which attributes the world to a system in which countries are parts or rather the sub-systems of the larger system.

According to the theory of realism that was developed by Hans Morgenthau, countries are the main actors in the international system. Morgenthau opined that nation states are the main actors when it comes to the affairs in the international system and that there is no greater actor than nation states in the international system.

The pessimism in this theory, which is perhaps the true definition of relations between states in the international system is that states often act to protect, pursue and advance their interests in all developments that take place in the international system. Therefore, the development of the foreign policy goals and strategies of states is guided by the interests of that state.

This finds justification in most of the actions that have been advanced by states in as far as the interaction between states in the international system. It should be noted that realism centers on the issue of power and its accolades as a driving force for the interest of states in the international system.

Power is founded in a number of activities among them the pursuance of economic development that acts as one of the main derivatives of power in the international system (Jackson


Privacy and Photography in Public Places Analytical Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

History of street photography

The Debate



Introduction Privacy and photography in public places has been a contentious issue in Australia and other countries. This paper aims at looking at how street photography is circulating in ever more limited fields.

According to Miles (2012, p. 14), there has been a change in the perception of privacy and photography in Australia owing to the fact that people believe that privacy is under threat. Individuals view street photography as a threat to privacy, public safety and child safety making its circulation more limited.

However, it is important to note that some individuals believe that the protection of privacy denies photographers some vital rights (Brookman 2010, p. 213). This is because the move leads to physical and psychological harassment and intimidation of photographers.

History of street photography Street photography did not have a negative image where it was termed as a right to freedom of expression in the nineteenth and early twentieth century. Photography was seen as a tool for the formation and reformation of various aspects of life (Miles 2012, p. 10).

People enjoyed taking photographs with family members or even strangers to demonstrate social cohesion. It was usual to find individuals carrying cameras and taking pictures of public places such as buildings and beaches. Photography in public places uplifted the notion of community and shared public life thus fostering social interaction.

This was important in promoting social and cultural value while preserving history for future generations. In addition, there was the right to convey information and ideas of all kinds whether in printing or in writing. Individuals taking photographs in public places did not face scrutiny and there was no need of carrying a permit (Henderson 2003, p. 279).

In the early years, there was no great emphasis on personal life, individualism or personal emotions. However, social and political changes, which lead to capitalism and individualism, have changed the perception of street photography and redefined the definition of privacy. Individuals are more concerned with personal space.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This creates paranoia that depicts public photography as a thriving art for perverts, pedophiles and criminals. It is important to note that public photography is receiving reduced recognition where individuals have upheld capitalism and individualism as the world continues to change (Miles 2012, p. 11).

The Debate There has been an endless debate about photography, privacy and the public sphere in Australia. The debate becomes even more complex since there is no clear definition of privacy and the boundary between privacy and public space. The protectors of private space and the defenders of public photography have legal backing, which intensify the complexity of the matter and reduce the chances of finding an amicable solution.

According to the protectors of privacy, it is inappropriate to take photographs and circulate them without the consent of the individuals. This is not exceptional to photographs of individuals in public places such as beaches and shopping malls. Photographers have been accused of taking photographs and circulating them in websites that make the individuals subjects of social classifications.

Miles (2012, p. 12) gives an example of a team of teenagers that had their photos shown in a gay website. This has turned the boys into objects of the viewers who term them as gay. However, the boys did not have the consent of the photographs and the website.

This is a violation of their privacy and it negatively affects their self-esteem where older men view them as sexual objects. This is a good example of how photography invades personal privacy even in public places and can subject such individuals to social discrimination (Frosh 2001, p. 222)

Photography in public places has become a threat to privacy where the law is demanding the photographers to protect privacy. Such restrictions include filming or taking photographs for indecent purposes.

It is unlawful to film or take photographs of individuals in a state of nudity and when engaging in a private acts (Henderson 2003, p. 285). In addition, taking of photographs of children engaging in private acts is unlawful and violates child pornography legislations. Miles (2012, p. 12) articulates that this creates complexity in dealing with child protection and photography in public places.

We will write a custom Essay on Privacy and Photography in Public Places specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is important to look at privacy as a basic human right before deciding on restrictions on photography in public spaces. This is important when determining whether the preservation of privacy outweighs the benefits of public photography from a social, individualistic and political view. People view photography in public places as one of the major cause of violation of privacy rights.

According to Miles (2012, p. 10), technological advancement in information distribution is diminishing privacy in an unprecedented rate. This is the main reason why public photography is receiving attention with increased debate on whether to increase or reduce restrictions. Some individuals are pushing for the ramification of strict laws against those who invade privacy without cogent justification.

The push for laws to protect the invasion of privacy is deprivation of the rights of other to express themselves. It is difficult to understand the reason why taking a photograph in public place is restricted while all individuals in such a place realize it is meant for the public.

Photographers tend to become suspects and victims of harassment while they may have a passion for the art. In fact, the laws that aim at prohibiting public photography may lead to the death of photography as an art and passion for many (Brin 1998, p. 55).

The debate on street and public photography heats up when it comes to public safety. In the modern world, an increase in terrorism and attacks owing to various reasons such as religious revenge has led to denial of privacy rights. Foreigners bear the pain when they carry a camera meant to take public photographs. This continues to put pressures on public photographers that claim such accusations do not invade privacy directly.

It is rather surprising how rights to expression become a violation of liberal rights that collectively aim at protecting human rights. The lack of a clear understanding of privacy as it relates to public photography means that it is difficult to find a workable solution, which will favor both sides of the debate (Miles 2012, p. 21).

The definition of privacy is complicating the issues revolving around public photography. It is beyond doubt that there is lack of clear distinction about what is public or private. There are different definitions of privacy, where the boundaries lie between what is privacy, and what is public. The right of individuals to determine how or when to share their information has put public photography under pressure.

It is wrong to take photographs of individuals in public and share the information without their consent. It is also arguable that taking photographs of individuals at public places such as parks and beaches does not violate their privacy. The only problem is sharing the information with the public without the consent of the people appearing in the photograph (Bailey 2002, p. 44).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Privacy and Photography in Public Places by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Owing to modernism and globalization processes, privacy is exclusively being termed as protection of individualism and personhood. The culture of individualism and materialism make people to place more emphasis on personal life and image. People want to expose only those aspects that they really want others to see.

This means that taking photographs of individuals in public and sharing them may expose a side of their life, which they really want to conceal from public (Henderson 2003, p. 281).

The notion of individualism and prevention of the public sharing of information or photographs is important in preserving dignity and self-esteem. This means that privacy revolves around the protection of individualism, which overrules public interest. This is a huge blow for public photographers that have a vision and passion for the art.

The debaters on street photography have to look at the issue of gender as it relates to privacy. It is true that public photographers may use images of nude or indecent women at public places for other gains other than the art. This may cause great humiliation and elicit a sense of anger from such individuals. This is contradictory since the women walk in public places while indecently dressed only to complain later.

Public photographers face discrimination and blanket condemnation where individuals view them as perverts and criminals. This kills the culture and passion of photography, which attracts many audiences in photo galleries (Brookman 2010, p. 218). Any person is free to view another in public places without the violation of privacy.

The fact that a public photographer takes a picture equates to keeping a record and showing other what he or she sees in public. This should not amount to invasion of privacy or harassment for public photographers where their cameras are taken and photos deleted (Miles 2012, p. 18).

It is inappropriate to extend privacy to public places taking into account that police and security officers have surveillance footage that they share without the consent of the individuals. This should not be different to public photographers that share what everybody sees in public through photographs.

It is important to note that the debate about privacy and the public sphere argument can go for long without having a workable solution. This is because it equates to two sides of the same coin, which has different repercussions. The debate further heats up with the privatization of public places and control over private property.

For example, it is restricted to take photographs of private property, which in the real sense stands on public land. This means that it will equally be impossible to show the current physical appearance to future generations. In addition, it is surprising to refer to a place meant for the public as private.

Photographers become confused when they are denied the chance to take photographers in places such as malls and shopping complexes, which they believe, are meant for the public (Henderson 2003, p. 285).

It is imperative to have a rational justification for the restriction of photography in public places. The restriction of photography in public places and privately owned space due to security threats such as terrorism should not amount to a ban on photography. This is because it limits how individuals engage and interact in public places.

It is important to take a historical and traditional approach to privacy and public photography before deciding on which side to support in the debate. This is because modern expectation of privacy and public photography revolves around individualism and capitalistic culture (Paton 2000, p. 67).

The debate on public photography and privacy revolves around circulation of the photographs (Miles 2012, p 7). In some extent, the defenders of privacy indicate that it is not wrong or unlawful to take photographs of individuals in public places. However, it becomes an issue when photographers circulate the information without their consent.

This should not be an issue as long as the photographers do not publicize indecent photographs. It is important to look at the effect of technological advancement in the form of sharing information. For example, when an individual posts photographs of his friends in social media sites such as Facebook, this should not be a violation of privacy. This is because the individuals also post their photographs for others to see.

Conclusion It is important to acknowledge the fact that there is a thin line between what is private and public. The restriction of street photography does not have to be driven by individualism and the effects of capitalism or materialism. The photographers that have a passion for photography as an art are becoming wrongly accused and facing discrimination.

The idea about publication of photographs without the consent of the individuals complicates the whole privacy issue. The publication of photographs has a rich history where individual suffering under regimes and other forms of oppression have had public outcry. It is important to preserve the publication of photography since it is a social tool, which is beneficial (Paton 2000, p. 98).

Researchers articulate that it is important to determine whether the restriction of public photography outweighs its benefits. This leads to contradiction in the right to expression and communication and rights to privacy.

It is not worth to preserve the right to privacy, which may lead to denial of the right of expression. The debate may continue for long since both sides have legal and social backings (Reiman 1995, p. 57). However, it is important to look at the definitions of privacy and boundaries of public sphere before deciding which side to support.

References Bailey, J 2002, From Public to Private: The Development of the Concept of the Private Social Research, Prentice Hall Publishers, New Jersey.

Brin, D 1998, The Transparent Society: Will Technology Force Us to Choose Between Privacy and Freedom, Perseus Books, London.

Brookman, P 2010, A Window on the World: Street Photography and the Theatre of Life, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Frosh, P 2001, The Public Eye and the Citizen-Voyeur: Photography as a Performance of Power Social Semiotics, Sage Publishers, New York.

Henderson, L 2003, Access and Consent in Public Photography, Routledge, London.

Miles, M 2012, ‘Photography, Privacy and the Public Life’, Law Culture and the Humanities, vol. 1 no. 4, pp. 1-25.

Paton, E 2000, ‘Privacy and the Reasonable Paranoid: The Protection of Privacy In Public Places’, Law Journal, vol.1 no. 1, pp. 37-49.

Reiman, H 1995, ‘Driving to the Panopticon: A Philosophical Exploration of the Risks to Privacy Posed by the Highway Technology of the Future Computer and High Technology’, Law Journal, vol. 2 no. 7, pp. 5-102.


Fiscal Policies Essay college essay help

About fiscal policies Fiscal policies are tools used by the state to stimulate the economy. The government can implement fiscal policies that can lead to growth or shrinkage of the economy. Contractionary fiscal policies are often instituted by the government when the amount of spending is greater than the amount of tax revenue earned by the government. In such instances, the government used fiscal policies to reduce the amount of public debt.

On the other hand, the government uses expansionary fiscal policies to stimulate the level of economic activity in the country. Such measures are often taken by the government after periods of severe economic conditions such as the recession that occurred from 2009. Expansionary fiscal policies often create inflationary pressure in the economy (Mankiw 2011).

Government spending and taxation are the main fiscal policy tools (Mankiw 2011). The state can stimulate the economy by increasing the amount of the spending allocation per annum. It results in the creation of job opportunities thus increasing consumer spending. Also, the government can reduce taxes.

Increasing government spending is more effective than reduction of taxes. Besides, the effectiveness of fiscal policy is achieved when the economy is operating below full capacity of the economy.

Fiscal policies in Australia The government of Australia came up with fiscal policies that comprised of reduction of taxes and increase in the amount of government spending to stimulate the economy after the recession. The government came up with a number of stimulus plans. For instance, the government came up with a stimulus plan that focused on implementing a number of fiscal policies.

The goal of the stimulus plan was to enhance economic growth and job creation. The plan also focused on protecting the existing jobs so that more people do no lose their jobs and also create jobs. Job creation leads to an increase in the amount of disposal income and increase consumption expenditure.

The government also increased spending on major investments such as infrastructure within the country. This initiative was put in place so as to replace lost jobs during the period of recession. Further, the government increased spending in learning institutions. The government improved infrastructure in higher learning institutions with an aim of promoting technology and research in the institutions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Further, the government also supported communities and some of the industries that most affected by the recession. Finally, the government collaborated with financial institutions so as to make funds available to the citizens cheaply.

The stimulus plan was implemented successfully in partnership and cooperation of various agencies in Australia. The stimulus plan was temporary and was supposed to be implemented in phases (International Monetary Fund 2012).

The implementation of the stimulus plan has been successful in Australia. The country is considered as one of the countries that successfully recovered from recession. The implementation of the stimulus plan has led to significant improvement in the economy. For instance, in the year 2012, the government of Australia reported a decline in the amount of the budget deficit.

The value declined from $63.584 billion that was reported in the 2010 – 2011 fiscal year to $42.119 billion in the fiscal year that ended in March, 2012. The amount of a budget deficit that was reported in 2009 during the recession was $64.51 billion (International Monetary Fund 2012).

Further, the amount of government revenue increased from $1,335.87 billion that was reported in the 2010 – 2011 fiscal year to $1,380.02 billion in the fiscal year that ended in March, 2012. This shows an increase in the level of economic activity in Australia. Further, the amount of government expenditure increased from $523.827 in 2011 to $542.038 in 2012.

The inflation rate (measured by the consumer price index) increased from 178.45 in 2011 to 182.1 in 2012. This is an indication of an increase in the rate of inflation in the country. Expansionary fiscal policies in a country often create inflationary pressure. Despite creating more job opportunities, the unemployment rate continued to rise. The unemployment rate declined from 5.592% in 2009 to 5.225% in 2010.

The value further declined to 5.083% in 2011. However, in 2012, the unemployment rate increased to 5.217%. The current account deficit increased from $33.522 billion in 2011 to $62.969 in 2012. It is an indication that the amount of import in the country exceeds the amount of exports. However, the economy grew by 3.304% short of the expected 6.2% that was expected in 2012 (International Monetary Fund 2012).

We will write a custom Essay on Fiscal Policies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This led to weak economic projections and the loss of confidence in the full recovery of the economy for the recent inflation. Expansionary fiscal policies often create inflationary pressure in the economy.

The fiscal policies implemented will increase the aggregate demand in the economy. In the AD – AS model, the aggregate demand curve will shift outwards as presented in the graph below. The aggregate supply curve will not be affected. The impact on the AD – AS model is illustrated below.

Expansionary fiscal policies shift the AD curve from AD1 to AD2. This results in an increase in price level from P1 to P2. The GDP also increases from GDP1 to GDP2.

Apart from the expansionary fiscal policies, the Reserve Bank of Australia also instituted monetary policy to aid the economy recovery. The bank lowered interest rate from 4.8% in 2011 to 3.0% in 2011. The expansionary monetary policy is illustrated below.

When interest rates are lowered (from 4.8% to 3.0%), there will be an increase in borrowing and a decline in investment. This causes an increase in the amount of money in circulation that is, from MS1 to MS2. This will result in an increase in the amount of economic activities in the country thus leading to GDP growth.

References Arnold, R. 2008, Economics, Cengage learning, USA.

International Monetary Fund, 2012, Data and statistics. Web.

Mankiw, G. 2011, Principles of economics, Cengage Learning, USA.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Fiscal Policies by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Reserve Bank of Australia, 2013, Monetary policy. Web.


A Critique of Walmart’s Branding Evaluation Essay essay help: essay help

Walmart is an American retail corporation founded by Sam Walton in 1962. It operates in many countries that include the United States, Canada, Argentina, and Brazil. It is among the largest corporations in the world that employ a large number of employees.

Walmart has come under attack in past years for offering employees low wages, sexual discrimination at the workplace, and unfair treatment of employees. Despite criticism and attacks, the corporation has maintained its position as one of the leading retailers in America and the world.

Walmart is a relevant brand in the market because of several reasons that include its impact on economy of the U.S., influence on labor markets, and its sustainability efforts.

Walmart is one of the leading employers in the world with over 2 million employees spread across its branches around the world. Research has revealed that its economic impact is immense.

First, it provides wages to many people thus improving quality of people’s lives.

Second, it offers low prices that make merchandise affordable to low income earners. As such, it alleviates poverty and improves lives of many Americans. Low-income households benefit greatly from low prices, which have led to improved consumer well-being.

On the other hand, Walmart has immense influence on labor markets. Research has found out that presence of Walmart in the market increases employment opportunities even though it offers low wages. Its relevance regarding labor markets bases on menial treatment of employees.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It offers low wages, inadequate health cover, poor working conditions, and prevents employees from joining or forming unions. However, this is obscured by the fact that it offers employment opportunities to many people.

Brand positioning refers to a company’s or organization’s perception by customers. Effective brand positioning is one of the most effective ways used by businesses to create customer loyalty and increase customer satisfaction.

Walmart has positioned its brand as a low-price retailer that cares for the welfare of customers. As such, Walmart’s brand positioning as the low-price retailer promises customers that the corporation offers the lowest prices for goods in the market.

The focus of the corporation’s brand positioning is low prices. It does not offer any promises on quality of shopping experiences or customer affiliation. Therefore, Walmart’s customer base is sensitive to prices of goods compared to customers of its competitors in the market.

The main reason Walmart is a leader in the retail sector is because of its brand positioning. However, analysts have criticized Walmart’s brand positioning by attributing it to brand devaluation.

This has led to Walmart establishing itself as a brand of low-priced goods for low-income earners. They further argue that Walmart could improve its brand positioning by incorporating aspects such as customer affiliation and customer experience in its brand positioning strategy.

As a brand, Walmart is characterized by creativity, focus on customer needs, high turnover, low cost of production, and market dominance. Walmart’s high turnover and positive impact on economy could be attributed to its creativity.

We will write a custom Essay on A Critique of Walmart’s Branding specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It focuses on middle class and low-income earners who form the larger part of the population. As such, it offers low prices for its products. It is able to provide low prices because of its low cost of production and low wages.

However, the brand is losing its market dominance because of emergence of online shopping stores such as that have improved convenience of shopping. In addition, development of stores such as Dollar General is affecting the positioning of the brand.

Walmart is famous for its effective advertising that attracts more customers to its stores. In past years, it has used slogans such as we sell for less, and satisfaction guaranteed to reiterate its commitment to fulfilling needs of customers by offering affordable prices.

In addition, it uses different registered trademarks that include the spark, live better, and save money to represent the Walmart brand. Walmart also offers store brands that present low prices as alternatives to name brand products.

It offers numerous store brands such as Sam’s Choice, Dr Thunder, White Stag, George, Mainstays, great Value, and Equate. Additional brands include Apparel and Homeliness. These store brands are offered under the Walmart brand and have played a pivotal role in Walmart’s brand positioning.

To improve its brand, Walmart has created a campaign to reinvent its brand to counter criticisms by labor unions and media. The campaign is aimed at cleaning its tainted image and negative publicity.

Objectives of the campaign include digitization, reinvention of brand, development of solutions to existing problems, and restructuring retail store formats.

The reinvention campaign aims to advance Walmart’s philosophy of offering low prices to customers while maintaining its brand position as a low-price retailer. The value of Walmart’s brand was evident from nomination as one of the most valuable brands in the world in 2012.

Not sure if you can write a paper on A Critique of Walmart’s Branding by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This was attributed to its focus on fulfilling needs of digitally connected customers, improving operations to include online services, and offering customers a chance to order merchandise even without money when placing orders.

Its brand is worth $34.4 billion and is the most valued brand in the world.


Energy and Society Carbon Footprint Exploratory Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction


Gasoline and Diesel

Natural Gas

Carbon Footprint

Number of Trees to Offset Emissions


Works Cited

Introduction Energy is indispensable in modern society because people use it when performing various activities that are critical for human survival. Although energy is indispensable in human existence, different forms of energy have different impacts on the environment due to their pollution.

Since fossil fuel is the most common form of energy that people use in running industries, vehicles, and generating electricity, it releases carbon dioxide into the environment. Carbon dioxide is one of the greenhouse gases that human activities generate.

According to the City of Hayward, high levels of carbon dioxide cause drought, lower agricultural productivity, increase occurrence of floods and storms, and enhance risks of diseases (3).

Owing to grave environmental impacts of carbon dioxide, climatologists recommend a reduction in the use of energy associated with fossil fuels. Given that individuals and families contribute to the amount of carbon dioxide emissions, reduction of carbon footprint is imperative.

Essentially, carbon footprint is the amount of carbon dioxide that an individual emits in a year. Therefore, this essay seeks to calculate carbon footprint that I contribute to the environment in Hayward, CA.

Electricity Generation of electricity using fossil fuels contribute to the carbon dioxide emissions that cause global warming.

Usually, generation of power from water, natural steam, and wind is not enough, and thus the use of fossil fuels is necessary to supplement the electricity generated from renewable sources.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to the City of Hayward, unplugging of electrical appliances reduces electricity ‘leakage’ because one can save up to 26% of electricity usage (4).

At home, electricity is the major source of energy because electrical appliances such as computers, televisions, fridges, phones, and cookers consume electricity daily.

In this view, the number of electrical appliances that one uses and the manner of using them apparently determine the rate of power consumption. Hence, by using electricity, one is responsible for the increase in the carbon dioxide emissions.

Basing on the electrical appliances that I utilize, I can calculate the amount of electricity that I utilize per month, and then translate to the carbon footprint. I use a computer that consumes about 30kWh per month, which is equal to 360kWh per year.

Television is another electrical appliance that consumes about 25kWh per month, which means that television consumes about 300kWh annually. Additionally, I have a fridge that normally consumes about 40kWh of electricity per month.

Per year, the fridge then consumes about 480kWh. An electric cooker is an appliance that consumes a significant amount of electricity since it consumes about 100kWh per month, which translates into 1200kWh.

Overall, the total amount of electricity that I consume per year equals to about 2340kWh. Since one kWh generates 0.524 lbs of CO2, calculations show that the total amount of CO2 generated from 2340kWh of electricity is 1226.16 lbs.

We will write a custom Essay on Energy and Society Carbon Footprint specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This means that carbon footprint generated from electricity per year is 1226.16 lbs.

Gasoline and Diesel Gasoline and diesel are some of the common fossil fuels that people use when travelling from one place to another. Motor vehicles, motorcycles, train, and airplane consume these fossil fuels, thus generating carbon dioxide, which contributes to the global warming.

Statistics show that about “one third of the CO2 produced in the United States is from the transportation of people or goods” (City of Hayward 4). Since people must travel from one place to another, they utilize a lot of fossil fuels and increase their carbon footprint.

Hence, to reduce carbon footprint, climatologists recommend that people need to use public transport, bicycles, or live close to their workplaces.

The amount of fossil fuels that I utilize is dependent on the means of transport that I use when traveling to and from work and school, or running errands. When driving to work, I normally use about 2 gallons of diesel.

In a month, I use about 60 gallons of diesel, which translate to about 720 gallons of diesel per year. Moreover, I use approximately 1 gallon of gasoline in motorcycle daily, which implies that I use 30 gallons per month and 360 gallons per year.

Occasionally, I use the train when traveling to and fro school or work, a distance of about 15 miles per month. Annually, I cover a distance of about 350 miles using the train.

Sometime I take city bus when running errands and I travel a distance of about 20 miles per month, which translates to 480 miles annually.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Energy and Society Carbon Footprint by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More During the weekend I travel a distance of 600 miles to and fro using an airplane. Per month, it means that I travel a distance of 2400 miles, while per year I travel a distance of 28800 miles.

From the data showing the amount of fossil fuels that I utilize when traveling, I can calculate the amount of carbon footprint. When driving to and from school and workplace, I use about 720 gallons of diesel per year.

Given that one gallon of diesel produces 22.3 lbs of CO2, it means that 780 gallons of diesel generate 16056 lbs of carbon dioxide.

Additionally, motorcycle uses about 360 gallons of gasoline per year. Since one gallon of gasoline generates 19.5 lbs of CO2, 360 gallons of gasoline then produce 7020 gallons of CO2. Using train, I cover a distance of 350 miles per year. In carbon emission, a train produces 0.6 lbs of CO2 per mile.

Hence, 350 miles annually generates approximately 210 lbs of CO2. By using bus transport, I cover a distance of about 480 miles annually. As a bus produces 0.7 lbs of CO2 per mile, it means that it generates 336 lbs of CO2 annually.

Additionally, airplane covers a distance of 28800 miles annually. Normally, one mile of flight generates 0.4 lbs of CO2, which means that 28800 miles produces 11520 lbs of CO2.

Natural Gas Natural gas is also a fossil fuel that people always utilize at their homes when cooking food. Since it is the major source of energy in cooking, its use in homes contributes to the carbon footprint.

“Energy in the form of natural gas and electricity accounted for 33.5 percent of Hayward’s emissions” (City of Hayward 49). On a daily basis, I utilize an average of 5 therms, which translate to 150 therms per month and 1800 therms per year.

As one therm generates 13.446 lbs of CO2, carbon footprint generated from the use of 1800 therms of natural gas is 24202.8 lbs of CO2.

Carbon Footprint The table below indicates 54270 lbs of CO2 as carbon footprint that I generate annually in Hayward.

Source of CO2 Amount of CO2 in lbs Electricity 1226.16 lbs Gasoline 720 lbs Diesel 16056 lbs Natural gas 24202.8 lbs Train 210 lbs Flight 11520 lbs Bus 336 lbs Total 54270.96 lbs Since one short ton is 2000 lbs, 54270 lbs equal to 27.135 short tons. Comparatively, a single family produces about 40 short tons of carbon footprint.

As a single person, I produce about 27 short tons per year, which is quite high for a single person because a family produces 40 short tons. Thus, the calculated carbon footprint is close to 40 short tons, a national average carbon footprint of a single family.

Number of Trees to Offset Emissions Trees play an important role in the purification of air because they absorb and utilize CO2 during the process of photosynthesis.

Hence, to offset carbon footprint, people need to plant enough number of trees. Since a tree can absorb 670 pounds of CO2, the number of trees that can absorb 54270 lbs is 81. Thus, I should plant 81 trees to offset the carbon footprint that I emit annually.

Conclusion Although energy is critical for human survival, emission of CO2 has serious environmental impacts because it is a greenhouse gas that causes global warming.

Measurement of the carbon emission is a complex process that requires assessment of human activities ranging from industrial to household activities. Thus, carbon footprint provides a means of measuring the extent of carbon emission that individuals generate per year.

In Hayward, environmentalists have come up with numerous strategies to ensure that individuals contribute to the environmental conservation by reducing the amount of carbon footprint.

The assessment of the carbon footprint shows that I contribute about 54270 lbs of CO2, which comprise approximately 27 short tons. To offset 54270 lbs of CO2, I need to plant 81 trees because each tree absorbs 670 pounds.

Works Cited City of Hayward. Hayward Climate Action Plan. 8 October 2009. Web.


International Strategic Plan to help Apple company expand in China Report a level english language essay help

Executive summary Since China is enjoying a speedy economic growth, many individuals are starting their ventures in the country thus creating stiff competition. In this regard, multinational companies, like Apple Company, have found a good center for economic development in addition to affluence.

Apple Company should choose licensing, joint ventures, and wholly owned foreign enterprise licensing as its modes of entry. An evaluation of the business atmosphere in China would give a general image of the market.

Additionally, with an excellent evaluation of the market, Apple Company can capitalize on the viable opportunities and reduce the existing threats, as a precise strategic planning will give the company a stable and suitable setting for its growth.

Profile Economic

Economic aspects have a direct impact on companies since they influence the accessibility of capital, charges, provision, and demand. In the contemporary era, the economic development of China has been fast and the industrial segments can attest to this assertion.

From around 1978, China turned out to be a market centered economy. In addition, as the central bank in China, the Bank of China employs monetary strategy to raise or reduce the rates of interest and regulate the sum of money in the financial system to attain a steady economic development.

The Bank of China as well assumes the responsibility of regulating conflict and surplus, in addition to raising taxation for import duty (Isenberg, 2008).

In a period of inflation, the financial system is short of investment and exports normally suffer from the price hikes since inflation raises the cost of exports but it supports imports.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Socio-cultural

Disproportionate income distribution and poverty act as hindrances for the development of China and thus the government should regulate the taxation system, decrease income variation, and enhance socio-cultural security to increase the safety of existence.

With the changing way of life, individuals desire to work from home, which increases the need for such things as computers. Moreover, the level of single households is on the rise and companies have a tendency of deploying such employees far away from home (Acs, 2006).

With regard to attitude of work and leisure, individuals become more considerate and flexible when they have an opportunity to take pleasure in life after work.

In this regard, it is critical for companies to set aside time for leisure activities of their personnel and encourage the capacity to communicate and socialize irrespective of their cultural origins, and thus improve their health of body and mind in addition to creating a suitable ground for their effectiveness at work.


The legal aspects deal with the manner in which regulatory and government strategy impact economic aspects and judgments by the government.

Following the economic change in 1978, the financial system of China is rising outstandingly and influences the encouragement of the growth of non-public companies, foreign trade, industrial manufacturing, in addition to the employment report.

When the security of consumers is increasing, Apple Company and other international companies will acquire gains from carrying out business in China.

We will write a custom Report on International Strategic Plan to help Apple company expand in China specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The emergence of foreign trade in China is leading to a rise in foreign direct investment (FDI) and in 2008, the FDI rose to around 110 billion US dollars in China. Moreover, the excellent association involving nations is very significant for economic growth (Li


Globalization Effects on the Economies of the Third World Proposal essay help free: essay help free

Introduction Globalization is concept that has numerous effects on the economic and political systems of any country in the modern world. This means that it affects the growth of the country in a number of ways given the fact that foreigners are allowed to invest freely.

Research shows that locals would not have any advantage in case they are exposed to similar economic and political conditions with foreigners mainly because they do not have similar financial muscles as compared to foreigners.

It is noted that globalization has a number of agents, with technology and multinational corporations being some of them. These agents facilitate the process of globalization by promoting foreign investment.

Research shows that multinational corporations give much pressure on governments of the poor states to implement some of the defective policies that do not benefit the locals. For instance, they advocate for the opening up economies since it gives them an advantage.

Research shows that local companies in the third world cannot compete favorably with multinationals since they do not have adequate capital. Huge conglomerates take advantage of their capital to advertisement goods and services, which is a disadvantage to the local companies.

In terms of politics, globalization affects poor states in a number of ways. One of the effects is that the state is not sovereign since it has to consult all actors in the global system before coming with a policy.

This proposal suggests a study that would look explore the effects of globalization on the economies of the third world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Literature Review Existing body of knowledge suggest that globalization has changed the way polices are made in the third world since no domestic and foreign policy is made without the involvement of major stakeholders, which are usually foreign companies and organizations.

For instance, states in the third world with large deposits of oil are forced to involve foreign oil companies in designing local policies since they are the major stakeholders.

Some foreign organizations are even accused of fueling violence in various parts because they thrive well under hostilities. The problems affecting citizens in Congo serve as an example because American firms extracting resources are known to interfere with peace.

Through globalization, it is claimed that public corporations should be privatized to spur economic development. This affects the locals since they lose jobs.

In the third, privatization of local companies was identified as one of the things that would encourage development since these firms were making loses.

Moreover, they were mismanaged since politicians played a major role in recruiting the staff. Privatization of public corporations encourages profit making.

On the other hand, private companies are in a position of competing favorably since they are managed professionally.

We will write a custom Proposal on Globalization Effects on the Economies of the Third World specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Analysis of literature shows that some scholars are against the idea of privatization since it does not promote the interests of the locals in the developing countries.

Such scholars believe that public enterprises are able to compete favorably if given support and enough funding.

How Globalization Affects Economic Development of the Third World

Dollar, D.,


Communications and Media: Case Study of Google Company essay help

Introduction Sustaining successful operations in any business is normally a universal confrontation that investors and managers experience as the business world, which is gradually experiencing an augmentation in market competition and customer focus.

Precisely, it costs a business some significant amount of resources, work force, and time to expand exponentially and more importantly, to gain global reputation upon which customers can build a permanent trust in its operations.

For several decades, the world has been witnessing a massive influx of approaches, stratagems, and policies enacted within organisations to improve their efficiency primarily to gain customer satisfaction and employee involvement that subsequently enhance corporate image.

A number of organisations in the current decades within developed nations have engaged in an incessant competition to woo customers to consider using their services or buy their goods.

Google Company is perhaps among the most renowned and praised global companies. This study seeks to examine why Google ranks among world’s best companies.

Background of Google Company Perhaps the most outstanding achiever in the global business realm is the most renowned international search engine company known as ‘Google Company.’

The global population and researchers in specific have remained speculative of the uniqueness of this company that has left little known about itself within the public.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Google is one of the global companies that have managed to demonstrate an exceptional success within the shortest period ever (Great Place to Work Institute 2007).

Google Inc. started its operations in the year 1998, when two inventors, Larry Page and Sergey Brin, ingeniously combined efforts to develop the Google search engine.

Larry Page and Sergey Brin “first met at Stanford University in 1995, and in a span of one year, they had managed to develop a search engine Backrub that utilised links to determine the importance of individual WebPages” (Google Inc. 2013, Para.15).

With the support of financier and Sun co-founder, Andy Bechtolsheim, who offered approximately $100,000, Google Inc. officially began its operations in September 1998.

The modern Google Inc The meeting of the two innovators was never in vain. Immediately after 1998, Google Inc. started to grow exponentially to the reckoning of global reputation when ‘Google doodle’ emerged and subsequently in 2000, AdWords came up.

Within four years, viz. on April Fools Day in 2004, the company introduced Gmail to support speedy search, large data storage, and storing of threaded messages (Google Inc. 2013).

After acquiring digital mapping company keyhole, the company got underway with Google Earth Google Maps in 2005 that currently feature in enhancing transit directions, live trafficking, and street-level imagery as Google Earth allow users to explore the moon and the ocean (Google Inc. 2013).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Communications and Media: Case Study of Google Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In 2006, the company made life easier by purchasing the online video sharing site YouTube that allows self-broadcasting, before the little green robot arrived in 2007 that has currently dominated features of several smart phones.

Finally, in June 2011, the company introduced Google project that has enhanced social networking globally. Currently, Google Inc. employs over 30,000 workers continentally.

Google Inc. Ranks among World’s Best Companies Being an Internet communication and technology company that users consult on their daily searches and networking activities, it is beyond doubt that Google Inc. is the most popular company (Place to Work Institute 2007).

Despite a growing number of studies that are developing interests in determining corporate growth and performance improvement within the business world, Google Inc. has received very little attention from researchers and analysts.

Nonetheless, some significant studies that have been developing interest in determining world’s most attractive employers and organisations have seen some imperativeness of focusing on Google Inc.

From the latest global reports developed by these researchers, Google Inc. has constantly been growing to the extent of scooping topmost positions among world’s best multinational companies.

According to studies undertaken by the Great Place to Work Institute (2007), with approximately 440 companies applying for the topmost global ranking and best employers, Google Inc. has featured at the topmost, as business and engineering companies prefer to work for the company in three consecutive years in the United States. See appendix figure 1 A, B


Discussing an Interview: A Female Senior Leader Shed Some Light on the Issues That Women Face in Business Sphere Essay essay help free

Introduction: An Overview of the Business Development Company leadership and leadership skills development have become rather topical issues over the past few decades.

Analyzing some of the issues that have been raised in the course of an interview with a women who has been in a leadership position for a considerable amount of time, one can possibly understand what issues the business world is facing at the moment, as well as analyze the typical characteristics of a leader in general and a female leader in particular..

The Role and Responsibilities of a Leader: A King in His Castle One of the basic complexities about being a leader is that the given position presupposes that a person is able to play many roles equally well.

To be more exact, a good leader is supposed to be able to plan the further strategy of the company according to the statistical data, make important financial decisions, consider the ideas that the employees offer and choose the most reasonable ones, coordinate the work of different departments, etc.

Basically, being a leader means being able to plan the further course of actions that the company is going to undertake, including financial, economical, industrial, organizational ones, etc.

As a result, a leader plays several roles in the organization. As it follows from the interview with a female leader of a large company, a leader is supposed to play the following roles in a company:

Representative of the organization

A leader is supposed to be the face of his own company; by having a conversation with the leader of an entrepreneurship, people, as a rule, evaluate his/her organization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While it is a bit unfair that the work of so many people (i.e., employees, managers, etc.) is assessed on the merits of a leader alone, often the potential customers have no other way to learn about the company other than talking to its leader or learning about him/her in the local news.

Therefore, a leader is personally responsible to every single member of the company for every step that (s)he makes, since these steps have a tangible influence on the company’s reputation.


Needless to say, being a leader presupposes being able to plan the company’s further development and, therefore, the further actions that need to be undertaken.

In addition, a leader must always have a backup plan that must be implemented in case anything goes wrong with the current strategy.


Any organization works like a complex mechanism, with every element in its place. Once a single item goes out of the chord, the whole structure falls apart, and a good leader knows it well. Therefore, the work between various departments must be well coordinated.

Conflict solver

Unfortunately, conflicts are an integral part of working in any organization.

Moreover, most conflicts should not be regarded as something negative; on the contrary, conflicts should be considered as an exercise in problem solving and helping employees adapt towards the changes in a company, as well as set an example of an expected organizational behavior.

We will write a custom Essay on Discussing an Interview: A Female Senior Leader Shed Some Light on the Issues That Women Face in Business Sphere specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More To be more exact, the absence of conflicts within an organization record is not the sign of good leadership; instead, productively solved conflicts are.


Although planning is a crucial skill for a company leader, a number of issues must be decided on the spot, and changing the strategy within such a short amount of time is practically impossible.

Therefore, a leader must be a very good tactician and be able to find a perfect solution for a specific problem in a moment. Therefore, ability to think fast and logically is a crucial skill for a company leader.

Women as Potential Leaders: Why Female Leadership Can and Must Be Encouraged Since the business world has been dominated by men for quite long, even nowadays, it is extremely hard for women to get promoted to a higher position, not to mention becoming the leader of an enterprise.

It must be admitted that, because of chauvinist policies that a number of companies follow discretely, talented and enthusiastic women bump into obstacles when trying to get promoted to the position of a leader.

Although in the present-day world, the issue concerning female leaders of the company has already been brought up and specific initiatives have been started to make sure that companies avoid gender discrimination and/or segregation, sexist attitudes are not a rare encounter in many companies nowadays.

There is no doubt that the approaches chosen my male and female leaders are strikingly different; the reasons for the line drawn between a male and a female leadership style is often attributed to a specific manner of upbringing boys and girls.

For example, even the toys that children play with teach children to apply different skills. There are toy guns for boys to learn to find, save the day and be on top, and dolls for girls to nurture their motherly instincts. Hence, the difference in the leadership approaches stems.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Discussing an Interview: A Female Senior Leader Shed Some Light on the Issues That Women Face in Business Sphere by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, this difference does not mean that women are worse leaders than men – far from it; on the contrary, a number of feminine qualities contribute to becoming a good leader.

Ability to use transformational leadership style

Countless researches have supported the idea that, no matter how perfect a once chosen leadership strategy might be, following the same particular leadership style for ions without changing it will not do a company any good.

However, due to the specific qualities that men train since the childhood, they often appear not to be able to switch fast and smoothly from one leadership style to another.

Unlike men, women, who are known for their flexibility and ability to keep their focus on several issues simultaneously, are generally better at switching to different strategies according to the specifics of the situation in question.

Known as transformational leadership, the given approach has proven to be the most efficient one at present.

Avoiding stressful situations and other conflicts

As it has been mentioned above, many women are trained to use their motherly qualities since the childhood.

Although the given trait of many women’s characters might be considered a tad annoying, it still can be applied to the business environment. By using her skills of softening the rough edges, a woman as leader of

A company is most likely to create a comfortable working environment and, therefore, improve the employees’ performance and/or the production process without putting strain on the employees.

Practically born into being a diplomatist, a woman can handle a conflict within a company by applying various leadership types and introducing efficient behavioral models in a very successful way.

Acknowledging mistakes

To err is human, and, therefore, a company leader, as well as any other member of the company, will inevitably make a blunder sooner or later.

The question is, however, not what the others will think of this slip, but what the leader will learn from it and whether the leader will be able to acknowledge his/her mistake.

As a rule, male leaders are often reluctant to acknowledge their faults, since they are concerned whether the rest of the company will learn about this blunder and make fun of them.

Women, on the opposite, acknowledge their mistakes rather easily, which means that they are ready to learn the lessons from these mistakes to avoid similar blunders in the future.

When speaking of women in the leadership positions, the policies and the cultural specifics of the Muslim states, such as the UAE must be mentioned.

As it is commonly known, in the UAE, as well as in a range of other Muslim countries, women traditionally are offered the role of a housewife and a babysitter by the society, whereas having a career has long been unacceptable in the UAE.

Although it has been a while since the state officially recognized the right of the UAE women to work and be promoted, many women still find it hard to fight discrimination and chauvinism at work.

Therefore, it takes more than enthusiasm for women in the UAE to take the chair of a company president; as a rule, the combination of competence, persistence, enthusiasm and business acumen, as well as the ability to prove one’s worth, are required to get the desired position.

Emiritization in the UAE: Taking Over Public and Private Sectors The UAE did not escape the process of business development, as well as the introduction of female leaders into business field. However, the given process is rather slackened in the UAE due to the cultural specifics of the state.

Instead, the process of emiratization is currently taking place in the state. Emiratization is usually defined as the government initiative to employ the residents of the UAE into public and private sector.

According to the recent estimations, the process of employing people into private sector should be boosted considerably, since the positions in public services have been oversaturated with national workforce.

However, due to the control of the private sector by immigrants, the process might be quite lengthy.

Women in Leadership Positions: Progress and Commentaries As it has been stated above, it follows from the interview that even in the UAE, where the traditions and the idea of a man as a breadwinner have been quite persistent for years, women have finally started taking leadership positions since recently.

However, in the UA, as well as in the rest of the world, the instances of chauvinism in the workplace are spotted quite often, which means that further changes must be inflicted onto business sector.

Recommendations on Becoming a Leader: The Art of Setting an Example As it can be deduced from the interview conducted with a woman in charge of a company, there is no book for being a good leader. While training leadership skills is important, it is also necessary to be inspired about making a company successful.

A true leader must provide not only economical and financial planning, but also an example for every single member of the company to follow.

Indeed, as long as the company leader makes it clear that the established rules work for everyone and not only for the staff, the latter will most likely follow the provided behavior model.

By combining the charismatic leadership approach with the transformational one, the head of a company will doubtlessly succeed in leading his/her organization towards triumph.


Aspects of Leadership Styles Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Introduction Leadership refers to the act of influencing people socially in order to accomplish certain goals or objectives. As such, individual enlists the support of others in order to achieve certain premeditated results.

Additionally, leadership can be described as an act of organizing people and using their individual efforts to accomplish certain goals or tasks. Leadership is the most important factor in achievement of organizational success.

A leader may or may not have authority over juniors but his or her services are important in guiding employees. Effcetive and successful leaders possess certain attributes that enable them guide organizations to success.

These include intelligence, vision, knowledge and skills, good behavior, compassion, positive values and ideals, honesty, and trust. One of the most important aspects of leadership is the style of leadership a leader chooses to adopt.

Behavior determines type and effectiveness of leadership style. Leadership styles include authoritarian, democratic, affiliative, and free reign leadership styles.

Democratic leadership This leadership style is characterized by delegation of responsibilities and focus on teamwork. Leaders who adopt this style value the benefit of delegating leadership responsibilities to juniors. In addition, they encourage teamwork for achievement of better results.

However, they possess authority to make decisions that affect their teams. Democratic leaders involve all members in the decision making process and promote equality among members.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, they encourage open discussions, debates, sharing of ideas and knowledge, and training to empower employees. They recognize need for participation of all members in execution of organizational tasks and achievement of goals.

Members have freedom to make decisions and develop personal plans that fit their goal-achievement strategy. However, there is need for guidance from the leader on effective ways to achieve organizational goals. Democratic leaders are sincere and honest in their actions.

They base their actions and decisions on ethics and reason. As such, they display confidence, which is necessary for employee motivation. Democratic leaders promote innovation and creativity by giving employees freedom to make decisions that affect them and the organization.

Freedom enables employees develop creative strategies and plans of achieving goals and objective. Moreover, democratic leaders are open minded and open to change. They value the importance of embracing change.

Research has found out that democratic leadership results in high productivity, high employee performance, and creativity in an organization. It is a very effective leadership style adopted by many leaders around the world.

Authoritarian This leadership style focuses on controlling employees by ensuring strict adherence to organizational policies and rules. Authoritarian leaders believe in employee supervision as a way of enhancing performance and productivity.

As such, they monitor employees closely to ensure that they adhere to organizational rules at all times. This style is common in the military where soldiers take orders from their commanders without questioning. Authoritarian leaders are usually critics who rarely value employees’ efforts.

We will write a custom Essay on Aspects of Leadership Styles specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is an ineffective leadership style because it leads to job dissatisfaction and creates an environment of cynicism at the workplace. As a result, it demoralizes employees and reduces their productivity and performance.

However, research has shown that the style is effective during times of crisis when prompt action is needed. Good leaders rarely use this style because it undermines the importance of employees to an organization.

Authoritarian leaders rarely involve employees in decision-making process and do not give employees freedom to make personal decisions. It is an ineffective leadership style.

Free-reign leadership style This style involves delegation of roles and tasks to employee. The leader gives employees freedom to make decisions that they deem good for themselves and the organization.

However, if a leader withdraws too much, employees misuse the freedom, which may result in low productivity and inefficiency. Leaders who adopt this style give employees freedom to determine how they work in order to achieve goals.

As such, a leader provides necessary resources to employees and gives them freedom to utilize them as they wish in order to achieve organizational goals. The leader only gives directions or assistance when requested by an employee.

The style is useful when dealing with trustworthy, responsible, highly skilled, knowledgeable, and skilled employees. It is also useful when external professionals are hired to complete certain tasks. However, the style should not be used when dealing with insecure and irresponsible employees.

Affiliative leadership This leadership style strives to create harmony and unity among employees in an organization. Affiliative leaders encourage teamwork and sharing among employees. In addition, they prioritize needs of employees and ensure that employees are always satisfied.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Aspects of Leadership Styles by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This style is used when leaders want to improve organizational communication, motivate employees, increase performance and productivity, and rebuild trust.

It is not recommendable to use this style exclusively because poor performance by individual employees might go unnoticed since it lays emphasis on teamwork.

Transformational leadership This type of leadership focuses on changing the thinking of employees in order to bring change. Transformational leaders challenge and inspire followers to do nonconventional things.

They develop a vision of what they expect to achieve and share it with followers in order to harmonize organizational and employees’ goals. Transformational leaders possess three main traits that define their type of leadership. They are charismatic, visionary, and open-minded.

One strategy used by transformational leaders to inspire followers is to act and behave like role models who employees emulate. They act and behave in ways that motivate employees to adopt similar behaviors and ways of doing things.

They are creative and innovative, and strive to cultivate similar values in their followers.

On the other hand, they encourage followers to develop attitudes that promote accountability and commitment. Many leaders combine aspects of both democratic and transformational leadership styles.

Good work environment Good leaders are made in effective work environments that enhance performance and productivity.

Characteristics of environments that create good leaders include proper communication, open sharing of information, knowledge, and ideas, trust and honesty, collaboration between employees, and mutual respect.

In addition, good leaders are made in environments that have a clear vision and mission, clear goals and objectives, and fair treatment of all members.

An effective work environment should have committed employees who maintain consistency in achieving goals and objectives. Other qualities of an environment than makes good leaders include fairness, good time management, respect, perseverance, and motivation.

Good employees create good leaders because in such a work environment, leaders are not under pressure or stress from employees.

How women can be good leaders One way that women can use to become good leaders is through adoption of good leadership styles. Good leaders are characterized by good leadership styles that guide employees in ways that promotes good communication and relationship between management and employees.

For example, women should avoid adopting leadership styles such as authoritarian leadership styles. Instead, they should adopt effective styles such as transformational and democratic leadership styles. Therefore, women should strive to lead and not command.

Second, women should aim for effective communication at the workplace. Good leaders enhance proper communication by offering positive feedback and encouraging unity among employees.

Third, women should overcome common myths that are associated with women leadership. Many people believe that women cannot handle leadership roles that men handle.

In order to become good leaders, women should realize that such myths only serve to degrade and demean their abilities and potential.

Fourth, women should practice more empathy and compassion towards their followers. Women are more emotional than men are. Therefore, they should use their emotional nature to their advantage by connecting with their followers at personal levels.

This is necessary for development of effective relationships between them and their juniors. Good relationships foster trust and honesty in the workplace. Trust and honesty increase productivity and employee performance.

Emiritization in banks Emiritization refers to an employment policy practiced in the United Arab Emirates (UAE) that facilitates employment of UAE citizens in companies and businesses. The policy has improved level of employment of UAE nationals.

Emiritization in banks involves employment of UAE national in banks as accountants and clerks. Before the policy was enacted, banks used to hire people from foreign countries. The Abu Dhabi government encourages institutions to hire UAE nationals by offering subsidies.

Many sectors were employing foreigners because many Emiratis did not possess adequate knowledge to enable them work in those sectors. However, with the government improving levels of education, the situation is changing.

Banks are gradually absorbing UAE nationals into their teams of employees. This has improved leadership in UAE banks by embracing change that has been sought for many years.

In addition, it has increased leadership opportunities for women. Despite the conservative nature of many UAE countries, rising levels of education are exposing women to more opportunities in the corporate world.

Recommendations Leadership involves development of certain traits that enable future leaders to handle and lead people effectively. These include courage, trust, honesty, intelligence, compassion, and creativity.

These qualities are important for anyone who wishes to become a leader. In addition, developing an attitude of accountability and responsibility is important.

Conclusion The most interesting aspect of leadership from the interview was style of leadership. The style of leadership adopted by a leader determines the level of success achieved in an organization. Leaders adopt various leadership styles.

They include democratic, authoritarian, transformational, and free reign leadership styles. Each of these leadership styles has qualities that characterize leaders who adopt them. for example, democratic leaders are motivational, inspiring, confident, open minded, and creative.

They involve employees in decision-making processes. In olden days, women were considered inferior to men with regards to leadership. However, the situation has changed and women are taking more leadership positions than before.

Women can become good leaders by adopting effective leadership styles, being flexible, accepting challenges, and facilitating creation of an effective work environment. An effective work environment is necessary for creation of good leaders.

Open communication, a clear vision and mission, trust and honesty between colleagues, and clear goals and objectives characterize such an environment.

Emiritization refers to creation of more job opportunities for UAE nationals. It has increased participation of Emiratis in leadership roles especially in banks. In addition, it has given women opportunity to take leadership roles.


Media in the society Report (Assessment) college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction





Introduction Media is a communication network through which news, theatre, education and messages are dispersed. It comprises of distribution mediums such as, magazines, television, posters, cell phone, facsimile, and the internet (Fox


Warby Parker Marketing Plans Evaluation Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

SWOT Analysis

SMART strategy


Works Cited

Introduction The establishment of any business venture has an entrepreneur’s interest at heart, in that profitability no matter the situation has to be realized. That is the core business of any venture, and to do this there has to be a given strategy that a business relies on to ensure it makes progress.

The first few years in any business are truly crucial; most entrepreneurs rarely do market analysis to know which clients to get and keep, rather they use their gut feelings, and sometimes are wrong.

As such, particularly few businesses have survived the first three years simply because they have limited knowledge of their own markets, and end up losing more clients than they gain.

In this regard, we look and analyze Warby Parker; a startup company started by three entrepreneurs. They are Neil Blumenthal, David Gilboa and Jeffery Rader, and their main item of trade is cheap eyeglasses.

The idea was motivated by the fact that traditional suppliers and stores selling these eyeglasses did so at exaggerated fees, so the middle to low income earners in society are locked much to their suffering.

The company wishes to extend its market beyond its traditional territories, meaning it is on a mission to gaining more clients than its competitors in regions mostly dominated by the later.

It wishes to acquire new markets major metropolitan cities such as Los Angeles, Chicago, New York, Atlanta, Miami, Seattle and Poland. The following, therefore, is a ‘SWOT’ analysis of the company.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More SWOT Analysis As at now, due to the nature of the eyeglasses they supply and their target market, the company is best placed among its competitors to emerge the top.

In regions where it is operating it commands the largest figures in terms of returns, profits, consumer base and other facets that could be used to determine the overall well being of the company.

It has come a long way from the infancy stages to where it is now, the strength, therefore, is that they totally understand their client needs. It has a large consumer base with trends, patterns and needs that have been shifting in order to be at par.

The age of the proprietors is also at par with that of their market, so the company truly understands their consumer demands hence the trendy, stylish but cheap eyeglasses. This has ensured a loyal consumer base, and an open accommodative administration.

It has the largest market share; therefore, competitors share a remarkably small chunk of the market and are competing among themselves.

This position is motivated by the fact that Warby is not only a profit seeking entity, but also has a charitable mission. This, therefore, means that its position in the market is unchallenged and will not be challenged anytime soon by a profit seeking ventures (Humphreys 2).

The company’s weakness in this is its reliability on the non- governmental organization, which assists Warby to achieve much of its charity ambitions.

We will write a custom Essay on Warby Parker Marketing Plans specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It makes profits even without this support, but its client base is loyal to the fact that they were initially wooed by the offer of buy one get one eyeglass for free.

The other weakness it has toward attaining its ambitions is the limited knowledge it has in terms of export. As a result, it may take longer than necessary and end up delaying deliveries to its new markets. This does not auger well with new clients abroad.

The opportunities present in this venture are myriad. It has fulfilled its social obligation through offering cheap glasses and giving out offers to its clients and conquering its immediate market.

Expansion, therefore, as an opportunity is inevitable. These opportunities present themselves in the new markets it intends to venture into. A large consumer base also presents opportunities for huge sales volumes; therefore, it enjoys the economies of large scale production (Humphreys 3).

This automatically shuts out competition given that when it feels an imminent threat it has this offer which works to counter competition.

This strategy is always geared to ensure that competition is weakened and hence competitors no longer stays relevant in the market since higher prices denotes an inverse rate in terms of consumer turn over (Humphreys 3).

The weakness as have been experienced is that it is a startup company and, therefore, is still facing significant threats like any other company. These include competition and the maneuverability required to hack into a tight market where bureaucracy takes center stage.

It also enjoys the support from a traditional consumer base; the response it may get from the new markets may or may not encourage them to continue with these ambitions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Warby Parker Marketing Plans by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More SMART strategy The growth and acquisition of these new markets is outlined below in summation thanks to the ‘SMART’ strategy. This is an abbreviated word for each of the letters is symbolic as outlined below:

The company’s goal is ‘Specific’ in that it is focused on expanding its market to acquire new territories. This is important if it is set to expand and increase profits.

The overall objective of the company is to command a following among people in the ages of between eighteen to twenty six years. It also intends to acquire new specific markets through their different marketing strategies.

These, as outlined include designing campaign tools targeting the youth. As a result, therefore, three quarters of its advertisements out there would set out to appeal to the youth.

To woo clients, the company shall venture into TV advertisements running twice from October till January; the first TV advertisement shall feature its emphasis on charity, and the second shall have the attributes that appeal to the youth such as trendy, fashionable and will focus more on eccentric styles in order to tap into the youthful consumer.

Both of these will feature in America’s most prominent shows such as ‘Family Guy,’ ‘How I Met Your Mother’ and the likes.

On social media, the company will have active ‘Twitter’ and ‘Facebook’ accounts specific to the regions these cities are; the target is that by the end of January each of these should have over 100,000 followers.

The company will also conduct college tours as part of its marketing plan with the rubrics such as ‘Look Smart,’ ‘Feel Smart,’ ‘Give Smart’ and ‘Buy Smart.’ These objectives are ‘Measurable’ given the segments they have been divided into and the finances put in place.

The attainability of these objectives is preceded by its previous testimonies as part of their expansion from two years ago; they have set a 3 month timeline to have entered the new markets and get a hold of their clients.

They will hire more staff in order to serve these regions well, the ‘Facebook’ and ‘Tweeter’ accounts and other online interactive accounts should have over 100,000 ‘Likes’ in 3 months. This is possible given its popularity at home, and in the new markets it taps into.

The objectives or goals set are highly ‘Attainable.’ The objectives as outlined are to create awareness, increase product visibility, increase the market share and increase sales within a given time frame.

All the above are ‘Achievable’ tasks, to increase brand visibility it will have to employ the vigorous marketing strategies as outlined above; this has an upward effect on sales. Therefore, it will gain more market share as the product gains acceptability.

The above targets will only be achieved if the given resources are provided for in good time and that logistics are well taken care of initially. The company, much as it will still be operational in other areas it has already conquered, has to shift its focus on the acquisition of these new markets.

It will need the skills and expertise of the marketing department, and also those on freights and exports. The production department will also have to work extra hard and ensure that it delivers on both their normal demands and those of the new markets.

The company shall measure its achievements based on the gains it makes on the field and how quickly it responds to and meet consumer expectation (Meyer 28).

The whole mission as described above has a stated deadline. It, therefore, directly implies that it is ‘Time-bound.’ January is set as the deadline for the whole process, and by then the strategy as employed should be working.

The company would need to conduct a customer satisfaction survey in order to identify client expectation, its product weaknesses and strongholds both the new and traditional markets in order to forge new informed strategies (Menon 19).

Conclusion The recommended study will assist in knowing the nature of its clients in these new markets, their unique needs and, therefore, facilitate customer retention.

Moreover, acquisition would be dealt with by the innovations that result from the need to satisfy consumer needs, for instance, producing more stylish eyeglasses and way cheaper rates than they are offering.

These studies are essential for the sole purpose of eliminating bias while judging the consumer market; the degree to which its loyal customers would want it improve in order to satisfy their needs (Meyer 304).

Works Cited Humphreys, Albert. “SWOT Analysis for Management Consulting”. SRI Alumni Newsletter (SRI International) 1. 1 (2005): 1-8. Print. Menon, Andrew. “Antecedents and Consequences of Marketing Strategy Making”. Journal of Marketing (American Marketing Association) 63. 2 (1999): 18–40. Print.

Meyer, Paul. “What would you do if you knew you couldn’t fail? Creating S.M.A.R.T. Goals”. Attitude Is Everything: If You Want to Succeed Above and Beyond. Meyer Resource Group, Incorporated, The ISBN 1. 1 (2003): 304-4.


Modernity in Dumb Luck Essay (Critical Writing) essay help: essay help

The colonial era in Vietnam presents a very unfortunate experience to the Vietnamese people. Development and improvement of people’s life were measured and understand through unfounded scope that was targeted to please a few select members of society.

The satirical representation of the concept of modernization presents how the Vietnamese society so much adores western ideals that they no longer question how logical it is to adopt the western civilizations (Trong 4-13).

Set in the “late-colonial era”, Dumb Luck, candidly explains the emergence of the modernization and how irrelevant to people’s quest for better life continues to be an illusion.

Modernization is the adoption of foreign ideals that are trendy, robust, and more outgoing while avoiding the indigenous way of life that is perceived to be retrogressive (Zinoman 16-32).

According to Frank (185-187), modernization is the quest for better fashion that is mainly associated with European ideals rather than the overall improvement of people’s way of life.

In the Dumb Luck novel, modernism is clearly represented as a form of colonial capitalism aimed imposing western ideas to people’s economic, political, and social undertakings. Modernity is therefore depicted as anything that is in line with the Western way of life.

It is a civilization that is in line with the European social, economic, political, cultural, and technological inclinations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Trong (36-41) reveals that modernization is the addiction to western fashion. Dominance of fashion, mania for sports, and engagement in liberated sexual customs are believed to be the in-thing trends in Vietnam. Most Vietnamese resent their indigenous lifestyle.

In the business arena, anything that reflects the European way of life is considered very fashionable and more appealing to the masses.

This is a proof that colonial capitalism is an unwarranted approach to the development of a country’s economy as it mainly focuses on advancing the policies and operational mechanisms of the colony and not the interests and common good of the citizens (Zinoman 29-35).

Through the mockery and satirical revelation of free market that is imposed on the Vietnamese business environment, it emerges that the free market concept is adopted without undertaking in-depth analysis of its relevance and applicability.

To a greater extent, modernity is measured by how well colonial capitalism is enshrined in a given system of governance.

Through his satirical explanation of how modernity affects the Vietnamese economy and people’s way of life, Trong (67-92) manages to reveal the fact that most development programs and business strategies being adopted are focused on increasing people level of consumption.

For that matter, industrialization is not the focus on the prevailing economic activities.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Modernity in Dumb Luck specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Mercenary adoption of “free market” that seems to fit the Buddhists society is not in line with the economic and social situation in the country (Frank 186-188).

This is revealed in the fact that police officers are mainly forced on imposing impose fines to themselves in order to raise more revenue needed to meet the targets of a free market economy.

The existence of low-class people reveals that modernization is an illusion that neither materializes nor does reflect in the way people in the Dumb Luck lives.

Sadly, the rage for modernization is not accompanied by transforming the country’s economic policies. Investment policies and economic way of life is also not reflected in the manner in the overall economic situation in the country (Trong 9-32).

With reference to fashion, modernizing emerges as a consumption trend and an unreasonable adoration of western ideals. The “blind adoption” of the western way of life is undertaken by most people without questioning the degree to which certain western values relate to the local situation.

The “fantastic social ascent” depicts the failure to localize western ideals so as to effectively meet the local demands, challenges, and development opportunities. Modernity is not a culture.

It is a “fashionable way of life” through which western products and services are purchased and used by the local people (Frank 76-124).

The unexpected and very ridiculous rise in the colonial society is based on the “blind adoption” of western principles that do not fully relate to the local society reveals an ineffective system of governance that is bent on doing anything to please the western superiors.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Modernity in Dumb Luck by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The consumption patterns envisaged in the novel depict an outright failure by the government to adhere to modernized development patterns aimed at enhancing reliability, efficiency, and realistic development agenda in Vietnam.

Modernity as revealed in the Dumb Luck is a very superficial concept that does not seem to positively affect people’s lives. In the novel, modernity emerges as a superficially adopted theme that does not relate to people’s way of life.

It is crucial to appreciate that there exist a wide disparity between the economic and social ideals of western society and that in Vietnam.

The fact that modernity and traditional values seem to contradict is an indicator that modernity pertains to superficial issues that have continued to negatively affect people’s way of life due to their poor perception and lack of understanding of modernity.

Oppression through lack of “free marriage”, free remarriage”, and “free divorce” reveals how unmerited western rules are to the local people (Trong 18-32).

The described concept of modernity totally ignores the fine traditions of the Vietnamese population and the need to respect and uphold human dignity.

In the Dumb Luck novel, the description of the horrible experiences witnessed by the Vietnamese soldiers reveals that modernity is not a culture but rather a superficial concept that mainly benefits the high and mighty in society.

It ignores the plight of the weak and the poor in society (Trong 97; Frank 178). The explanation of modernity in Dumb Luck is an enlightenment of the tribulations and economic challenges that Western civilization poses to Vietnamese.

Nevertheless, modernism has a lot of importance to people. If well implemented, the ideals, values, and operational strategies of modernity could revamp the economy and ensure that country’s economic situation and cultural aspects are addressed in time.

Soldiers emerge as the major victims of modernization due to the direct inhuman circumstances that they get exposed to in order to promote a free market economy.

While the concept of modernization is portrayed as a theoretical and unfounded belief system that fosters poverty and retrogressive social practices, its economic benefits can never be ignored.

Modernization is a crucial driver of the economy and the overall improvement of people’s way of life. Only multinational companies and large business enterprises stand to benefit for the modernization evidenced in the Dumb Luck novel (Trong 94-95).

The novel fails to clearly articulate the benefits accrued from adoption of western values and their imposition to the local society. Unreasonable application of modernity could be very detrimental to a society.

It is apparent that modernization is of no significance to the lower class and less civilized members of the Vietnamese society (Trong 56-71). It mainly mattered to colonial urban Vietnamese.

This is mainly due to the fact that the nature of the outlined modernity focuses on the costly “high-end lifestyles” and not on the need to address the need to augment the common good of all people.

Modernity thrives on benefiting the political class and the major players in national economic matters (Frank 78-187).

Fairy Hotel is a symbol of colonial capitalism and the need to root out western ideals (Trong 97). The hotel signifies the dire need for political revitalization and adoption of new economic policies.

As an irresistible lakeside inn, Fairyland Hotel, denotes people’s zeal and irresistible desire to liberate Vietnamese citizens from the oppression that they have been exposed to for a very long time.

The rituals performed during the inauguration of the hotel were meant to exorcise and purify the atmosphere.

The hotel and the rituals represent people’s desire to fully abide by “their roots” and not to be swayed by the many fashionable intellectuals who are focused on enhancing colonialism (Turing 97).

Also known as the White Bamboo Lake and Old Fish Road, it is sarcastic that the people who engage in immoral activities do it secretary due to the respect and symbolic value that the hotel has to the Vietnamese people.

The hotel also symbolizes people’s resistance to change and the continued defilement of rich social and cultural values that could otherwise help in liberating the Vietnamese.

Works Cited Frank, Aurthur. Letting Stories Breathe: A Socio-Narratology, London, University of Chicago Press, 2010.

Trong, Vu Phung. “Dumb Luck”, Indochina: An Ambiguous Colonization, London, University of Michigan Press, 2002.

Zinoman, Peter. Introduction to Dumb Luck, London, University of Michigan Press, 2002.


Can HPWPs be implemented in any organizations? Analytical Essay essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

The AMO model




HPWPs’ implementation



Introduction The concept of globalization can increase market competition among businesses. The current financial crisis affecting most world economies today can complicate market globalization for organizations.

Organizations may shift their focus to productivity maximization by developing means of improving their quality of products and services. Productivity maximization can be achieved through human resource management (HRM) practices.

HRM is based on the idea that the success or failure of an organization depends on how the employees are managed. Human resource practices are vital elements in organizations and their impact on the performance of organizations is crucial.

Most HR practices like compensation determine the level of performance of an organization. HR practices like recruitment, training and compensation influence organizational performance (Githrie, 2001).

High performance work systems (HPWS) can be developed in the process of creation of efficient HR practices that may improve the performance of organizations. HPWS suggests that certain HR practices can be more effective if implemented in “bundles” rather than separately.

High performance work practices are HR practices that improve the performance of employees and those of the organizations. A number of Fortune 1000 companies that implement HPWPs register improvements in their organizational performances (kling, 2005).

Many organizations implement HPWPs in order to enhance their performance. However, not all organizations can implement HPWPs. I disagree with the idea that HPWPs can be implemented in any organization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This paper puts into perspective the theory or model of HPWPs which is referred to as the AMO model. The model explains how HPWPs work when implemented in “bundles”. Afterwards, the paper will discuss the reasons why HPWPs cannot be implemented in any organization.

This aspect forms the basis of my thesis. The implementation of HPWPs is not common in small organizations. This fact is because of the cost and the size of the organizations. The implementation can be expensive and not many small organizations may be willing to incur the costs.

Certain organizations like the Japanese Construction Company for which I work employs workers on a contractual basis for a short term and may not be willing to commit its limited resources on the workers.

My organization can be used as a case study to justify why HPWPs cannot be implemented in every organization. Small organizations use simple structures that may not necessitate complex management systems like the large organizations.

The nature of the organization also determines whether HPWPs may be needed. Studies indicate that organizations in the manufacturing sector are more likely to implement HPWPs than those that deal with service provision.

The manufacturing sector is more likely to be in control of the production process than the service one. In my analysis, the implementation of HPWPs enhances performance which is evident in an organization’s financial results (Combs et al, 2006).

HPWS’ constituents include employee involvement, job rotations, team work and open communication in organizations.

We will write a custom Essay on Can HPWPs be implemented in any organizations? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The AMO model Organizations may face stiff competition from local and international competitors as a result of globalization. The competition may put pressure on them to develop new HR practices that may enhance a competitive advantage over their business rivals.

These practices may aim at improving the quality of products and services and increase the rate of production. The implementation of high performance work practices (HPWPs) may be the solution that HRM may depend on to achieve its objectives.

HPWPs aim at improving and developing the skills of employees, motivating them and achieving flexibility in their work. Employees can be the foundation of an organization and an important element in achieving and maintaining competitiveness in the organization.

HPWPs provide the management with different approaches of leadership like the reduction of management levels and completion of tasks by the managers. HR practices cannot be effective on their own.

They have to be supported by other systems including performance measures, communication and total quality management (TQM) systems. TQM involves maintaining high standards of quality in the entire organization.

HPWPs engage HR management practices that include recruitment, selection, training, development, compensation plans and employees’ involvement (Appelbaum et al, 2000).

The HR practices that constitute the HPWS are delivered in three bundles namely, abilities (A), motivation (M) and Opportunities (O) (Appelbaum et al, 2000). Trainings offered by organizations enhance and develop the skills of employees and can either be internal or external.

Compensation plans like increased salaries and awards motivate the employees. Opportunities for promotions and sharing of information also increase the employees’ desire to work harder. Teamwork and involvement of employees in decision making are important in an organization.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Can HPWPs be implemented in any organizations? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More High performance work practices may be the solution to improving performance and raising the standards of quality in organizations. Organizations that implement high performance work systems are referred to as high performance work organizations (HPWOs).

HPWPs’ practices have existed for a long time. The delivery of these practices in bundles ensures that performance is improved “gradually”. To ensure effectiveness, HPWPs have to be aligned to the goals of the business.

Abilities Human resource management should encourage the organization to invest in human capital. HPWPs include HR practices that focus on employees’ training and skills’ development. An organization can cater for the costs of the training or subsidize them.

The trainings can be offered internally by the organization or externally through outsourcing. The organization needs to view its resources in a long term perspective instead of a short term one that may be focused on cost cutting.

The training programs should educate the employees and improve their existing skills or develop new ones.

Motivation Involving employees in the making of important decisions of the organization creates trust in them and enhances their communication with the management. Organizations should restructure their work designs to make them interesting and to promote their effectiveness.

HR practices give power of control to the employees. This power motivates the employees as they tend to feel appreciated and involved in decision making by the organizations.

Employees should develop the desire to work for their organizations in order to achieve and maintain high performance. Employees who are poorly motivated may not deliver good results for their organization. These employees can give their business competitors undue advantage.

The organization should also put into place reward and compensation schemes. Rewarding employees for their work enhances their commitment to the organization.

The rewards can be financial like increased salaries, bonuses, benefits and profit sharing or they can be in form of promotions. Performance-based rewards may be the most important aspects of motivation and high performance.

Organizations have to exercise caution when remitting these rewards as inadequate payments can cause de-motivation in employees. Other rewards like flexible work, career plans and “friendly” policies can be used to motivate and instill a sense of commitment in the employees.

Maintaining open communication is an important aspect of motivation. An organization should share information about the company and its performance with the employees to make them feel trusted.

The employees should have access to the company’s information including its operations and financial reports. This fact oversees that employees at every level are familiarized with the objectives and future plans of the organization.

The management of the Federal Express Company creates a video interaction program which the employees can use to keep themselves informed about the company. The information is updated regularly to ensure that the employees are updated information of the company.

The knowledge of the future plans of the company creates a sense of employment security in the employees. It is not common for many organizations to maintain open communication with their employees.

The organizations may fear that their lower cadre of employees may be empowered like those at the top management. Many employers prefer maintaining hierarchical differences among their employees.

The differences may lower an organization’s performance.

The management needs to understand that for employees to perform to their level best, the latter need to be aware of the organization’s objectives, its operations and current financial position so that they can align their output to the organization’s goals.

Organizations like the Fortune 1000 companies work towards involving their employees in decision-making especially in matters that affect them like salaries and retrenchments.

This move enables the companies to register an increase in performance as a result of the employees feeling motivated and trusted.

Lack of sharing of information creates mistrust between the employees and their employers. It tends to make them believe that the management may be hiding something from them which can threaten their job security in future.

The lack of trust results in reluctance in the employees’ performance and they may not be motivated to take organizational initiatives. The Japanese Construction Company employees are not motivated because the management is not willing to commit its resources on them.

As a result of the lack of motivation, the company not only experiences low employees’ motivation and company’s performance, but also high employee turnover rates.

Opportunities In the past, organizations focused on the technical aspects of organizations like administration and equipments than the human performance aspects. Today, research shows that an organization’s high or low performance is determined by the employees’ attitudes towards their work.

Involving employees in planning their own work offers them the opportunity to utilize their abilities and skills.

The employees may get an opportunity to contribute to the success of the organization either by providing creative solutions to problems or developing new ideas on products and services creation.

The Federal Express Company realizes this fact and formulates a feedback segment in its interactive video program which enables the employees to give their views on the company’s management. It also allows them to offer possible solutions to the problems facing the company.

Human potential can be explored through opportunities at work. The employers need to create “environments” that encourage employees to contribute their ideas to the running of the organizations.

The management should involve employees in work meetings where the work policies that affect them can be formulated, problems discussed and their solutions sought. Teamwork is an important aspect of high performance work practices and should also involve the management.

During teamwork, employees need to interact with people that they may otherwise not interact with. The employees need to share and exchange ideas and information on emerging trends in organizational behavior.

The involvement of teamwork by the management gives the employees an opportunity to present their ideas. Working in teams improves the employees’ social skills and gives them the courage to explore their creativity.

It also gives them a chance to solve any existing conflicts between them and the management or fellow employees. Employees may use the opportunities to express their grievances and concerns about each other and the management.

The opportunities reduce the gap between the “top” management and the employees in the “front line” of the organization. This aspect in turn creates a sense of connection between the two. In 1988, Colgate-Palm Olive established a new branch in Cambridge.

It decided to implement HPWPs through the use of teamwork. As opposed to its usual practice of assigning its production processes to different departments, the management of Colgate-Palm Olive decided to use one team to handle all the processes.

The team was in charge of bottle making, filling and packaging of the company’s products. Today, people may be conditioned to individual thinking which may be the reason why it is hard to employ team-based work systems.

Rewards can be usually administered based on an individual’s ability to make independent decisions and achievements. Organizations should learn to appreciate diversity of the ideas of their employees and their contributions.

The management should inform the employees on what is expected of the team-based work to ensure that teamwork is effective. The employers should also reward teamwork and not just individual accomplishments.

HR practices cannot be separated from employees’ performance because the two complement each other. HPWPs not only improve performance but also quality in any organization. HPWPs increase flexibility and employees’ job satisfaction.

They also improve employees’ skills through the trainings and job rotations. Employees can be able to make crucial company decisions, plan their own work and manage their work teams and in the process, improve their skills.

The skills’ improvement may be derived from the employees’ assumption of new and challenging tasks. In my evaluation, this flexibility facilitates acceptance of the changes that take place overtime.

Attracting and retaining an efficient workforce are the core objectives of human resource management (Frauenheim, 2009). To achieve the mentioned objectives, the employers should implement HPWPs in order to engage their employees.

Employees’ engagement is defined as the level of organizational commitment of employees to their organizations and their initiatives. The key factor of employees’ engagement depends on both horizontal and vertical communication.

This form of open communication shifts the leadership paradigm from a dictatorial to a democratic one. In my assessment, employees require information, training and skills development in order to get a clear perspective of their organizations’ position and understand their roles (Liao et al, 2009).

Organizations must for that reason continuously invest in human capital and maintain open communication channels. Incentives should be created to motivate employees to perform to their maximum levels and to enhance their commitment to the organization.

HPWPs’ implementation Globalization and the changes in the business environment bring about the need to implement HPWPs to control competition among businesses. Many organizations develop high performance work systems to facilitate the achievement and sustenance of high performance.

High performance work practices include inclusive recruitment and selection of employees, training, reward schemes and performance management. In my investigation, HPWPs facilitate the “acquisition” and “retention” of an efficient workforce (Githrie, 2001).

High performance work organizations may be able to achieve increased productivity as a result of the high performance work practices. The turnover of employees also reduces with the implementation of HPWPs.However, not all organizations can implement HPWPs.

Small organizations cannot implement HPWPs mainly because of their restricted resources in comparison to large organizations (Welsh and White, 2006). The implementation of HPWPs can be costly in terms of meeting the costs of employees’ trainings whether it is the full cost or part of it.

Most of the times, the small organizations opt to use their limited resources to meet the costs of production rather than invest it in human capital. The Japanese Construction Company employs workers on a contractual basis.

The contracts expire in the year 2015 hence the management is not willing to commit a lot of resources on the employees in their training and skills’ development.

As opposed to the complex structures of large organizations, the “simple” structures of small organizations facilitate fast and informal management styles.

Large organizations may use complicated structures that require the use of effective means of “aligning” the output of employees to the strategic objectives of the organization.

This fact may eliminate the need for extra expenditures on the implementation of formal management systems that are brought about by HPWPs.

Most small organizations may not be ready to spend on human resources’ specialists. In my hypothesis, this fact gives the proprietors the responsibility of decision making (Matlay, 2003) meaning that the decision to employ HPWPs may be based on the management’s perception of HPWPs.

Most of these proprietors may end up viewing the implementation as an unnecessary cost. The limited finances do not also support reward schemes like wage increment, profit-sharing and bonuses. The Japanese Construction Company tries to limit its expenditure.

It may not consider improving the salaries of its workers. I suggest that the emergence of globalization and technological advancements continues to change the labor model from a long-term to a short term one (Dau-Schmidt, 2001).

The Japanese Construction Company may only hire the needed skills for a given time. It may be unwilling to invest in human capital like training because the employees may not be in employment long enough for the employer to recover the investment.

The contracted employees at the construction company may not undergo on-the-job training. This fact is because the management may consider that after the workers’ contract comes to an end in 2015, the employees may no longer work for the company.

In this regard, the company may not have enough time to recover the resources that it has invested in the employees. The workers of the construction company may use the gained skills in other jobs.

The work environment in the Japanese Construction Company may not encourage the implementation of HPWPs. The stiff competition among business that is evident today may lead to the increase of “poaching” of employees of the Japanese Construction Company by its competitors.

A number of organizations especially the large ones “poach” trained employees from small organizations. The organizations can be able to do so because their financial position allows them to offer large incentives like high salaries and bonuses.

This risk renders small organizations unwilling to undertake HR practices like investing in human capital. The small organizations opt for the selection and recruitment of already trained and skilled employees.

The Japanese Construction Company prefers to employ skilled workers so that it does not spend its limited resources on training them. The nature of an organization and its operations also determine whether HPWPs can be implemented or not.

Most organizations that implement high performance work practices are those that deal with the manufacturing of goods. In my assessment, the manufacturing sector involves the use of intricate and hazardous equipments or machinery (Combs et al, 2006).

The management of the organizations needs to develop policies and procedures that ensure that the employees are trained on their use and safety. The organizations also have to keep on training the employees due to the fact that technology and business environment changes may take place.

This fact means that the employees should be trained on the new equipment and products. These changes and the need to remain flexible for the purposes of adaptability make the implementation of HPWPs appealing to the organizations.

HPWPs may not be popular with organizations that deal with service provision. In my evaluation, the assumption is that employees in service-based organizations may not be affected by changes in technology like in the manufacturing companies (Combs et al, 2006).

Unlike the manufacturing companies,the service-based ones may not depend on the management for the “supply” of skills. Organizations in the service provision sector may be in a position to develop the needed skills without formal training.

The effectiveness of HPWPs is hence greater in the manufacturing organizations than in the service-based ones, thus reducing the need for HPWPs.

In my investigation, organizations in the service –based sectors cannot exercise a lot of control on the “final” results as is the case of the manufacturing ones (Combs et al, 2006).

Due to the lack of “control”, HPWPs cannot be implemented in these organizations as they may not have clear impacts on the performance of the organizations. The effectiveness of teamwork is also more visible in manufacturing organizations.

This fact is because employees from different departments may be bound by the “interdependency” of the stages of the manufacturing process. The production processes in service-based organizations are not heavily interdependent on each other.

A number of state policies affect the implementation of high performance work practices. The policies do this by influencing the implementation of the HR practices in HPWS.

The influences deter the implementation of HPWPs. All the policies that are formulated to protect employment may not be relevant to the HPWPs that deal with recruitment and selection or training and development.

Organizations that are governed by the policies may be unable to implement HPWPs. Organizations should ensure that they familiarize themselves with different state policies and their implications on the national business “environment” in which they intend to operate.

Organizations with complex management hierarchies cannot adopt HPWPs. The implementation of HPWPs encourages the sharing of all information and the involvement of employees in decision making.

The management of organizations that have complex hierarchies may not be willing to hand over the responsibility of decision-making to employees in the lower chain of command. This fact is viewed as giving employees control of the organization’s management.

The management may not also be ready to listen to the contribution of the employees because the interests of the latter may be secondary to the organization’s welfare.

The organization’s approach may compel the employees to believe that the top management is the only one with the authority to make decisions. The employees may perceive themselves as not having a “meaningful voice” in the making of important decisions or control of their work plans.

The senior leadership can be more comfortable with the “command” and “control” kind of leadership style. The kind of communication systems employed in the organizations can be inaccessible and formal.

Most of these organizations recruit and select employees for promotion from their current workers and do not engage in sourcing for feedback.

In my hypothesis, the responsibility of the maintenance of the employees’ welfare is usually at the discretion of the organization for which they work (Szasz, 2007).

Many organizations that employ workers on a contractual basis may be unable to effectively cater for their employees’ welfare due to the absence of the benefits that are linked to short-term contracts. The organizations may also have restricted use of available resources.

I postulate the idea that due to the high employee turnover rates experienced by various organizations, their management may formulate policies and procedures that favor cost-cutting (Bohlander


Levendary Café Analysis Report scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Management Challenges Faced by Mia Foster Leadership Change

When Mia Foster took over Levendary Café as the Chief Executive Officer, it had been led since its inception by Howard Leventhal and a group of long-serving heads of departments who were responsible for all packages that Levendary offered.

This move created a conservative way of working and approaching issues that made the company what it was then. Therefore, when Mia Foster was brought, there was fear from investors on her ability to manage the company to new heights further than it had reached before.

Mia in this case faced transitional challenges that came with change. She had to convince investors that she had the ability to move the company to new heights after analysts felt the company had exhausted its domestic base.

The biggest challenge that Mia had was to convince sceptics that she had the ability to carry the company forward now that she was the new boss because the company was listed on the stock exchange and such analytical scepticism would affect the price of its stock on the market.

This case therefore required her to work hard by cutting an immediate image that will convince shareholders of her abilities to run the company not just locally but also internationally.

According to Santhidran et al. (2013), change management is very dynamic, as it requires the implementer of change to take firm action (p. 349).

She therefore needs to convince investors that she has the necessary expertise to shift the company to a global stage and keep it there. Levendary’s plans to move to the Chinese market have to be boosted by Mia’s strategies on how she envisions the Chinese market and take immediate steps.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Cross Cultural Management

Mia took over the management of Levendary Café when Howard Leventhal had already initiated a move to the Chinese market.

Thus, Mia had challenges towards expanding the market further from where Leventhal had left. Leventhal had entrusted the management of the Chinese entry to Louis Chen who had worked his way into impressing him.

Chen’s management capabilities were not known nor tested by the company. However, he was able to convince Leventhal to give him the Job, which he did. The company had built its name over a long period through the services it offered as well as a brand name that it used for identification.

All its outlets had been made in a similar fashion by depicting the same theme and a common menu that would be found in all outlets. Although the company varied its menu’s depending on the location of the stores, it was apparent that this varying increased its operational expenses.

This case was different from the Chinese market, which required a diverse list of options and more so with an Asian touch. This issue led to Chen setting up independent menus for the restaurants he opened with only the name being the common factor that identified the outlets.

This strategy proved to be a challenge to Mia because, on one hand, she needed to run the company as a franchise by serving its signature menu, while on the other hand she needed to break new ground.

According to Kawar (2012), management varies across cultures and each culture has adopted a specific management style (p. 106).

We will write a custom Report on Levendary Café Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Chinese market required a more Asian menu with rice a part of its signature thus posing as a challenge to Mia on how she would handle the situation as it required a move away from the traditional American menu.

Resistance to Change

Mia faced the challenge of resistance to change from two fronts that made the scenario very complicated. On one hand, she faced resistance to the approach that Chen had employed in starting up the Chinese chain by the other American managers who have been there for a long time.

When Chen took Levendary to China, he made so many changes that had not been authorised by the main office back in America. According to him, this strategy was the best way of penetrating the Chinese Market.

This move however was not acceptable by other managers from the headquarters who had been there for a very long time being responsible for developing the company to what it is today.

Therefore, Mia had a challenge in navigating the crisis because she had the culture of the company to keep while on the other hand she needed to break into the Chinese market, which according to Chen, needed a different style.

According to Battilana (2012), “…agents of change may need to overcome resistance from other members of their organisation and encourage them to adopt new practices” (p. 381).

Mia has therefore to find a way of convincing the team at the headquarters on the need to break from tradition if it was necessary. On the other hand, Chen was used to having a free hand in making decisions concerning China.

The coming in of Mia with some probing questions seems to upset him. Chen was resisting the change that Mia was coming in with that would require him to conform to the set standards as well as be answerable to authorities at the head office.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Levendary Café Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Mia needed in this case to stamp her authority and enforce the necessary changes as long as they were not going to affect the business negatively.

Strategic Planning

The entry of Levendary into the Chinese market can be described as casual from the way it was executed by the then Chief Executive Officer Howard Leventhal.

According to the report at hand, there seems to have been no research done on the Chinese market concerning the entry point as well as the expansion program. All that the Leventhal did was to entrust the whole affair with Chen with the belief that he knew what Levendary upheld.

The company targeted China as the new grounds in which they could invest. However, they did not have a strategic plan for the Chinese market thus leaving Chen to do as he thought was right.

This issue brought about confusion in the financial reporting procedures, which were not standard to the U.S reporting standards, which therefore would force Mia to come up with a strategic plan that should be used by the company to enter into the Chinese market.

Sibony (2012) presents inertia as the trickiest problem in strategic planning and often keeps capital, people, and other resources stuck in similar allocations (p.94). The company did not have a strategic plan for China.

All it did was to copy and paste the American model to the Chinese market hoping it would work the way it worked in America. That is why Chen was made an intern on a rotational basis to learn about the company’s operations in America.

Therefore, Mia will have to come up with a specific strategic plan for China as a way of penetrating the Chinese market.

Future Prospects of the Market Place in China The Chinese market should be the new focus for Levendary to centre on as it charters new ways of reinventing itself. According to the report, Levendary has exhausted the American market in such a way that it cannot continue expanding at the rate it uses to expand previously.

This case therefore means that there will be a stagnation of profits, which might as well drop in the end. Levendary should invest in the Chinese market because China is one of the most populous nations in the world. Thus, it offers an opportunity for all to do business there.

The big population and the very large territorial land have made China the new destination for many big companies wishing to diversify their business to other countries.

China had for a long time practiced an economy of exclusion whereby foreign businesses were denied permission to open shops there.

This case has however changed with the change in policy that has now leaned towards the free market hence opening up the potential that the Chinese market had for a long time.

The prospects of Levendary succeeding in China are high because the Chinese market can largely be described as a virgin market with very good potential for tapping, which should therefore give Levendary the impetus of moving fast into the Chinese market and cut a niche for its business.

The other encouraging factor about the Chinese market is the rise in its urban population, which has risen by a 10% margin in the last ten years to about 46%.

This finding is an indication that many people have moved to work in the urban areas and that they will or they might have to eat outside home.

A large working population in urban areas is a blessing to the restaurant business because it acts as a source of clientele who are expected to eat there at different times of the day.

The economic growth of China is also a positive indicator of its market potential. Currently, China has been recording an annual growth to its GDP at the rate of 14.5%.

This figure is one of the highest GDP growths in the world, acting as an indicator to the growth in purchasing power of the Chinese population. Therefore, Levendary has an opportunity to exploit some of these market potentials at a young stage to establish itself within the Chinese market.

So far, there have been only a handful of foreign establishments, which have been able to penetrate the Chinese market such as pizza hut, McDonald’s, and KFC.

Although these establishments have recorded success by opening up many stores in China, they still have not been able to satisfy the market potential that the Chinese market offers. So far, they have just been able to open up outlets in the major cities only.

The Chinese market is made up of a very big young population, which is attracted to the western lifestyle, which is ready to buy into the American menu. This people should form a big target for Levendary because it is the trend for the future.

The advantage of the young Chinese market other than being big is that the Americans are liberal in their choice of menu and that they are ready to spend much more above the normal Chinese market rates.

Most of the American outlets that opened in the Chinese market set their prices along the American market, which are far much higher than the Chinese market.

This therefore restricted them to districts where there is a big population of expatriates who would provide a market for their products.

However, with the young Chinese population setting the trend, Levendary should take the first opportunity to open many stores with an American menu that would attract the young Chinese population.

Levendary should also vary its menu to have an Asian touch. Levendary’s business is in the quick service segment. According to the report, many foreign outlets serving a Chinese menu have succeeded in penetrating the Chinese market.

Therefore, Levendary should move away from its traditional American menu to offer a variety that would allow it to have a Chinese touch as a way of introducing itself to the Chinese market, which is a bit conservative.

The menu should be based on rice dishes, which are a preference for many besides being priced along the low Chinese pricing. This strategy will require Levendary’s entry into the Chinese market to be multipronged in that it enters the market at different levels.

The future of the Chinese market remains big because of the stability of the Chinese market. So far, China’s per capita growth has leaped from RMB 6282 ($942) – RMB17175 ($2576). This growth should give Levendary hope to continue with its pursuit of the Chinese market.

The company should employ a different tactic towards the Chinese market because the dynamics are different between it and the American market.

The top managers back in America should become flexible in the way they approach the Chinese market by not imposing the American style on China. These two countries have different cultures that are distinct.

Thus, the approach employed should be one that will capture the attention of the Chinese market.

Therefore, Chen should be given an opportunity to come up with workable ideas that he feels will capture the attention of the market instead of him being forced to employ foreign approaches that would not work.

The management should take its time to understand the needs of the Chinese market before coming up with a signature product that the company would wish to use as its identity (Hilmerson


Responsibility and Attributes towards the Natural World Report (Assessment) online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Acts that Destroy the Natural World

Responsibilities towards nature

Preservation of nature

Conservation of nature

Planting of trees and creation of nature parks

Uses of nature



Introduction The connection between human kind on one hand and nature and the environment on the other becomes weaker as time goes by due to rapid urbanization and growth of towns and technology. It has been very difficult for individuals living in urbanized areas to appreciate nature because they do not always experience it.

People who live in urban areas lack fundamental attributes and responsibility towards nature because they do not perceive nature as important due to lack of first hand experience. Technological innovations should not be rated above the need to conserve the natural environment.

Most technological inventions may at given points need the products of nature as resource materials meaning that technology and nature can be interdependent. The impact of technology on the environment cannot however be underestimated because technology has made negative impacts on the environment than positive ones.

Acts that Destroy the Natural World Various activities performed by humans pose dangers to the environment by destroying, altering or worsening the state of the natural world. The most common activities by human kind on the encroachment of the natural environment include farming, industrial operations, housing and infrastructural operations.

This encroachment has led to the deterioration and even extinction of various natural species within the environment. Pollution comes as a result of human encroachment on the environment that has led to industrialization and urbanization. The industries lead to urbanization of towns and emit greenhouse gases to the environment.

Vehicles and other machinery that use petroleum fuels also emit gases destroy the ozone layer of the earth. These gases contribute to global warming that has led to melting of ice caps, increase in ocean levels, heat strokes, drought and also famine. The clearing of natural habitats, poaching, lumbering and burning of charcoal also destroys the natural resources.

The said activities destroy the habitats of natural plant and animal species and this leads to their extinction and eradication. Lumbering of rare species of trees also leads to extinction of rare plant species. Reclamation of natural environments such as wetlands, swamps, lakes and ever glades also destroys the natural environment.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These natural habitats preserve both animal and plant species. They are also used to filter the water flowing into them and also are used in controlling flood, siltation and soil erosion.

Responsibilities towards nature Without nature, human existence would cease to be a reality. Most people do not really know and appreciate nature. Sensitization efforts towards environmental conservation and preservation should be made through human awareness campaigns.

The responsibility towards conservation of nature should be inculcated into the society starting from kindergartens to universities. Young children should be aware of their responsibilities even when certain of them live in urban areas.

Preservation of nature Preservation of nature involves the act of maintaining the present conditions of nature or natural places that have not been misused by humans.

Due to human encroachment into different environments, various wild landscapes, natural wild habitats, species of wild animals and plants have been destroyed, lost and certain have also become extinct because they cannot survive in the new conditions that the humans have interfered with in the area. The need for formation of new nature preservation organizations should be enhanced.

The existing organizations of environmental preservation should be strengthened through advocacy initiatives and increased funding by the government. The government should also integrate relevant curriculum in the education system to facilitate education on environmental preservation to the population from children of small ages to adults in college levels.

Conservation of nature Conservation of nature involves the sustainable use and management of nature and the renewable and non-renewable natural resources. The resources include wildlife, earth minerals and other deposits, water and the air in the atmosphere. Nature conservation is meant to focus on human needs and interests, for example, the cultural, economic, biological and recreational aspects.

We will write a custom Assessment on Responsibility and Attributes towards the Natural World specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Sensitization on conservation to the general public through modern technology and social sites like Facebook and Twitter can play a big role in conserving nature. Specific days should be set aside for communal awareness projects on environmental conservation (Saylor, 2012).

Volunteer programs on environmental conservation should be encouraged by the government because various stakeholders should be involved in conservation practices. Environmental conservation should not be the responsibility of relevant environmental bodies alone. The community should be integrated in environmental conservation efforts to promote responsibility through participation.

This fact would ensure better outcomes in conservation initiatives through community participation. Resources must be properly utilized for them to help humans lead better lives. Conservation efforts recognize the importance of development but stress the need for strategic management of natural resources (Lum, 2011).

Planting of trees and creation of nature parks The planting of trees in deforested areas and in parks may greatly contribute in creation of nature parks. Trees should be planted in homes as a means of preserving the environment. The initiative can be promoted within the community in local conservation programs. During nature awareness campaigns and rallies, voluntary activities can be initiated to plant trees in the neighborhood (Kritek, 2002).

Fundraising activities that can be used to run local organizations of environmental conservation should be done. The funds can also be used to start animal orphanages and for maintenance of nature parks in the community.

Uses of nature Presently, natural resources serve important roles within the society. They play important roles in studying environmental biology, ecology, entomology, botany, geology, zoology and also soil science. Natural resources can be used as significant controls that can be utilized in the research studies and initiatives.

They can also used in cultural studies and recreational activities like bird study and watching, identification of medicinal herbs and various tree species that are of significance in the society. The resources also preserve the rare plant and animal species. Preservation and conservation of nature also provide several practical benefits to humanity.

The efforts ensure that raw materials for many industries are provided for development and production of necessary products like timber. Majority of medicines and drugs used in modern society are derivatives of many medicinal plants. From a genealogical point of view, the environment and natural resources serve certain religious and cultural roles for many communities in the world.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Responsibility and Attributes towards the Natural World by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The destruction of the natural world may interfere with the culture and beliefs of the said communities especially in South America and Africa. Nature can also be used to provide recreational benefits. Instead of spending time in cinemas, visiting clubs and surfing the internet, nature offers a different kind of entertainment (Ezquerro, 2010). The peaceful and quiet environment that nature offers can be relaxing.

Nature can also offer sporting activities like bird watching, game watching, rock climbing, boat riding, and mountain hiking. These activities may be advantageous for the body and also health. Special guidelines on the best conservation practices should be determined by environmental authorities because guidelines remain crucial in harmonizing conservation initiatives.

Reports have in the past been made that regulatory mechanisms have not been established leading to certain excesses in environmental conservation like planting of trees in areas that are not designated by the government hence causing harm to humans in certain ways.

Conclusion Every individual should take the responsibility of preserving and conserving nature because nature supports life and without nature, then the world would be inhabitable. A lot of research should be conducted to find better ways of conserving and preserving the natural environment. The research should aim at providing better ways of promoting environmental conservation.

Proper legislation should be enacted by the government in order to provide a concrete basis for enforcement of environmental policy. Societies that do not have strong environmental laws usually perform poorly in ratings on environmental conservation. The government should provide adequate budgetary allocation for environmental conservation efforts to all stakeholders.

Strong legislation cannot be enforced without human and monetary resources. Adequate funds would improve public awareness efforts, facilitate training of environmentalists on emergent and technologically oriented environmental efforts, and improve infrastructure and incorporation of key stakeholders in inclusive consultative meetings.

Technology should be integrated in the development agenda of the government only when it meets certain environmental criteria. The government should set up special institutions to assess the impact of any technological innovation in respect to the environment.

References Ezquerro, A 2010, Cohesion and coherency in group analysis. Group Analysis, 43, Cengage Learning, Connecticut.

Kritek, P 2002, Negotiating at an even table: developing moral courage in resolving or conflicts second edition, Jossey-Bass, Texas.

Lum, G 2011, The negotiation field book, Simple strategies to help one negotiate everything, McGraw-Hill companies Inc, New York City.

Saylor, M 2012, The Mobile Wave: How Mobile Intelligence Will Change Everything, Perseus Books/Vanguard Press, New York.


Impact of Mass Media on Socialization Report (Assessment) best college essay help

Socialization is one of the most important factors that define a human being. The need to socialize has seen people invent various channels of socialization. Technological advancement has reduced the world into a small village. Some areas, such as the mass media coverage, have attracted the attention of many individuals globally. With the current mass media, much has changed, especially in terms of socialization.

This includes the radios, television, newspapers, and many more. They deliver and carry messages or information from one place to the other. Socialization process has extremely taken a new look in the current society.

What the media displays has attracted a lot of attention from the public. Information on major societal issues, such as sexuality, is displayed clearly to the public. Unlike in the traditional society where such sensitive information could not be addressed openly, all forms of information are openly discussed fearlessly in the modern society.

Mass media has become so advanced to an extent that people from different regions can chart over various issues affecting them in life. This has greatly helped people in terms of expressing their views freely in areas of interest. By so doing, a social network is created. Issues of family and marriages are addressed. Relationship issues are discussed through the mass media as well.

Twitter and Facebook are the main forms of social media in the modern society. Through Facebook and twitter, people from various parts of the world share information and would form relationships more easily. According to Henslin (2012), young individuals would get in touch with each other through the social media and would form serious friendships, which would end up in marriages.

Mass media has drawn the attention of many politicians in the modern society since it offers as a platform through which leaders can form strong bonds with the electorate. Through Facebook and Twitter, politicians are able to pass their campaign information to many. The mass media helps them in sharing their political standpoints and interests with their supporters, organize meetings, and hold political rallies.

The first category of the socialization agents is the media. The mass media and the social media have been major agents of socialization. As mentioned above, the mass media is a very vital socializing agent. The newspaper, radio, and television are the main socializing agents in the modern society. On the social media, Facebook, Tweeter, and YouTube are the main agents of socialization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Facebook has about one billion subscribers from all over the world. This means that through Facebook, one can reach numerous individuals locally and globally. Others, such as YouTube and Tweeter, are also major agents of socialization.

The second category of the agent of socialization is social institutions where people meet (Eitzen, 2011). Such places include schools, sporting events, churches, and other places of worship. Clubs, places of work and even hospitals are also considered social places. These are places where people can socialize.

In the recent past, there has been a massive discussion as to whether the media has a stronger influence on socialization than other agents do. Depending on the angle taken, this may be true or otherwise. Most people who communicate through the media, such as, Facebook, Tweeter, and the mass media, are people who have physically meet through the above agents of socialization.

The media in this case only allows them to keep in contact with one another. However, there is rising crop of individuals who make friendships on the social media before physical meeting. This makes the media a stronger agent of socialization.

References Eitzen, D. (2011). Social Problems, Census Update. New York: Pearson College Div.

Henslin, J. M. (2012). Sociology: A down to earth approach: core concepts: census update. Boston: Allyn


Supply Chain Design: Honda Gulf Quantitative Research Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Abstract The study seeks to offer an attentive examination of the supply chain design in the auto-industry taking BMW as the case. In addition, this study will explore how supply chain design increases the competitive advantage to the firms within the auto-industry.

With the use of theoretical and empirical studies, the paper will further explore the supply chain design that is appropriate for firms such as BMW. The conclusion drawn in the study is that appropriate design for the firms supply and distribution processes increases its competitive advantage. The study recommends further plan for potential studies in this field.

Introduction: BMW BMW is one of the largest automobile products manufactures around the globe. BMW claims larger market share in the automobile industry. Over the years, the company has managed to generate growth in profitability through establishing within the premium segment of the automotive market. To meet the needs of the market, the company has diversified its products.

Besides, the company has managed its supply chain to ensure its products take the least time to reach the customers. the company realized that proper management of its supply chain is one of the capabilities the company can utilize to remain competitive and increase its market share.

Despite the fluctuations that have occurred in the automobiles market, BMW has continued to register immense growth in production volumes as well as sales. In addition, to achieve growth and development, BMW has embraced the commercialization of sophisticated environmental expertise as well as reforming its organization to earn revenue.

Further, the company undertakes actions aimed at reinforcing its market share particularly on the fast developing economies. BMW have also focused on delivering inexpensive quality automobiles to its clients as well as offering products with low harmful discharges in the environment.

BMW recognizes the need for close cooperation with suppliers in the provision of its products. As a result, it has established worldwide connections with suppliers to accomplish its pledge of providing quality and superior automobile product presentation. In addition, the firm has cultivated trust with its business partners through sustaining equity in their relations by valuing the existing rules and guidelines.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Further, BMW recognizes that all its partners as well as its suppliers should be offered equal prospects in business transactions. Moreover, the firm has been able to work with other partners in coming with standard prices hence achieving synergies in their operations to increase its growth potential.

BMW’s customer services operations have achieved immense gains in the realization of the best services to its customers globally. The firm has achieved this by giving customer satisfaction a priority in its operations. Further, the firm has approved a strategy of providing affordable, reliable as well as developing the efficiency in the production.

The company also undertakes various measures aimed at creating an environment where customers are able to address issues concerning the fulfillments they receive from the services. Through these initiatives, BMW has been able to increase its customer base in many parts of the globe such as in India, China, Brazil, and Nigeria among other fast developing economies.

The purpose for the study The current increased competitive environments in the market place have put a lot of pressure on the corporations to be innovative or be completely out of operations. Innovations reduce the time the products take in the market place and as a result reduce its life cycle (Pyke


Common and Distinct Characteristics of The Abkhaz-Georgian conflict Essay college admission essay help

Common Characteristics All the conflicts involve several countries that are geographically neighboring each other within their locations. The Abkhaz-Georgian conflict involves Georgia and the breakaway territory of Abkhazia, as well as a lot of influence from Russia. The South Ossetian-Georgian conflict equally involved Georgia and Russia going into war, with Ossetian declaring itself an independent country free from Georgian rule.

The Nagono-Karabakh conflict, on its part, involves the three neighboring countries of Armenia, Turkey, as well as Azerbaijan. The Israeli-Palestinian conflict involves nearly all the states in the Middle East, with Israel being on the one side while Palestine and the rest of the Arab states in the regions, including countries such as Lebanon and Egypt, being on the other side.

All the conflicts involve fight over control of territories or regions that the opposing forces in the conflict claim ownership. In the Abkhazia-Georgian conflict, the cause of disagreement is the Abkhazia region, which decided to declare itself independent of the Georgian rule. Similarly, the South Ossetian-Georgian conflict involves the decision by South Ossetian to declare itself independent from Georgia.

The Nagorno-Karabakh conflict resulted from the mountainous region, which had hitherto been part of Azerbaijan, declaring itself as an independent state free from the Azerbaijani rule. The Israeli-Palestinian conflict stems from the forceful decision by the Jews to form a state in the region that had been considered to be part of the Palestinian territory.

Distinct Characteristics of the Conflicts The Israeli-Palestinian conflict is one that bases more on religious differences, where the Palestinians and indeed the rest of the Middle-Eastern countries are predominantly Muslim. In contrast, Israeli is predominantly a Jewish state and is seen as the only state within the entire region that follows a different religious belief to the rest of the countries.

The Nagorno-Karabakh conflict began when secessionist movements in the region sought to achieve their independence from Azerbaijan and create their own state.

However, the region is up to date under the control of Armenia, with the latter’s forces controlling vast areas of the region. This development is mainly because the inhabitants of the Nagorno-Karabakh region are ethnic Armenians who feel more comfortable under Armenian rule than Azerbaijani rule.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Abkhaz-Georgian conflict rests more on the ethnic composition of the region. The Abkhaz waged a war against Georgians mainly due to the discriminating treatment that they suffered in the hands of the Georgians.

As the war intensified, the Abkhaz chose to chase away all the Georgians from the region before declaring themselves independent. Georgia has maintained that Abkhazia’s formation was because of mainly ethnic cleansing, which has seen the region rid of all Georgian-speaking populations.

Another conflict involving the Georgians, the South Ossetian-Georgian conflict, on its part bases more on race. With the South Ossetians being originally Asian immigrants who settled in the region, the Georgians felt they had the right to control them. However the Ossetians stood their ground and insisted on being independent from the Georgians.

Opposing Perspectives on their Conflict: Armenia-Azerbaijan Azerbaijan considers her neighbor, Armenia, to be illegally occupying its territories on the disputed Nagorno-Karabakh region. The Armenian troops did not only occupy the region that was being contested for, but they also pushed on with their occupation to include territories that lie outside Karabakh.

This, in essence, has seen the Armenian army create a buffer area that links both Karabakh and Armenia. To the Azerbaijanis, Armenia has not only interfered with issues in a foreign land, but it has also gone further and forcefully occupied a section of the foreign country, which is illegal by international standards.

Armenia, on its part, considers the Nagorno-Karabakh region as part of its own, especially by virtue of its ethnic composition. The majority population occupying the region under conflict happens to be ethnic Armenians rather than Azerbaijanis.

The move by Azerbaijani to quell secessionist calls by the region’s majority inhabitants confounded Armenia, seeing that the majority inhabitants are ethnic Armenians. Thus, Armenia considers it as a violation any efforts by Azerbaijani to grant the region their wishes to secede and form an independent nation.

We will write a custom Essay on Common and Distinct Characteristics of The Abkhaz-Georgian conflict specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More How Opposing sides view the past, present and future of their relations The Past

Both countries look at the past with many regrets concerning the incidents that took place. Azerbaijan still considers the atrocities that were committed by the Armenian forces to ethnic Azerbaijanis. Armenians, on their part, view the past as one of mistreatments that were mainly directed toward ethnic Armenians by the Turks.

The Present

Both Armenians and Azerbaijanis continue to consider each other as enemies despite a truce that has been ongoing since 1994. There is deep-seated resentment within both camps and none of the countries is ready to trust the other. The border between Armenia and Turkey remains closed since Armenia declared its independence from the Soviet Union.

This has mainly been prompted by the influence of Azerbaijan, which remains to be a close ally of Turkey. Despite concerted efforts to enhance cooperation, particularly between Turkey and Armenia, little progress has been reported as the warring parties continue to hold on to their unchanging stands.

The Future

The opposing sides, however, have a different view of the future. There have been continued efforts that are directed at improving on the relations between the countries. Efforts to open up the border between Armenia and Turkey highlight a future in which the countries will have improved relations between themselves.

The countries engage in cross-border trade to the tune of $200 million annually, albeit via Georgia. This will definitely improve in the future to a bigger scale.

Impact of Culture Culture continues to be viewed as the main fueling agent of the conflicts between the opposing sides. Armenia, for instance, continues to have a lot of interest for the Nagorno-Karabakh region owing to the Armenian ethnic communities that inhabit the region.

Role and Importance of Civil Society Efforts toward Resolution of Conflicts Israel-Palestine

Civil societies assisted in ensuring that both Israel and Palestinian communicated and agreed on a number of issues that would resort into peace. The civil society efforts, thus, mainly focused on opening up the channel of communications involving the governments of the warring factions. The groups also worked out on achieving a diplomatic solution rather than a political one for the two countries.

Another aspect that the civil societies attempted to address, in an effort to resolve the conflict, included the observation of human rights. The societies insisted on the two countries to respect the rights of the people even as they exchanged military fire over themselves.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Common and Distinct Characteristics of The Abkhaz-Georgian conflict by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Armenia-Turkey

Civil societies played a key role in attempting to heal the bad blood that existed between Armenia and Turkey. The groups particularly organized events that marked memories of the mass deportations, as well as killings that were perpetuated by the Turks against Armenians.

This was aimed at bringing the two sides into accepting what had happened before pursuing healing. The civil bodies also enlightened the masses and persuaded the authorities to consider paying the communities that had been affected by the inhuman acts and mistreatment.

Strengths of the Civil Societies

In the case of the Israeli-Palestinian conflict, most civil organizations, especially those that were formed on the Palestinian side enjoyed huge backing from the Palestinian people. This provided the groups with both the power and confidence to indulge in efforts to address the conflict. The groups also received backing from other Arab states worldwide, including having their activities funded.

In the case of the Armenian-Turkey conflict, the civil societies operating in Turkey also received overwhelming support in their efforts to compel the authorities to improve on their ties with Armenia. Most of the support emanated from the Turks of Armenian ethnic origin, who called on their governments to act speedily towards establishing ties with Armenia.

Weaknesses of the Civil Societies

Most civil organizations concerned with the Israeli-Palestinian conflict have degenerated into fighter groups involved directly in war. The groups, mostly representing the Palestine’s interests, have engaged in war acts, which have seen them attack Israeli interests. This has lowered their appeal in the international platform as they are now considered as terror groups rather than civil societies.

Civil societies pushing for peace in the Armenia-Turkey conflict suffer from lack of resources that are needed to support their activities. This situation limits the power of such groups to run their peace initiatives with the utmost success that is needed.


Impartiality: Richard Bulliet’s Islam and the West in the case of Islamo-Christian civilization Research Paper college application essay help: college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Statement of the problem

Literature review

The relationship between Islam and Christianity

The underlying challenges

Academics and perception

Islamic transformation



Introduction Westerners have for a long time excluded Islam from their civilization mostly because they view themselves as having a Christian history which differs from the Muslim one. For this reason, none of the two societies recognizes each other’s positive aspects.

Richard Bulliet in his book, The Case for Islamo-Christian Civilization, chooses to take an impartial position in order to show that the two societies share a common history. This history may be deeper than the one presented by the Jews and Christians who reconcile after a long battle.

The Westerners and the Middle Easterners ought to emulate the Judeo-Christian civilization in order to bring about reconciliation between them. The phrase “Islamo-Christian civilization” compels one to assess both societies’ backgrounds and structures because the Muslims do not seem to be in agreement with the Christian Westerners’ liberalism.

The Westerners view the Muslims as being opposed to new ideas. The term facilitates a focus on the similarities of the two societies more so in terms of their development over the centuries rather than their differences. Bulliet challenges the work of Samuel Huntington in his book, The Clash of Civilizations as well as Bernard Lewis’, Islam and the West.

He predicts that the “unheard” Islam political pressure group currently “on the edge” will in future emerge as an Islam “hub” because it seems to be diverse and open-minded. Bulliet therefore urges the West to view the movement as Islam’s dominant “voice” and to a certain point, acknowledge its liberalism.

He suggests that the acknowledgment of similarities between the two societies will not only improve the chances of reconciliation but also bring democracy to Islam in the future.

Statement of the problem Traditional popular beliefs postulate that the world is engaged in a battle in which the Islam and the Christian societies are the main enemies and go ahead to advance the idea that these two societies cannot be reconciled. This paper focuses on Richard Bulliet’s unbiased evaluation on the two societies as he attempts to overlook their differences in an effort to follow a pathway that may lead to their peaceful coexistence.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The study focuses on examining the solutions proposed by Bulliet from a neutral point. This fact may oversee the reconciliation and peaceful coexistence of the two societies. The paper will address the following issues:

The factors that enhance the misunderstanding between the Middle Eastern Islamic and the Christian Western societies.

The analogous historical development of Islam and the Western societies and the similarities and differences of the societies that emerge from them.

How the Islamic justice system determines its governing regime and the Western’s perception of this system. -How the Middle East studies influence the West’s perception of Muslims.

How Islam’s transformation will be achieved and the role that the “edge” will play in this transformation.

Literature review The approach chosen for this study includes a literature review for the reason that the revision of what has been done facilitates one’s conclusion making process about the Middle East and Western societies, their perceptions of each other and their relations.

As a result, one is able to develop a basis for the research. Studies suggest that both the Muslims and the Christians hold misperceptions about each other which in turn make them become suspicious of each other, consequently creating tension in their relationships.

The message communicated has been established to have an impact on its audience especially the average person in terms of influencing his perception. This fact is because the “communicator” of the message has the capacity to put across the information as it is, alter it or withhold it. The freedom of expression also plays a strategic role as the communicator has the ability to convey his personal perspectives to a mass audience.

The negative practice of this freedom of expression can have tremendous consequences more so during a tension-filled affiliation regarding the Middle East and the West. Certain scholars have stated that what the two societies encounter is inclined more towards “differences” of opinion in their theories as opposed to a “clash” of civilizations as postulated by Samuel Huntington and other authors.

The relationship between Islam and Christianity Bulliet disarms Huntington’s clash of civilizations view as he argues that it fosters misunderstandings especially on the Islamic society. This fact in turn reduces any prospects that a view of common roots between the two societies would have presented for the construction of a future diplomatic coexistence.

He suggests that the two societies’ similarity come from their common heritage and because of their mutual invasion and influence on one another’s society, it would be impossible to assess their differences in isolation (Bulliet, 2004). He asserts that the terms that one uses influence one’s views and that the phrase “clash of civilization” implies that the cultures are in conflict which eliminates the chances of their sharing a future.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Impartiality: Richard Bulliet’s Islam and the West in the case of Islamo-Christian civilization specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More He instead proposes the use of the term “Islamo-Christian civilization” which may highlight similarities between the two societies that may then develop a reconciliation framework. Huntington proposes to have Islam liberalized (Huntington, 2003) but Bulliet opposes this aspect as civilization is not tied to faith or nations.

He argues that even though the two societies appear to be more different than similar, they are more alike than the Jews and Christians were, and since the Judeo-Christian civilization was successful, chances of an Islamo-Christian civilization are also high. Therefore, if the two spheres are viewed as sharing a civilization, the tension between them can be resolved.

He concedes that the historical developments between Christians and Muslims are similar in the sense that they have experienced the comparable challenges in their evolutions. The societies shared history includes conversion attempts, setting up of institutional organizations and implementation of an inclusive religious language.

The underlying challenges Questions have been posed like “What went wrong?” between the two societies especially after the September 11 attacks on the U.S. (Ilana


Success in Interpersonal Communication Exploratory Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Introduction The world is changing dramatically and its changes are constantly affecting the socio-economic structure of nationalists in both developing and developed nations.

Central to globalisation and internationalisation, numerous issues are emerging as nations are always witnessing a massive influx of immigration and migration trends that have influenced lifestyles in almost all big cities and towns across the world (Holtbrugge


Feminism is for Everybody: Passionate Politics Critical Essay college admissions essay help

Table of Contents The Author’s Background

The book analysis

Reference List


The Author’s Background The book Feminism is for Everybody was written by bell hooks1. She is a famous American feminist and social activist who examines about such issues as gender, race, and capitalism in the modern society. It should be noted that bell hooks was born in Hopkinsville, a city located in Kentucky.

She lived in a working-class family; in particular, her father was a custodian, while her mother was a homemaker. Apart from that, she has six siblings. These are some of the main facts that should be taken into account while discussing the work of bell hooks and her major ideas.

One can say that the worldview of this author could be affected by various factors such the education in a racially segregated school. This experience can make a person extremely aware of inequalities existing in the community.

To a great extent, her worldview is based on the idea that existing social system creates of barriers which deny people access to equal opportunities. This is one of the central questions that this author examines.

Moreover, she believes that it is necessary to raise people’s awareness about various social problems. Overall, bell hooks rejects the idea of sexism or any other form of prejudice which can lead to discrimination against a person.

For instance, bell hooks represents the feminist movement, but she notes that this movement should not exclude men since this separation cannot support the common struggle against social injustice (Hooks, 2000).

In particular, in her opinion, males can also effectively promote the principles of equality in the society.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the whole, this author believes that the feminist movement should include a diverse group of people who may represent different races, religions, genders, and social classes. These are some of the main issues that are frequently explored in bell hooks’ books.

There are several ideas that are of great importance to bell hooks. In particular, she believes that the categorization of people according to race, social class, or gender creates a system that prevents a person from raising his/her status in the community.

This is why it is important to describe and explain the relations between these phenomena. Apart from that, this author argues that intellectual do not play a sufficient role in refuting stereotypes regarding race or gender.

In many cases, the ideas of social activists are disregarded by less educated people. This is some of the obstacles that cannot be overlooked by social activities who are partly responsible for promoting equality in the community.

Various aspects of this idea are explored in many of her books such as Feminist Theory: From Margin to Center or Ain’t I a Woman? These are the main questions that attract the attention of this author.

At present, bell hooks is engaged in various activities. For example, she works as a visiting professor in many colleges and universities in the United States.

Additionally, she is strongly committed to writing. For example, she has recently published such a book as Belonging: A Culture of Place. Additionally, she regularly contributes articles to academic journals and mainstream newspapers.

We will write a custom Book Review on Feminism is for Everybody: Passionate Politics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More On the whole, it is possible to argue that bell hooks is one of those people were able to popularize and define the main principles of the feminism.

Moreover, she is able to demonstrate that the connection between gender, race, as well as capitalism can explain various social problems faced by modern people.

These are some of main points that can be made. This information can help readers better understand the ideas that bell hooks expresses in her books.

The book analysis There are several actions of this book which I found very interesting. Moreover, there are several ideas that seem to me very strong. In particular, one can speak the connection between race and gender because this question is vital for explaining various disparities in the modern community.

The author notes that for a long time the feminist movement was associated with white women who mostly came from well-to-do families (Hooks, 2000, p. 56).

However, insufficient attention was paid to the problems encountered by African-American women, who could be affected by several factors such racial discrimination, low income level, and subservient position in the society.

These are the main issues that have often been disregarded by social activists and writers (Hooks, 2000, p. 56). It seems that this approach to this problem is important for discussing the origins of social inequalities existing in the community.

Moreover, this perspective can be helpful to policy-makers who attempt to eliminate discrimination in the workplace or other areas. In particular, they should pay attention to the needs of women who belong to racial minorities.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Feminism is for Everybody: Passionate Politics by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Additionally, this issue should be taken into account by the leaders of the feminist movement. The problem is that this movement can often be disorganized in part because of disagreements regarding such questions as race and social class.

Therefore, bell hooks raises a question that is critical for feminist movement and its further development. In my opinion, this perspective is important for identifying and removing the barriers which contribute to existing social injustice.

Yet, there are several sections of the book that are not quite clear. In particular, the author examines the relations between feminism and spirituality. The author notes that many religions can be called patriarchal which means that they support the idea of male domination (Hooks, 2000, p. 107).

This is one of the topics that is examined by various feminist writers. Yet, bell hooks also speaks about the spiritual paths which can empower women and free them from the stereotypes according to women can only occupy subservient positions in families and societies.

Nevertheless, the author does not explain how these “alternative spiritual paths” should be organized for women (Hooks, 2000, p. 108). There is no description of possible alternatives to conventional religion.

Moreover, the author does not explain how the principles of feminism can be reconciled with many religious texts such as the Bible.

These are some of the main limitations that should be considered.

In my opinion, bell hooks should provide more evidence in order to illustrate her arguments regarding feminism and religion; otherwise this discussion appears to be slightly superficial or at least too vague. This is one of the main points that can be made.

Apart from that, this book does not identify the specific objectives that the feminist movement should attain. The author speaks much about the need to free women from patriarchal chains that prevent women from fulfilling their talents or raising their social status.

Nevertheless, bell hooks does not identify specific legal or social changes that should be brought about. One can say that the objectives identified by bell hooks are too abstract.

Moreover, the writer does not say how possible improvements should be attained and who should be responsible for this task. This is another issue that should be taken into consideration by the readers of this text.

The problem is that the absence of realistic and measurable objectives hinders the growth of the feminist movement. This is why this drawback should not be overlooked.

Yet, despite these limitations, one can still argue that bell hooks’ writing style is quite clear, and in most cases, the presentation is quite logical. This text can gain readers in-depth insights into the ideology of feminism.

Nevertheless, one can note that this work is more oriented toward people who take interest in the origins of this social movement and its implications. Furthermore, this book is more likely to appeal to people who share the ideas advocated by the feminists.

Nevertheless, this work can also throw light on various origins of inequality in the modern society. Therefore, this book can be of great interest to many readers.

One can argue that this work throws light on various aspects of modern feminism. This book is important for describing various ramifications of this social movement and its connection to religion, economics, and civil rights.

Apart from that, this book illustrates internal conflicts within feminism. In this case, one can speak about the lack of agreement about gender and race. More importantly, this text demonstrates that feminism can appeal to a very diverse group of people. This is why this book is worth attention.

Reference List Hooks, B. (2000). Feminist is for Everybody: Passionate Politics. Cambridge: South End Press.

Footnotes 1 This is the penname of Gloria Jean Watkins. It should be noted that this author deliberately uses uncapitalized spelling of her penname.


Nelson Mandela and the African National Congress Exploratory Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Nelson Mandela devoted his life to the struggle against apartheid in South Africa. He longed for democracy in his country. Clearly, he supported the African National Congress (ANC) as the major aim of this organization was to create a free democratic African state.

In the first place, it is necessary to note that Nelson Mandela was brought up in terms of tribal traditions. He witnessed the way major issues were discussed and he called this “democracy in its purest form”.1 He knew that the real leader had to listen to all viewpoints and come to the right conclusion. Admittedly, British imperialism tried to destroy such mindset. Africans were oppressed in their own land and their opinion was never taken into account.

It is noteworthy that Africans tried to defend their rights in many ways. There were lots of organizations and even groups of people that tried to fight against apartheid. The ANC was one of such organizations.

Mandela as well as many other Africans was in favor of the major goals of the organization. Africans were already tired of being oppressed and deprived of their basic rights.

The ANC were fighting for Africans’ rights. The organization resorted to numerous methods. There were meetings and gatherings, strikes and marches, etc. The organizations promoted the idea of free African people and their democratic African state.

The organization was formed by Africans who had been brought up in a tribal (i.e. democratic) society.2 The organization was very close to African people as it was formed by Africans and for Africans.

Notably, the ANC was a kind of antipode to the British government which was British as British ideas dominated.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nonetheless, the ANC had to handle a variety of challenges. Interestingly, Mandela’s attitude towards the ANC can be regarded as a symbolic depiction of the organization’s development. When Mandela was in his teens and twenties, he hardly heard of the organization.3

Likewise, many Africans knew little about the ANC and those who were associated with the organization were seen as rebels.4 Soon, the organization became known by many Africans and it won lots of followers.

Another challenge the ANC had to face was collaboration with other organizations. Admittedly, African organizations did not have enough resources to take their stand and oppose the British forces. The ANC had to collaborate with many organizations.

However, this collaboration often had negative effects. For instance, collaboration with communism had a negative impact as many people were against it.5

Nelson Mandela was also against collaboration with communists, though later he changed his mind and understood that communism had a lot of positive facets. It was also difficult to decide what strategies to use.

Many people promoted violent methods but some were trying to use non-violent actions. Therefore, different view on the methods to use and organizations to collaborate with resulted in loads of challenges for the ANC.

However, the major goal made these differences meaningless and people continued fighting.

We will write a custom Essay on Nelson Mandela and the African National Congress specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In conclusion, it is necessary to note that the ANC played one of the most important roles in the development of South Africa.

This organization contributed greatly to the abolition of apartheid in the region. Notably, the ANC faced loads of challenges but the organization managed to remain alive and kicking as people were united by a really important aim. Africans were fighting for their free and democratic state.

Bibliography Mandela, Nelson. Long Walk to Freedom. New York, NY: Little Brown and Company, 1995.

Footnotes Nelson Mandela, Long Walk to Freedom (New York: Little Brown and Company, 1995), 21.

Ibid., 86.

Nelson Mandela, Long Walk to Freedom (New York: Little Brown and Company, 1995), 65.

Ibid., 64.

Ibid., 100.


Book Review: Black City Makers Synthesis Essay scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Urban Politics

Housing Issues

Rise of Black Politicians

Works Cited

Introduction The book reveals how Blacks in Philadelphia have impacted positively on urban renewal in the country. It focuses on different issues Blacks have faced in the city, and how these issues affected their socio-economic status in the country.

It looks at settlement patterns in the city and how they were affected by racist policies of previous city administrations.

Hunter argues that the post war period has led to a renewed sense of pride, which has made many Blacks living in America participate positively in all spheres of public life (52).

The book reveals how blacks have been able to shape their own destiny because of the active role they played in the city’s renewal. This has enabled them sustain strong relations with other communities living there, a factor that has contributed positively to their progress.

The book focuses on social changes in Philadelphia after the post war period and how they contributed to the city’s progress.

Hunter reveals that Blacks have a strong political voice, which has made more political leaders to pay attention to their concerns (79). He shows how urban voting trends are driven by issues, which affect Blacks and other minority groups in the country.

Socio-economic issues such as housing, employment and healthcare, also affect people from other racial and ethnic groups in the country. The book reveals that all these struggles are faced by Blacks and other minority communities in the country.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The book delves into the association between black political groups and what made them establish close links with the Democratic party in the country. The book captures different social issues in urban areas, which affect the Black community and other racial groups living nearby.

The book highlights the historical context of different social issues that affect Blacks in Philadelphia and how they have shaped their political leanings. The book also highlights the racial divide in politics and how it shapes public opinion on different issues.

Urban Politics He reveals how urban politics have been shaped by issues related to racial equality, housing and employment. Poverty and low standards of living in urban areas have always influenced political debates in the country.

However, this has not affected social interactions blacks in the US have with other racial groups. They have managed to live in close proximity with Whites and other Americans in Philadelphia’s suburbs.

Hunter shows that Blacks are developing strong social ties with other racial and ethnic communities, which influences their perceptions on different issues (61).

Minority groups have continued to shape urban politics, and they are having a large impact on voting patterns in times of elections. The book reveals how minorities have bore the brunt of urban expansion in the country, since the beginning of the 20th century, which led to their displacement.

The book takes note of the early 20th century, when many blacks settled in the city. They were later evicted from their settlements to pave way for the upgrade of the city’s infrastructure.

We will write a custom Book Review on Book Review: Black City Makers specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The collapse of tenements in the city, highlights problems they faced, which resulted loss of property for many black families. Blacks mainly resided in low income neighborhoods and they did not enjoy rights accorded white property owners.

Tenement collapses made many Blacks realize the importance of participating in politics. They compelled the mayor to take more time to consider the plight of low income residents before initiating any major changes to the city’s infrastructure (Hunter 72).

These difficult times made blacks more conscious of their rights, which lay a strong foundation for Civil Rights Movement, that took place in the 1950’s and 1960’s.

Housing Issues Philadelphia black residents forced the mayor to carry out changes to the city’s flawed housing policies. Working class black political groups sprung into action and put pressure on the mayor and other politicians to improve the welfare of low income earners.

Future city plans had to take note of slum dwellings, which were improved to ensure the welfare of low income earners was catered for. Changes in official city policies benefited all residents, irrespective of their racial or ethnic extraction.

They benefited from a better living environment, where basic amenities and infrastructure, were provided by city authorities (Hunter 89).

The book shows that the the conscious awareness of blacks resulted in positive changes, which made future generations of Philadelphia residents live a better life. This encouraged strong interracial bonds to be formed in the community, giving rise to a multi-cultural society.

Housing issues have dominated urban politics in the US and they determine how various political candidates running for office perform in elections.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Book Review: Black City Makers by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The book shows how Black political groups in Philadelphia found a voice through the Democratic party, which allowed them to challenge the status quo.

In essence, they were able to influence political leaders in the city and the rest of the country to take issues, which many urban residents face seriously. As a result, housing has become one of the key political agendas for successive governments in the country (Hunter 90).

Many politicians give more attention to needs of urban residents, which has changed the country’s politics. It highlights the way banks serving mainly black clients collapsed, making many black residents face a period of uncertainty.

Different factors led these banks to collapse yet they provided financial services to many African Americans, who were shunned by mainstream financial institutions.

Rise of Black Politicians The collapse of these banks happened around the same time the Great Depression, brought the country’s economy to its knees. The writer argues that even though black banks had a great vision, they operated in a financial environment that was not conducive for their survival.

The Black Seventh Ward in Philadelphia is used as a symbol of black consciousness in the city, which has influenced many political, social and economic ideals (Hunter 103). This has transformed the racial and political environment in the city, giving all residents a common voice.

It has also led to a rise in the number of Black politicians running for office in the city. The book shows how these changes have contributed to more political consciousness among Black residents living in the city.

The book shows how Black Seventh Ward in Philadelphia changed perspectives of Black urban residents, who settled in other multi-racial residential areas.

This consciousness has made more Blacks to be elected as mayors of several cities across the country, because they are judged based on their ability to deliver and not according to the color of their skin.

Working class minority communities in urban areas are more influential and they demand more accountability from their political leaders, than ever before.

The Black Seventh Ward as portrayed in the book is a perfect environment that allows Blacks to become more involved in affairs of their own city.

Works Cited Hunter, Marcus Anthony. Black Citymakers: How The Philadelphia Negro Changed Urban America. New York: Oxfod University Press, 2013. Print.


Ethics and Clinical Trials Synthesis Essay college essay help online

One of the main questions discussed by scholars is related to the ethical and safety standards established for clinical trials. The main task is to ensure the safety of patients and obtain scientifically rigorous findings. In some cases, these priorities cannot be easily reconciled.

This paper is aimed at discussing two articles written by Marcia Angell and Harold Varmus. These authors present different interpretations of ethical norms related to medical research.

Marcia Angell believes that the clinical trials performed in the countries of the Third World do not comply with international standards of care, and the wellbeing of patients can be imperiled. In particular, they are not always provided with the most effective treatment.

This is the main ethical problem that this scholar identifies. For example, the participants of such studies can sometimes receive a placebo instead of the best possible drug available at the time.

Researchers may prefer such an approach because it can help them obtain findings within a relatively short time. However, in this way, they can endanger the health of subjects. This is why many studies conducted in poor regions of the world, may not be allowed in advanced counties.

Additionally, Marcia Angell speaks about the so-called ethical relativism. This means that medical researchers accept local standards of care accepted in developing counties, and sometimes, these standards are low. In this way, they can deny patients the highest standards of care.

In other words, this author emphasizes the importance of universal ethical standards that should be applied to clinical trials. Moreover, the safety of the participants should be the top priority for medical workers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, patients should receive the same level of protection, regardless of the country in which the trial is conducted. This is the main argument that Marcia Angell puts forward.

In turn, Harold Varmus offers a slightly different discussion of these questions. In particular, he notes that a clinical study should determine the positive and negative effects of a certain drug, while a placebo-control research might be the optimal way to do it.

This is one of the main claims that this scholar puts forward. Apart from that, these trials are usually carried out in countries with significant health problems such as right rates of HIV. Therefore, these studies, even if they are placebo-controlled, can benefit a great number of patients.

Certainly, this author admits that the rights of participants should be respected by researchers. For example, they people should know about the risks related to the trial. Nevertheless, at the same time, it is necessary to produce rigorous results which can be used by medical workers.

This is one of the main responsibilities that a researcher has. Harold Varmus emphasizes the importance of informed consent which can justify a placebo-control study from an ethical viewpoint. In other words, he accepts a certain degree of risk.

Overall, these examples suggest that scholars may not always provide the same ethical assessment of clinical trials carried out in the countries of the Third World. In some cases, scholars can focus on the wellbeing of patients as the main priority for medical workers.

In turn, other researchers can attach more importance to the validity of the study and the accuracy of results.

We will write a custom Essay on Ethics and Clinical Trials specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For instance, Harold Varmus admits the importance of eliminating the risks to the health of subjects, but he also notes that a placebo-control trial can be the only option available to researchers. This is the main difference that can be identified.


Choose two of the following topics related to specific programs for your presentation, but do not choose your group a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Choose two of the following topics related to specific programs for your presentation, but do not choose your group paper topic.

Bilingual/Emergent Bilingual/English learners (ELs)
Gifted and Talented
Alternative Education

There are no exemplars for this assignment. The goal is for you to have freedom in how you would present important aspects of these topics.

For this week, you will create a flyer that that can be given to parents explaining the programs you choose. Please focus on making the flyer more than just an “information” document. Think of how you, as a parent, would expect a communication to be crafted in easy-to-understand language. In addition, think of how you, as a leader, would want a communication to be developed to send a message to those who visit your school that you and your staff embrace high standards and are a welcoming, inclusive school

The document needs to be accessible. To make the flyer accessible, you need to provide captions for images that you use.

Topics to Consider Including (which may or may not apply to all topics)

Who is served by the program?

How do students qualify for the program?

What does the program provide to students?

Which teachers and/or staff members help to coordinate and/or support the program?

What types of curriculum, interventions, and/or instructional approaches might be applicable to this student population?

How will you monitor and/or evaluate the program?

Name at least two mistakes people make working with students in the program, and how could they be avoided or remedied?

Use at least a minimum of one to three peer-reviewed articles, websites, and/or resources from material other than the textbook. To obtain a higher score, you must incorporate information from at least three (3) sources. See the rubric for more information.


Nielsen’s Free Will and Determinism: An Analysis and Critique Essay best essay help

The issue of moral luck has always been quite debatable. According to Nielsen, the case of moral luck takes place once the outcomes predetermined by luck create a moral dilemma.

Despite the proof that Nielsen provides for the fact that determinism and freedom can actually coexist and, moreover, complement each other,

Nielsen makes it clear that the existence of moral luck defines the boundaries of people’s free will; however, Nielsen also states that moral luck can make a difference in the moral responsibilities of a person.

Although Nagel’s position on moral luck and the consequent moral responsibilities of a person can be interpreted in several ways, which the paper by Nielsen, and especially such supposition as “we can say when it is true or probably true to assert that a man is free” (Nielsen 45), shows, Nielsen obviously sees the fact of the agent having control over the situation as the key obstacle to the compatibilist approach providing the solution to the famous dilemma.

According to Nielsen, the basic problem with the paradox of moral luck suggested by Nagel is that the two statements that follow the principle of moral luck clearly contradict each other. As Nagel explains, the idea of Moral Luck leads to the following conclusions:

People can only be held responsible for the consequences of the events, the key factors of which were under people’s control;

In a number of cases, people are also responsible for many things that are beyond their control.

Since the two statements provided above clearly contradict each other, as Nielsen points out, it can be considered that in the determinist settings, the concept of free will can barely exist.

Another question that stems from the above-mentioned dilemma concerns the way in which luck affects a person’s moral worth.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to Nielsen, peopled use the idea of determinism as an obstacle to bearing responsibilities for certain situations in order to avoid being blamed for negative outcomes.

At the given point, it will be reasonable to mention that Nagel considers different kinds of moral luck in order to compare and contrast them and finally come to a certain conclusion concerning moral responsibilities of a person.

Nielsen, however, takes the concept of moral luck as a whole, without splitting it into specific types. Herein lies the difference between the approach that Nielsen analyses, i.e., the one suggested by Nagel, and Nielsen’s own interpretation of how morally responsible for specific events people are.

According to Nagel, luck plays a great part in determining people’s responsibility; in fact, the amount of factors that are at a person’s disposal at the moment of a specific event can practically predetermine the rates of the given person’s responsibility, according to Nagel’s train of thought (Nielsen ).

Nielsen, however, states that “’freedom’ has a definite contrast and application. Basically it contrasts with constraint. Since this is so, we can say when it is true or probably true to assert that a man is free, and when it is false or probably false to say that he is free” (Nielsen 45).

It is quite peculiar that, to prove his point, Nielsen resorts to discussing the specifics of the English language; to be more exact, Nielsen considers the implications of the modal verb “must,” specifying that it can denote either an obligation, as in “one must do something because it is predetermined by the existing rules or a person’s code of conduct/moral principles/etc,” or a certainty (strong supposition), as in “if you cut off his head, he must die” (Nielsen 41).

Therefore, Nielsen stresses that the line drawn between the concept of necessity and the idea of supposition is very vague. The lack of clarity between necessity and supposition, therefore, shows that there is a possibility of free will in determinist setting.

We will write a custom Essay on Nielsen’s Free Will and Determinism: An Analysis and Critique specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Thus, according to Nielsen, even in the determinist settings, free will can exist; therefore, the two elements are fully compatible, even though the fact that they can coexist might be considered a paradox.

That being said, it is important, however, to keep in mind that the given approach does not solve the issue in Nagel’s moral luck, i.e., the dilemma between the fact that the instances of moral luck should be prevented and the obvious fact that they cannot be prevented.

According to Nielsen’s explanations, “Even in a determinist world we can do other than we in fact do, since all ‘cans’ are constitutionally iffy. That is to say, we are all hypothetical” (Nielsen 45).

By stating the hypothetical origin of every single element of the universe, including people, Nielsen shows that the compatibilist approach cannot [possibly provide the answer to the famous dilemma.

Another issue that Nielsen touches upon in his article concerns the problem of the thief and the kleptomaniac.

According to the author of the article, there is a huge difference between a thief and a kleptomaniac as moral agents and, therefore, their moral responsibilities are practically incomparable.

According to Nielsen, a thief makes a conscious decision concerning whether (s)he should take what does not belong to him/her or not. Therefore, (s)he is solely responsible for what (s)he does and well deserved the punishment that (s)he is going to get according to the existing law.

A kleptomaniac, on the contrary, cannot act according to his/her moral principles, since the urge to steal has a purely psychological origin.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Nielsen’s Free Will and Determinism: An Analysis and Critique by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More With the help of the given example, Nielsen specifies the difference between the free will settings (a thief) as opposed to the settings of pure determinism (a kleptomaniac).

Although the given case can be considered an isolated case, it still shows in a very graphic way that the issue concerning the use of free will (to steal or not to steal) in determinist settings (kleptomania) is much more complicated than one might think it is.

With the help of the given example, Nielsen finally tips the scale towards the idea that in the determinist settings, acting on behalf of one’s free will is impossible.

Although the argument has not been closed yet, it is still obvious that determinist settings define the boundaries of free will and personal choice greatly.

Therefore, according to Nielsen, the example of a thief and a kleptomaniac is a perfect proof of the fact that the amount of factors that a person is capable of influencing predetermines the level of a person’s responsibility for a certain action.

When thinking about what Nagel would say about the given example, one might suggest that Nagel would be vaguer about the responsibility of people in both examples.

Since Nagel makes it clear that people’s judgments often depend on the factors beyond our control, he would, probably, defend the kleptomaniac as the person who is completely powerless to control his/her urges and is, therefore, is highly dependable on outer factors.

A rather solid viewpoint to hold, the given position, nevertheless, is still very debatable, which shows the depth of the problem of free will and determinism.

Works Cited Nielsen, Kai. “The Compatibility of Freedom and Determinism.” In Thomas Nagel (Ed.) Moral Questions. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. 1991. 3945. Print.


Parents’ Involvement and Factors Important for Children’s Growth and Development Report a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

To grow and develop successfully, children should be provided with the opportunities to communicate and interact with their parents and other children in order to receive the necessary support and build their first relationships.

Nevertheless, these factors can guarantee the effective development of a child only when they are presented in the combination with the other points significant for children’s everyday progress.

From this point, the main task of a parent is to help a child use the opportunities of communication, interaction, play, reading, and music as well as to guarantee care and safety for a child as the critical aspects of the parental involvement in the process of upbringing.

All the mentioned factors acquire the real meaning for children only when parents are actively involved in the process of children’s development and provide the necessary support.

However, play, music, reading, touch, care, self-esteem, safety, interaction, communication, and relationships have the unequal meaning for children’s development during the first years of their life that is why parents are inclined to focus on the most important and factors and set definite priorities while interacting with their children and stimulating their development with references to the family engagement principles.

The concentration on the elements which should be associated with the start of the children’s life is essential because each parent should choose the ideal combination of factors to provide a child with the harmonious environment for the successful development.

It is important to note that all ten elements such as play, music, reading, touch, care, self-esteem, safety, interaction, communication, and relationships much be balanced in the program of the child’s individual development.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The process of following all these factors depends on the character of relations within the family. Thus, the issue directly relates to the interaction of children and parents in families.

The concept of family engagement is based on the idea that the comprehensive development of children is possible only with references to the active role of parents in the process.

Thus, the parental involvement is essential to be discussed in relation to the factors which make the children’s life full and harmonious. The balanced combination of these factors in the family everyday relations is the guarantee of the children’s successful development.

Focusing on the factors which contribute to children’s growth and development, a teacher in cooperation with parents can work out the effective program in which it is essential to determine those aspects that can be realized in the classroom environment.

From this perspective, the focus on play, music, and reading can influence the children’s development and learning positively because the mentioned activities are the natural needs of children during their childhood period.

Furthermore, teachers can support the development of children’s self-esteem and promote the social interactions between classmates. That is why the theme is essential for teachers to develop the most effective teaching strategy.

Nevertheless, communication, parental involvement or touch, and positive relations within the family can be guaranteed only with references to the family engagement.

We will write a custom Report on Parents’ Involvement and Factors Important for Children’s Growth and Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Thus, according to the concept of family engagement, parents can build positive relations with their children not only at home but also actively participating in the children’s everyday learning activities.

As a result, children’s self-esteem and feeling of safety increases, and the parental involvement can provide high results.

Parental involvement in the form of positive communication with children can be discussed as the key issue associated with the theme of influential factors for the children’s growth and development.

Following the information presented in the articles on relationships in families and aspects of communication between children and parents, it is significant to state that positive interaction between the family members stimulates the effective development of children and their learning abilities.

From this perspective, any type of parental involvement should be positive to contribute to increasing children’s self-esteem. In spite of the character of activities, children should feel the support of their parents.

Thus, physical activities and focus on playing are essential to contribute to children’s healthy growth. The effective mediation during the process of watching TV can help children realize their learning potential.

The focus on music as the tool for stimulating the children’s development is essential to bring up the developed personality. From this point, parents can cooperate with specialists in the field in order to achieve the best results.

Thus, parents in their interactions with children should focus on support and creating the safe and comfortable environment for children to guarantee the harmonious development. Parental involvement is necessary for relation to all the aspects of the children’s life.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Parents’ Involvement and Factors Important for Children’s Growth and Development by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More That is why it is essential to support the desire of parents to participate in the studying process. The support of parents can be discussed as one of the main motivating factors to improve children’s development and learning.

Persons are ready to discuss the aspects of parenting, focusing on the decisive moments and experiences and determining the most effective strategies in communication with their children.

Nevertheless, it is rather difficult to speak about the negative aspects of the theme if they are connected with negative personal experience, which influenced their own life and visions of parenting.

Those interviewees who suffered from the lack of communication with parents during their childhood stated that positive relations with parents are the basics of the children’s successful development and adequate self-esteem.

However, the interviewees discussed the mentioned problems unwillingly and it was necessary to avoid the personalization of the discussion in order to avoid the communication barriers.

That is why the interviewees were asked about their position and vision in relation to the theme rather than about their personal experience.

As a result, four interviewees were ready to speak about their experience referring to positive factors influential for the children’s development and providing the illustrations from their personal experience, accentuating the essential aspects of the discussion.

Having analyzed the articles on the theme and details presented by the interviewees, it is possible to state that children should be provided with the complex of ten main factors to start the life effectively and develop as the personality.

The secret is in the effective family engagement and parental involvement at all the stages and relation to all the factors. The positive cooperation with teachers is also essential to help children adapt to the learning process and social interactions.

In spite of the fact that different people are inclined to focus on various factors for the successful children’s development and growth, parents and teachers should concentrate on the balanced upbringing and education where all the aspects are meaningful.

However, parental involvement and touch, as well as positive communication, safety, and interactions, can be discussed as the most critical factors.


Disability in Modern Society Opinion Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

How disability is still an obstacle today


Works Cited

Introduction Disability is a mental or physical condition that restricts a person’s activities, senses or movements. Modern societies have recognized the problems faced by these individuals and passed laws that ease their interactions.

Some people, therefore, believe that life for the disabled has become quite bearable. These changes are not sufficient to eliminate the hurdles associated with their conditions.

The life of a person with a disability today is just as difficult as it was in the past because of the stigma in social relations as well as economic, mobility and motivational issues associated with such a condition.

How disability is still an obstacle today A person with a disability would live a hard life today owing to the emotional issues associated with the condition. His or her identity would revolve around his or her disability rather than anything else that the person can do.

It does not matter whether the individuals is handsome or talented, like Tom Cruise. At the end of the day, he will always be a disabled man. This attitude obscures one’s accomplishments and may even discourage some people from accomplishing anything.

Other able-bodied individuals would always categorize such a person as a second-class citizen. It would take a lot of will power and resolve to get past these labels and merely lives one’s life. Opponents of this argument would claim that some great inventors of modern society are disabled.

A case in point was Dr. Stephen Hawkings, whose mathematical inventions led to several breakthroughs in the field of cosmology (Larsen 87). While such accomplishments exist, they do not represent the majority.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Persons like Hawkings have to work harder because they have their handicaps to cope with alongside their other scientific work. A disabled scientist is more diligent than a normal one because he has two forms of hurdles to tackle.

It is not common to find such immense willpower in the general population. Therefore, disability leads to a tough life owing to its emotional demands on its subjects.

Modern life has created several technologies designed to simplify movement. For instance, modern cities have stairs, trains, cars, doors and elevators to achieve this. However, these technologies are not easy to use for disabled people.

Many of them find that they cannot climb stairs, drive cars or even access trains without help from someone else. Therefore, while the rest of the world is enjoying the benefits of technology, a disabled person would still have to overcome these challenges in order to move from place to place.

Some opponents of this assertion would claim that the life of a disabled person today is unproblematic because a lot of devices have been developed to facilitate movement and other interactions. For instance, a person with amputated legs can buy artificial limbs or use a wheelchair.

However, some of the best assistive technologies for the disabled are quite expensive, and average citizens cannot afford them.

Many of them would have to contend with difficult -to-use devices like wheelchairs, which may not always fit into certain spaces. They would also have to exert themselves in order to use those regular devices.

We will write a custom Essay on Disability in Modern Society specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Social relations are a serious challenge for disabled people today. A number of them live isolated lives or only interact with persons who have the same condition. Social stigma is still rife today even though progress has been made.

Friends would simply be unwilling to dedicate much of their free time to help this disabled person move. Additionally, finding a life partner or marrying someone would also be a laborious process because of the physical and psychological implications.

If one’s handicap is physical, and affects their kinetics, then they would not engage in sexual activity.

Alternatively, psychical deformities may be off putting as many individuals find them sexually unattractive. These social stigmas can impede a disabled person’s ability to enjoy normal relationships with others.

Economic hurdles are also another cause of unfulfilled lives amongst the disabled. Some jobs do not require an investment in one’s image, so these would be tenable for the disabled. However, a number of positions take into account one’s physical image.

These include television anchoring, sports, politics, and even sales jobs. The practical demands of these jobs, such as sales and sports, would not allow a disabled person to engage in them meaningfully.

Alternatively, the positions may also place too much emphasis on physical appearance to the point of making disabled persons unsuitable for them. While the latter might seem like discrimination, it is a given fact that the world is increasingly becoming superficial.

Companies only want to focus on what sells, so they have little time to be proactive or fair. In essence, these attitudes close the door t many opportunities for the disabled as they pigeonhole them into passive professions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Disability in Modern Society by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion Modern societies have not eradicated the obstacles that persons with disabilities face. This is evident in their attitudinal inclinations as most of them reduce a disabled person’s identity to their inability rather than their accomplishments.

Difficulties in mobility and use of technology among the disabled also testify to their hardships. Social stigma concerning their physical attractiveness and demands in friendships also limit their social relationships.

Finally, their economic prospects are neutralized by their mobility challenges as well as their physical image. All these hurdles indicate that disability causes its victims to live painstaking lives.

Works Cited Larsen, Kristine. Stephen Hawking: A biography. Westport, Connecticut: Greenwood Publishing, 2007. Print.


Sustainable Economic Development. The Four Greens Research Paper college application essay help

Sustainable economic development refers to the process of utilizing available natural resources for economic development while taking care of resources to ensure that future generations enjoy same resources.

Social economic development manifests through four greens, which include green savings, green opportunities, green talent and green places.

Green savings refers to the process of exhorting various stakeholders in a society to reduce expenses and save finances through efficient use of renewable resources and reduction of waste.

Green opportunities refers to marketing of goods and services produced with minimal resources and pollution with the aim of growing companies that produce goods and products in such a way. Consequently, job opportunities increase as incomes increase too.

Green talent involves investing in education, research and technology based on the reasoning that human resource is crucial and that people trained in environmental issues can better manage companies that embrace environmental conservation.

Green places refer to the use green energy like solar power instead of fossil fuels as well as environmental friendly infrastructure.

Kenya has endeavored to embrace economic sustainability through public private partnerships between environmental agencies and corporations to come up with sustainability programs and literature for use in educational institutions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Population is a major cause of environmental degradation especially when it goes beyond what the environment cannot sustain. Degradation takes place through utilization of natural resources and generation of wastes leading to destruction of bio diversity as well as air and water pollution.

In addition, increased population exerts pressure on available agricultural land as people seek to utilize it for more food.

Poverty is another cause of environmental degradation. This arises from the fact that poor people rely on environmental resources for lack of other resources. For instance, poor people use rivers for all their needs including agriculture and domestic use. Such tendencies lead to depleted natural resources since the poor people have to rely on available natural resources.

Lack of gainful job opportunities in the rural areas leads to rural urban migration as people believe cities offer opportunities for jobs. When such people fail to secure employment in the cities, they have no choice but to live in slums.

Expansion of slums has led to environmental degradation of the urban environment. Such migration and settlement in the slums leads to increased pressure on available social amenities like energy, housing, water and recreational facilities.

This leads to depletion of environmental resources leads to air and water pollution, increased waste and poor land use.

Agriculture is another source of environmental degradation. This happens where agricultural practices lead to soil erosion, increased land salinity and reduced nutritive components.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Sustainable Economic Development. The Four Greens specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, over utilization of water resources and use of chemicals in farming have led to a degraded environment in developing countries. Irrigation too has led to salinity and water logging.

Deforestation and water pollution in developing countries lead to social and economic costs. Disruption of livelihoods is a major cost of deforestation and water pollution. Commercial hunters and rubber extractors suffer economic losses as displaced people suffer social losses.

In Brazil, reports indicate that authorities force poor citizens to leave their areas to work in remote plantations through use of force. Deforestation and water pollution have resulted in decreased soil fertility, which leads to decreased farming activities and less income for farmers.

Governments in developing countries should establish mechanisms and policies to guide the process of reforestation. One of the best ways is to involve communities living around forestland so that they own the process and protect the forests and water resources.

Developing countries should provide grants through non-governmental organizations that focus on environmental conservation in developing countries so that such organizations empower local people in conservation efforts.

Global warming and climate change have impacted negatively on developing countries through phenomenon like earthquakes, floods, increased chances of contracting diseases like malaria among others.

For instance, an earthquake that hit Haiti in 2010 was a result of increased global warming and climate change around the world.

Due to poor policies, many citizens suffered in the wake of the earthquake. Floods lead to destruction of food crops and displacement of populations in developing countries.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Sustainable Economic Development. The Four Greens by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Haiti and Dominican Republic experienced different paths in their economic development. Adoption of Creole language led to language barriers for Haiti making it hard to get trading partners. Dominican Republic adopted Spanish and this enhanced acquisition of trading partners.

Haiti’s language resulted in other countries regarding Haiti as inferior to Dominican Republic. The high levels of illiteracy and poor health conditions in Haiti compared to Dominican Republic have hampered economic development over the years.

As such, Dominican Republic has had more human capital than Haiti hence greater economic development. In the 1990s, Dominican embarked on improving education, economic diversification, trade regulations and building of infrastructure while Haiti lagged behind.

References Encyclopaedia Britannica. (2013). Sustainable Development. Web.

Safe Environment. (2013). Population Growth and Environmental Degradation. Web.

SED Network. (2013). The Four Greens. Web.

The Economist. (2009). Developing Countries and Global Warming. Web.

Todaro, M.,


Education Policy and Crime Reduction: USA/Africa Comparability Study Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Abstract


Literature Review

Method of Analysis





Abstract Educating prisoners and perpetuating an education policy that reduces unemployment reduces crime in societies. This has been the trend the world over and its application in developing countries is likely to have a major impact.

Although different cultures may present different approaches, this paper finds that the core concept is widely applicable.

The researcher finds that crime offenders in Africa are likely to reduce and this is likely to alleviate poverty if policy makers and governments put effort towards educating prisoners and creating sustainable employments for potential crime offenders.

Introduction In this era, knowledge is essential to life’s success and the transformation of a country’s economy. People acquire knowledge through education. Knowledge is an important tool that helps in overcoming difficulties, making life decisions and instilling winning mindsets in individuals.

One of the major contributors to crime is ignorance. It strips a person of dignity and makes them to resort to unorthodox means to survive. Education is a fundamental tool in changing the lives of prisoners and youth in society. It forms the basis for rehabilitation and criminal penalty.

Hence, government policies and penal institutions should prioritize eradication of illiteracy by helping youth and prisoners respectively to attain an education. There is evidence to suggest that this reduces recidivism rates and potential for crime among prisoners and youth.

Skills acquisition, mastering ethics at work, and teaching a trade or a profession helps youths to increase chances of being better citizens. Education also helps deter potential crime offenders from these acts.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This paper will interrogate USA and Africa’s efforts in youth education and its effect on crime reduction. The researcher will try to understand its applicability in Africa to achieve similar ends.

Literature Review Importance of education in human capital formation is subject to debate in formulating education policies.

The influence of globalization, impact of conflict on education, performance measurements for the various stages in education and knowledge transfer with the aim of creating a knowledge economy form the basis of discussion in instilling lifelong learning and forming human capital.

Borghans and Heijke (2005) argue that governments have had structures to link education to the labor market for a long time. The authors reiterate these using six points of view regarding the informing nature of economies and labor market demands on education.

Green (2002) who seems to share similar sentiments with Borghans and Heijke (2005) argue that political and economic efficiency of the production process of education are critical to its success.

Although globalization centers on policymaking in divulging knowledge, Jallabe and Mora (2001) digress. They argue that universities’ adherence to Lifelong Learning is hampered, to some extent, by national policies, academic traditions and financial pressures.

The manner in which international discourse on Lifelong Learning affects policy-making remains vague and subject to the above factors.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Education Policy and Crime Reduction: USA/Africa Comparability Study specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This contrasts with Aucoin (2011) who critically elucidates on the massive opportunities and threats that globalization and embracing of ICT has brought to human capital formation and policy formulation.

Aucoin (2011) compares knowledge societies and knowledge economies of developing nations and developed nations. Developed nations pursue knowledge economies, which is the basis for comparative advantage.

Doyle (2008) compares systems of education in France and England based on the PISA 2000 benchmark. She looks critically at the PISA program concerning inequality in attainment of education and inequality levels.

The study finds the PISA program useful for comparison of inequality but finds fault in its use as a performance tool in comparing pupils and students. Doyle (2008) finds that the traditional setting of a country is a contributor to the performance of students.

Previous studies echo the same sentiments (Green 2002, Borghans and Heijke 2005).

Additionally, the study questions the universal applicability of the parameters PISA uses to measure the level of proficiency in reading literacy. This includes retrieving information, interpreting texts and reflection.

Fuchs and Wößmann (2007) dissect the PISA program as a tool to measure students’ performance.

The study finds that institutional contribution to students’ performance is significantly low compared to other factors such as family backgrounds, inputs from home and availability of useful education resources. They term these as ‘student characteristics’.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Education Policy and Crime Reduction: USA/Africa Comparability Study by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In contrast to Doyle (2008), this study analyzes the effect of external exam and budget formulation. Additionally, the two look at the autonomy of a school while selecting crucial learning materials (such as textbooks), hiring tutors, and the allocation of budget within the school.

This has been contentious and empirical evidence has not conclusively supported or negated the findings of this study.

Over time, the definition of education concerning policymaking and its consequences has been a subject of many studies (Carpenter and Hughes 2011). Carpenter and Hughes (2011) examine the speeches of political leaders and policymakers over a period of seven years.

This gubernatorial rhetoric, as Carpenter and Hughes (2011) find, centers on the efficiency that education brings to the economy. The two conclude that the rhetoric that seems to define education with an economic dimension ignores other important needs for education.

They state other crucial educational benefits such as self-realization, civic responsibility, development of human relationships and economic efficiency (Carpenter and Hughes 2011, pg 6). Fuchs and Wößmann (2007) discuss the issue of exit examinations thoroughly.

They conclude that performance in math and science subjects have a positive correlation with exit exams. They also find that private institutions have a higher performance than public institutions.

Fuchs and Wößmann (2007), however, note that public institutions with private finding do not measure up with private institutions. Other empirical studies had concluded as such with a little digression when it comes to the science subject.

Currently, the world is constantly engulfed in fear of war. Selected countries have had long spells of unrest especially in the developing world. The effect of war on education has been passively mentioned in various studies (Borghans and Heijke 2005, Fuchs and Wößmann 2007).

Davies (2005) takes an in-depth look into the effects of war on education and the ways in which education contributes or propagates wars. The study argues that education creates divisions (religious, ethnic, status) which make some people feel inferior (Lindahl and Cain 2012).

The root of this is selective application of education, distortion of curricula, creation of fear and competition. She reiterates that this may not be obvious to curriculum developers.

However, continued emphasis in media, and at the society level makes education seem like a demigod (Lindahl and Cain 2012).

However, Davies (2005), who looks at it from a positive and negative side, (Carpenter and Hughes 2011) empirically, proves that sentiments of this nature do not solve the underlying problems. Additionally, Aucoin (2011) digresses by saying that this view is archaic.

His study on the globalization and education impact on war, suggests that time has come for each person to have an education. However, the study states clearly that advancement of knowledge societies should be the concern of governments.

Rather, governments should not focus on knowledge economics since this creates divides and hence sentiments towards educated segments.

Davies (2005) points out positive aspects such as global education citizenship and peace education initiatives. The study outlines initiatives that the author finds possibly useful in quelling the fear of the educated.

However, these initiatives may not be universally applicable according to Carpenter and Hughes (2011). However, it is evident that Davies (2005) laments the fact that war and aggression will never cease in the world.

This means that education may continue to be threatened or it may continue to threaten peace in the world.

Although many international organizations have been trying to enact universal education (Jallabe and Mora 2001) through LLL, majority of countries have disseminated national LLLs. They are specifically configured to make the countries more competitive. This includes EU and US.

The two main objectives of LLL are social and economic. However, in countries where precedence over the proposed LLL has been overlooked, there are other priorities. This includes solving unemployment problems, labor market development, and career development.

This is similar to the situation in the United States (Carpenter and Hughes 2011). In Canada according to a study by Aucoin (2011), policies tend to be geared towards nationalization. However, there is a relaxed adherence to LLL.

Lifelong learning in the education sector benefits nations that have increasingly seen the need for universal education (Lindahl and Cain 2012).

The disadvantage with LLL is that there are countries that are barely able to meet the needs of the basic education, let alone other issues like health care and infrastructure developments (Jallabe


Trade Unions. Final Report on Industrial Relations Report college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

The fashion industry and media as a popular culture

How did the fashion media develop into a popular culture?

Characteristics of print fashion media as a popular culture

Modern aspects of the fashion media

Modern consumer behaviour and its impact on fashion media

Financial crisis and the impact on print media



Introduction Print media has been the most powerful pathway for the transmission of fashion, fashion designs and other elements of the fashion industry. In fact, fashion magazines have been the key to the fashion industry (Stone, 2004). For several centuries, the fashion industry has increasingly taken the modern advantage of technological advancements in printing.

In turn, technological advancements have turned the industry into a major consumer of print technology. Nevertheless, towards the end of the 20th century, the fashion industry made a major trend by incorporating the internet (Stone, 2004). Since 2000, the fashion industry has experienced the influence of internet revolution.

Thousands of readers are migrating from print to online media. According to Kansara (2009a), readers are increasingly getting access to the free and abundant information available online. Moreover, according to Kansara (2009b), advertisers are also pulling out of the printing industry. Advertisers are the main source of revenues in print magazines (Hill, 2004).

Their migration from the print media (fashion magazines) to online magazines and blogs has left print magazines in a poor state. This state is actually forcing them out of business (Kansara 2009b). The situation worsened between 2008 and 2010 during the global economic crisis. For instance, major fashion companies were adversely affected by the crisis- major fashion and luxury titles declining significantly (Ovide


North Korea’s threat on the United States Essay best college essay help

North Korea’s threat to the United States Recent events have raised issues concerning North Korea’s threat to the United States. In addition, North Korea’s missile launch has raised alarm on the country’s nuclear threat. Of great concern is its ability to cause a collapse of United State’s infrastructure through electromagnetic pulse attack.

Recent observations place North Korea as a threat to United States’ electric grid as well as other infrastructures which are controlled by electricity and communication network.

Moreover, the country has capability of arming its missiles with nuclear warheads which can also reach the United States. In essence, North Korea poses a big threat to United States’ infrastructure through EMP attack from the south pole which is not protected.

Therefore, even though United States is more powerful than North Korea, the former should be concerned about potential threats posed by the latter on its infrastructure (Martinez, 2013, p. 1).

Thomas Schelling’s ideas on the threat According to Thomas Schelling, a country can only deal rationally with threat through its foreign policy. In this regard, he argues that game theory best fits such as situation.

For instance, he comes up with four steps in his theory that would best assist the United States in defending itself against potential nuclear threat from North Korea.

The first step he talks about is Nuclear deterrence. He believes that this would help United States to prevent North Korea from launching its missiles because the latter knows the consequences of such a mission.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This could be true to some extent although it is necessary to understand that some leaders are usually deluded by their military strength that they tend to believe they could win any war. A good example is former Iraq president who knew he couldn’t fight the United States but kept trying.

Therefore, based on the nature of leadership shown by North Korean presidents, such delusions are certain to occur. Nonetheless, nuclear deterrence has worked to contain North Korea for sometime even though they are slowly bridging the military gap by testing nuclear missiles.

The next step Schelling talks about is Coercion. However, this has not worked effectively as it could since North Korea has continued to show their might through testing of missiles.

This has forced United States to use the United Nations to bar North Korea from continuing with its missile launching activities.

However, this has also failed. In fact, according to James Woolsey, a former CIA director, North Korea is least concerned with sanctions because this has existed for decades.

Moreover, recent missile launches have prompted South Korea to convene negotiations with North Korea over security concerns. This shows the level of concern North Korea brings to these countries (Woolsey


Role of Wealthy Countries in International Development Synthesis Essay best essay help: best essay help

Wealthy countries contribute greatly towards international development through giving financial aid to least-industrialized states. Underdeveloped and developing countries use financial aid from wealthy countries to build infrastructures that grow their economies through development of important sectors such as education and health (Chatrna 1).

In addition, international aid helps alleviate poverty, improve social cohesion and international relations, advance global economy, and promote realization of human rights (Lancaster 35).

However, controversy exists as to whether aid should be limited to countries that uphold and protect human rights. Proponents argue that aid should be given to countries that protect and uphold human rights.

On the other hand, opponents argue that aid should be given to any needy country regardless of poor records of human rights in that country.

Countries with poor human rights should receive aid because denying it will increase suffering and misery, and will direct focus to records of donor countries that support oppressive regimes.

International aid plays pivotal role in development of poor countries around the globe. It promotes political, social, economic, environmental, and political development in recipient countries.

However, research has shown that international aid presents several limitations to recipient countries. For example, China and the United Sates expect recipient countries to use a large portion of financial aid to purchase products and professional services from them (Lancaster 38).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This promotes relations and trade between countries. International aid helps many developing countries improve their poor infrastructures (Chatrna 5). However, donor countries are the beneficiaries of contracts that involve development of infrastructure in impoverished countries.

International aid also alleviates poverty. In 2002, presidents of rich countries participated in the United Nations Conference for Financing and Development that focused on welfare of poor countries.

At the conference, more than fifty heads of state agreed to eradicate poverty, promote global economic growth, and support development in impoverished countries.

In addition, they agreed that wealthy nations would donate 0.7% of their Gross National Product to poor countries to fulfill the goals of the conference.

One form of international aid is the official development assistance (ODA). It plays an important role because it enhances development of countries that lack ability to attract international investors. As of 2009, only 5 rich countries had managed to donate 0.7% of their GDP to poor countries.

In 2005, Jeffrey Sachs argued that international aid could alleviate poverty in Africa if it was doubled. Sachs argued that poor countries could alleviate poverty by using international aid to invest in health, technology, education, and infrastructure (Lancaster 43).

This would increase worker productivity and as a result attract more foreign aid and create additional wealth.

We will write a custom Essay on Role of Wealthy Countries in International Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More He further argued that this would create a cycle of prosperity in which wealth created would be invested in the country’s economy to create additional wealth until poverty is eradicated (Lancaster 44).

Despite a raging debate as to whether countries with poor records of human rights should receive aid, nations accused of violating human rights violations continue to receive international aid. It would be unfair for rich countries to deny aid to countries with records of poor human rights.

First, cutting aid would increase suffering and misery. Many poor countries have limited resources that cannot alleviate poverty. For example, international aid was denied to Zimbabwe, Libya, and Iraq.

However, leaders continued to enrich themselves through severe violation of human rights and misappropriation of national resources. Citizens continued to wallow in poverty while the world watched.

An alternative to denying aid could include imposing international sanctions that target leaders of countries with cases of human rights violations.

Libya, Zimbabwe, and Libya have weak populations that cannot survive without aid. Therefore, denying poor countries aid at the expense of corrupt leaders increases suffering and poverty.

International aid is given to poor countries for humanitarian support, education funding, health care programs, and promotion of human rights (Chatrna 6).

Donor countries should avoid funding activities that directly benefit oppressive regimes and instead increase funding for activities that directly benefit the populace (Smith par2).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Role of Wealthy Countries in International Development by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For example, Indonesian national police, Detachment 88 is a beneficiary of international aid from Australia and the United States government.

The police force has been accused of severe human rights violations. A political prisoner, Yusuf Sipakoly accused Detachment 88 of human rights violations (Smith par4). Promotion of human rights is an important aspect of any nation’s growth and development.

However, tying it to international aid is inappropriate. Leaders who aim at amassing wealth and power perpetrate human rights violations. Therefore, it is unfair to deny aid to countries ruled by such leaders because people continue to suffer at the expense of heinous actions of leaders.

Donor countries should target such leaders. A report by The Foundation for AIDS Research (amfAR) revealed that if the United States denied aid to certain African countries, it would increase suffering. 276, 500 people would not receive treatment for HIV/AIDS thus contributing to more deaths, 88,000 TB patients would not receive treatment, Malaria would cause more than 6,000 deaths, and more than 3.6 million people would not be treated for Malaria (Lancaster 65).

International aid should not be linked to protection of human rights but to needs of poor people who have no means of improving their lives.

Therefore, donor countries should find ways to help poor people in impoverished countries especially those who face human rights violations (Smith par5). Denying aid to countries with poor records of human rights will focus attention on records of donor countries.

Many rich nations that aid impoverished countries are associated with regimes that perpetuate human rights violations. For example, the Iraq war funded by the United States was characterized by gross human rights violations.

In addition, the United States funded Iraq during the Iraq-Iran war that resulted in many deaths and displacement of innocent people. On the other hand, Australia funds the Indonesian police force, that has been accused of violating human rights in the country.

The United States trades with rich countries such as China and Saudi Arabia that have been accused of human rights violations. If rich countries deny aid to countries with records of poor human rights, they should also end relations with rich countries accused of violating human rights.

Human rights violations are present in all countries though in different degrees. Therefore, denying aid to countries with poor records of human rights would be ironical and ridiculous. Rich countries should use aid to leverage and promote human rights in recipient countries (Chatrna 4).

Aid is one of the ways of creating relations between countries. Stringent actions such as withdrawal of aid should be executed when oppression and human rights violation reach intolerable levels. Aid withdrawal is considered a way of pushing oppressive governments to bring change.

However, it has increased suffering in many countries. For example, Madagascar’s poverty worsened when donors withdrew aid due to accusations of human rights violations (Smith par5). Before 2009, international aid contributed 70% of Madagascar’s annual government budget.

The effects of aid withdrawal are severe. 45% of its citizens lack access to clean water, school enrolment has decreased, 60% of the population lack access to toilets, and 25% of the population dose not sleep on beds (Smith par7).

Poverty has increased, revealing the great role played by international aid in poor countries.

In conclusion, international aid plays a pivotal role in promoting development in poor countries. It funds education, health care, and improves relations between countries.

In addition, it promotes political, social, and economic development. Human aid should be given to countries with records of poor human rights because of two main reasons.

First, denying aid will increase problems experienced by recipient countries.

Second, denying aid will focus attention on records of donor countries. It would be ironical for rich countries to withdraw aid from countries with records of poor human rights because they support governments that promote the vice.

Evidence considered has revealed that the United States and Australia have in the past supported regimes that have been accused of violating human rights. For example, Australia funds the Indonesian police force that has been accused of gross human rights violations.

Instead, rich countries should use aid to promote and leverage human rights in countries that do not uphold them.

Works Cited Chatrna, Diana. The effect of foreign aid on economic growth in developing countries, Journal of International Business and Cultural Studies 3.10 (2010): 1-13. Print.

Lancaster, Carol. Foreign aid: diplomacy, development, domestic politics. New York: University of Chicago Press, 2008. Print.

Smith, Alex. What happens when aid is withdrawn from a state in political turmoil? 7 June. 2011. Web.


Marketing research method – data analysis with SPSS software Research Paper college essay help

Executive summary This is a report on the data analysis carried out in an attempt to understand more about the reasons why people travel to Yarragon village and the kind of activities that they engage in when they are there as well as the experiences that they go through during their stay.

The report is presented through a format where data analysis is carried out and the results presented in a chapter named results of data analysis, then the discussions on the data analysis results are carried out and this is followed by a section the conclusions that the researcher arrived at after carrying out data analysis and finally a section on the recommendations made on the basis of the results of the data analysis is presented.

The data analysis was carried out with the aid of the Statistical Package for Social Sciences (SPSS) and the results are presented though the use of frequency tables.

The analysis involved the determination of the respondents’ profiles through an analysis of the demographic characteristics of the sample such as their age, gender, family composition and the country from which they come from.

This was important in that it helped the researcher to know whether the selected sample was representative of the entire target population.

Other demographic characteristics that were tested were the mode of transport that was used to travel to the village and also the method that the respondents used to get information about the village and its tourist destination.

The respondents were also requested to state the reasons as to why they visited the village and this was intended to answer the research questions about what made people visit the village and what experiences they had while on the visit.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The researcher also wanted to know whether the visitors were travelling in a group all alone and if in a group, the number of people in those groups.

Finally, the researcher carried out a correlation analysis and also tested two hypotheses which were aimed at helping him to answer the overall research questions.

The main results of the study showed that most of the variables tested in the study had a correlation at significant levels of 0.001 and 0.005.

The results also revealed that the hypotheses that were tested were true and these were that the purpose of visit differed across gender and that the intention to return to the village differed across gender.

The study concludes that there are various reasons which influence people to visit the village and these reasons are mostly personal.

The study also concludes that it is important to understand the different attributes of visitors in order to be able to segment them in to groups that can be specifically targeted for particular packages.

The study recommends that it the tourist attractions in the village should ensure that they practice segmentation as well as other forms of marketing in order to ensure continuous flow of visitors to the village.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Marketing research method – data analysis with SPSS software specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This research will contribute to the knowledge of tourism management since managers and academicians in this area will be able to understand what factors affect customer’s decision to visit a particular place.

Demographic results Age of respondents

The researcher sought to know the age of the respondents in the study. The results are presented in the table below

Age group Frequency Percent Valid Percent Cumulative Percent Valid 15-24 yrs 20 4.7 4.8 4.8 25-34 yrs 31 7.3 7.4 12.2 35-44 yrs 48 11.2 11.5 23.7 45-54 yrs 76 17.8 18.2 42.0 55-64 yrs 136 31.9 32.6 74.6 65-74 yrs 83 19.4 19.9 94.5 75 yrs or over 23 5.4 5.5 100.0 Total 417 97.7 100.0 Missing System 10 2.3 Total 427 100.0 The results presented above show that a majority (32.6%) of the respondents were between the ages of 55-64 years, 19.9% were between 65-74 years, 18.2% were between 45-54 years, 11.5% between the ages of 35-44 years, 7.3% between the ages of 25-34 years, 5.4% were 75 years and above while another 4.7% were between the ages of 15-24 years.

Gender of respondents

The researcher sought to know the gender of the respondents. The results are presented in the table below.

Gender Frequency Percent Valid Percent Cumulative Percent Valid Male 164 38.4 39.7 39.7 Female 249 58.3 60.3 100.0 Total 413 96.7 100.0 Missing System 14 3.3 Total 427 100.0 The results show that a majority (60.3%) of the respondents were female while the other 39.7% were male. This is in line with the census data from the local state which shows that the number of women is much more than the number of women in the population.

Family composition

The researcher sought to know the family composition of the respondents. The results are presented in the table below.

Family composition at home Frequency Percent Valid Percent Cumulative Percent Valid Live alone 61 14.3 14.8 14.8 Shared house with no children (e.g. friends) 36 8.4 8.8 23.6 Couple without children at home 211 49.4 51.3 74.9 Couple or single adult with children under 16 years 68 15.9 16.5 91.5 Other 35 8.2 8.5 100.0 Total 411 96.3 100.0 Missing System 16 3.7 Total 427 100.0 The results presented above show that a majority (49.4%) of the respondents were couples without children at home while another 15.9% of the respondents were couples or singles with children who were under the age of 16 years.

Another 14.3% of the respondents lived alone and 8.4% shared houses. This shows that the village attracts the old people more than the middle aged and the young. Measures should be put in place to ensure that all age groups are attracted to the village in order to increase the number of visitors.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Marketing research method – data analysis with SPSS software by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Country of origin

The researcher sought to know the country of origin of the respondents. The results are presented in the table below

Country Frequency Percent Valid Percent Cumulative Percent Valid Australia 391 91.6 98.5 98.5 New Zealand 2 .5 .5 99.0 Belgium 1 .2 .3 99.2 Holland 1 .2 .3 99.5 England 2 .5 .5 100.0 Total 397 93.0 100.0 Missing System 30 7.0 Total 427 100.0 The results presented above show that a majority (98.5%) of the respondents were from Australia.

This means that most of the visitors to the village are locals and therefore there is need to put up measures to attract more foreign visitors to the village as this will increase the revenue brought to the village and consequently improve the living standards of the locals.

Reason for visiting Yarragon village

The researcher wanted to know the reason why the respondents visit the village. The results are presented in the table below

Reason for visiting Yarragon Responses Percent of Cases N Percent $Question_2a Rest stop 123 18.8% 29.5% VFR 49 7.5% 11.8% F


Approaching Japan through the Study of Consumption Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

There is no need to stress the necessity to analyze the consumption issue, which has recently become the key driving force behind most of the present-day business, production, media and even education solutions.

Being targeted at consuming the provided services, people are likely to stop being creative and focus on thoughtless consumption of the provided products instead of developing a critical approach towards the latter.

Spreading all over the globe, the consumption problem has finally become an issue in the Japanese society.

In his Approaching the Japan through the study of consumption, the Chapter 1 to the book titled Contemporary urban Japan: A sociology of consumption, John Clammer (2008) specifies the major features of the Japanese consumption processes, as well as provides the key driving power behind the consumption process and offers prognoses for the consumption rates in Japan in the next few decades.

When speaking of the ways in which consumption affects the society and how it influences the culture of a specific nation, Japan is the last state that one might think of.

Indeed, with its long-lasting ancient traditions, which are cherished nowadays with just as much fervor as they were several centuries ago, the specific philosophy of the Japanese people and a pace of life, which is completely different from the one adopted in the Western world, Japan might seem the last state that might be actually threatened by the effects of thoughtless consumption.

However, the problem seems to have become much more massive than one might have actually thought it would ever do.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to Clammer’s report, the naivety of the Japanese population, as well as the readiness with which they accept the latest changes and innovations without questioning them first has played a nasty trick on the Japanese people, and the effects of consumerism have come as a result.

Another issue that Clammer brings up is the way in which the principles of consumption were introduced into the Japanese society. As it has been mentioned above, the Japanese world is somewhat isolated from the influences of the rest of the world.

While maintaining contacts with the Asian, European and American states, it still leads a life of its own, with its traditions, principles and philosophy, which picks a question concerning the way in which the Japanese society has managed to catch the consumerist “virus”.

According to Clammer, there are several ways to explain the given phenomenon. On the one hand, the availability of the information and, which is even more important, the amount of the available information makes people highly dependable on mass media, and the Japanese are no exception.

On the other hand, Japan has become much more open towards international contacts after the WWII, as Clammer explains. Thus, Japan switched from capitalist economics to consumer capitalism, following the examples of the rest of the European states and the USA.

Followed by an increase for department stores all over the state and the process of socialization through media and advertizing, consumption led to the lack of control in the social construction of desires, which became the final straw that broke the camel’s back.

The Japan finally fell under the impact of consumerist ideas, Clammer says.

We will write a custom Essay on Approaching Japan through the Study of Consumption specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to Clammer, consumption should not be regarded only as a negative phenomenon; by consuming certain production, people can communicate their demands.

In addition, consumption rates help inform the entertainment and/or production companies about their tastes and their major demands concerning what people would like to see the elements of entertainment and the products, which they consume on a daily basis, like.

As Clammer puts it, media serves as a mediator between the popular culture and the process of its transformation, which means that the results of media consumption analysis help deliver the producers of the specified media the information concerning what people would like to see.

In addition, it is worth keeping in mind that consumerist attitudes are powered to a considerable extent by the technological development of the state, the efficacy of the marketing processes within the state’s major industries and the relationships of the latter to much larger social factors.

Therefore, high rates of consumerism within a state also show its progress, which means that the consumerism issue is a double-sided sword.

The issue regarding the social stratification must also be brought up. According to what Clammer says, consumerism contributes to splitting the society into smaller groups.

Therefore, the advent of consumerism in Japan heralds the era when the middle class is divided into even more mini-societies according to the group preferences and most frequently consumed products.

The given process, however, cannot be considered as negative one, given the fact that it promotes individuality. Therefore, it offers a way to tip the scale between mass consumption and the choice of an individual towards the latter.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Approaching Japan through the Study of Consumption by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Finally, the issue of gender and age as they are viewed through a consumerist lens must be considered.

Unfortunately, even with its powerful influence on the majority of the population, consumerism did not change the Japanese concept of women as housewives and did not open new doors for women either in media, or in any other sphere.

However, under women’s pressure and consumerism, men have also started growing interest in consumption. As for the age as related to consumerism in Japan, as it should have been expected, the younger audience turned out the most susceptible to the influence of the media.

However, the given problem can be solved by involving parents, who can influence the buyer’s choices of their kids and, thus, help them form a more reasonable approach towards the process of product consumption.

Thus, judging by the merits of the first chapter, Approaching the Japan through the study of consumption, the rest of the book written by J. Clammer must be just as insightful and intriguing.

By offering curious theories of the way in which the Japanese society develops and what role consumption plays in this development process, as well as giving graphic examples that prove his point, Clammer makes a very interesting statement concerning the modern Japan.

By claiming that Japanese major cities can actually serve as the barometer of the entire Japan society and simultaneously showing how radical the changes within the Japanese cities, such as Tokyo, are, Clammer makes it clear that the state is experiencing a the surge of innovations brought onto the Japanese society by the changes in the Western civilization.

Seeing how Japan is moving rapidly towards globalization and how high the urbanization rates in Japan are, one may claim with certainty that the Japanese society is standing at the threshold of major changes.

Reference List Clammer, J. (2008). Approaching the Japan through the study of consumption. In J. Clammer (Ed.), Contemporary urban Japan: A sociology of consumption (pp. 3–51). New York, NY: Wiley.


“Facing Poverty with a Rich Girl’s Habits” Critical Essay essay help: essay help

The essay “Facing Poverty with a Rich Girl’s Habits” is non-fiction and it as an autobiography written by Suki Kim. Suki Kim tells her story about how she and her family went from living a wealthy life to being bankrupt and having to start over in America after her father lost everything he had in South Korea. Suki and her family moved to Queens, New York form South Korea in the 1980’s.

Suki describes how she lived in a crowded apartment which was nothing like the mansion that her family owned in Korea. She also writes about the challenges that she faced due to her struggles and the adjustments she had to make while in America and how she overcame her struggles. It is truly hard to imagine how tough it was for Suki to have to deal with her new lifestyle, living in a new country, making new friends and facing a language barrier.

Suki writes about how the first English word she learned was “fresh off the boat” (Kim, 2004, November 21). Certainly, the language issues mentioned above are not the only barriers that Suki had to face as soon as she started plunging into the U.S. life. The social barrier was just as hard to overcome as the one concerning the language.

As a matter of fact, it seems that the two are pretty much related to each other. Indeed, language has a lot to do with a nation’s culture, values and pace of life. Therefore, by speaking a foreign language among the natives, one is most likely to be credited as a stranger or, worse yet, an outcast, which Suki’s experience shows in a very graphic way: “One new fact that took more time to absorb was that I was now Asian, a term that I had heard mentioned only in a social studies class” (Kim, 2004, November 21).

Related to the previous issue rather strongly, the problem of alienation is also brought up. While the American children seemed to give Suki a cold shoulder, she and the other children, who started studying English as a second language, also started feeling their superiority and showing it to the newcomers.

There was, however, little fault of Suki in it; she could hardly change the way in which the immigrant society worked, seeing how traditions among the Koreans who moved to the U.S. have been cultivated for five generations running. The given problem raises a number of peculiar ethical questions, among which the ones regarding acculturation and social hierarchy should be mentioned first.

To start with, the change in attitude towards the Korean newcomers that Suki and other Korean immigrants who started learning English displayed might be the sign of losing their touch with their culture. Consequently, a dilemma of either losing one’s culture and becoming one of the U.S. citizens, or retaining the culture and becoming a social outcast appears.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As for the issue regarding hierarchy in society, it would be peculiar to find out if the aforementioned attitude towards the immigrants of the new wave could be considered the so-called “social valve.” Since, as Suki explained, in U.S., she and other once wealthy Koreans were reduced to doing menial labor, they actually might need someone of even lower social background to maintain self-respect.

Thus, an interesting feature of human nature is revealed to the reader. Speaking of the formal features of the story told by Kim, one must mention that the article belongs to the genre of autobiography and seems to be intended for both general audience and the people who are thinking of migrating to a foreign country or already have.

The tone of the article is neutral; while the author admits that she made mistakes, she also notices the flaws of the American society. Finally, Kim’s purpose for writing this article seems to revolve around making the reader think of how people build relationships with strangers, and how fast a once powerful person can be brought to the lowest of the low, as well as how one can survive such painful experience and carry on with his/her life.

Personally, I feel that the given story offers its readers much to relate to. With one of the running themes of the article concerning the issue of teenage outcasts, the story speaks to the minds of the readers from all walks of life, since at some point of being a teenager, everyone must have felt lonely.

In addition, the specifics of the immigrant society, especially concerning the ways in which its members treated the newcomers, revealed a lot about human nature. Finally, revealing the problems of adapting to a new social status, the story turns remarkably complex, which also lends it a certain charm. All in all, Kim’s article feels like a mix between a love letter to her teenage years and an essay on immigrant issues, which definitely makes me interested in the story.

Reference List Kim, S. (2004, November 21). Facing Poverty with a Rich Girl’s Habits. The New York Times. Web.


Detection and Prevention of Wireless Intrusion Research Paper best essay help

Abstract This research shows elements of wireless intrusion detection and intrusion prevention. It shows the main areas of wireless intrusion and detection together with advantages and challenges of using a wireless intrusion and detection systems. Overall, the research concludes that a wireless IDS offers many advantages than challenges it may present to users.

Wireless local area networks (WLANs) have many threats, which could have significant impacts on the network. Threats to WLAN technologies include “wrongly configured wireless access points (WAPs), Denial of Services (DoS) and possible system hijacking” (Max, 2009, p. 3).

Wireless networks are also prone to common attacks like TCP/IP and 802.11 threats. TCP/IP threats also are common in networked technologies. WLANs must incorporate security techniques that can detect and defend against potential threats. These are intrusion detection system (IDS) solutions.

Introduction WLANs have the same IDS as a Network Intrusion Detection System (NIDS) because they can also evaluate network traffic for potential security threats. However, IDS can evaluate specific areas, which only relate to WLAN. These include WAPs, rogue WAPs, and offsite users. The growth in wireless technologies has allowed networks to support wireless devices at different sections of the network typology.

This suggests that WLAN IDS have critical roles to play in network securities. WLANs may have unconnected wireless sensors to analyze traffic. The physical location of a sensor is critical for effective analysis of network traffic. The location normally influences what a network sensor can detect and monitor. Network sensors should have the ability to monitor all gadgets that can gain access to the network.

Some wireless networks may have more than a single sensor. These sensors go beyond the normal scope of network operations. In most cases, the WLAN may have a single channel, but it also has options of running on several channels. Thus, WLAN sensor may effectively serve a single channel. However, regular changes can ensure that WLAN sensors can analyze several channels.

IDS has many parts, such as consoles, databases, and system sensors. Users can run the system on either a centralized or decentralized platform.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Figure 1: WLAN IDS

Wireless Threats Wireless local area networks are susceptible to a number of threats. The normal 802.11 encryption has become susceptible to attacks (Max, 2009, p. 7). In addition, the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) may not withstand constant brute force attacks. In other words, encryption alone cannot protect the network because the intruder can still attack and decrypt sensitive information in wireless networks.

Attackers also rely on rogue WAP to attack WLANs and gain access to sensitive information in the system (Vladimirov, Gavrilenko


Return on Investment Essay essay help online: essay help online

Return on Investment (ROI) refers to a well-known financial metric commonly used to analyze the financial results which arise from personal investments as well as deeds. A number of varying metrics are basically known by the same definition. However, the most popular refers to a metric that I seek to discuss in this paper known as ROI.

Normally used as a cash flow metric, the Return on Investment particularly makes a comparison of the scale as well as scheduling of investment gains which are matched directly to the scale and scheduling of costs involved. In any situation where the ROI is seen to post a high rate, it implies that the gains which have been made compare well with the costs that had been incurred (Saleemi, 2006).

Return on Investment has grown into a well-known concept within the past few decades mostly as an all-purpose metric for analyzing capital attainments, business initiatives, and conservative fiscal investments. These investments are directed into stock shares or into venture capital use.

The issue of popularity however is not much important since the metric is commonly used by people without really understanding the merits and demerits that are associated with it. Return on Investments is used to measure how profitable a transaction is at times. This definition is very accurate as well as very important.

There are business men who make use of different metrics in economics instead of ROI to imply one and the same thing. Such use is potentially wrong and lacks knowledge since efficiency is a word that is similarly used to define a measure that is arrived at by using very few varying financial metrics such as Internal Rate of Return (IRR), Return on Capital Employed among others.

The inherent meaning in the metric, Return on Investment, is somewhat implied in how its naming is done. Return on Investment seeks to answer questions such as, what is that is attained for that which is spent, do the returns anticipated surpass the costs involved, and do the returns attained perfectly justify the costs used? Many types of ROI measure what is gained from a certain cost through a calculation.

Ratio is also used sometimes. Normally, an outcome which is more than 0.00 implies that returns overweigh costs while a Return on Investment which is low implies that costs that are involved greatly surpass the returns. Where certain probable actions are actively competing for finances and when other carrying elements between the alternative options are realistically the same, the investment or action carried out having a greater level of ROI is the best choice to arrive at (Scotch, 2005).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The use of ROI is very important as I seek to elaborate below. It is quite helpful for the decision makers. In fact, decision makers must recall that an ROI measure on its own is not an adequate ground for resorting to a certain action over a different one. A Return on Investment which has been calculated for an anticipated action fails to say anything concerning the chances that anticipated returns as well as costs really occur as anticipated.

This implies, the Return on Investment on its own does not mention anything concerning uncertainty or risk. It only depicts how the returns can be measured against the costs if the anticipated outcomes actually come about. Owing to this very fact, a good analyst will endeavor to assess the chances of varying ROI results and wiser people charged with making decisions will make a consideration of both the scale and risks associated with this metric at all times.

In addition, the decision makers will anticipate realistic proposals from an analyst as well concerning how ROI may be improved upon by decreasing the costs, adding gains or speeding up gains (Moloney, 2009). When analyzing a financial statement, analysts mostly measure the financial health of a business as well as the nature of operations that go on.

With this in mind, there are several measures that are involved and normally called ROI as well. They are Return on Capital Employed, Return on Total Assets, Return on Equity, and Return on Net Worth. Similarly, in other scenarios where the emphasis is mostly on the evaluation of cash flow, ROI at times is used to point at the aggregate cash flow outcomes for a given time frame.

In addition, there are people who insist other cash metrics are ROI. Average rate of return is the first metric. Internal rate of return is the second metric. By simply analyzing how the terms are used, a different type of ROI which measures the bundles of cash used for greater investments is sometimes referred to as the cash on cash evaluation or simply the return on invested capital.

In conclusion, there are many Returns on Investment measures that are commonly used and the terminology lacks a single definition on its own that is universally known. This means that when making a review of the measures of ROI, or when even told to come up with one, it is very pertinent that care is employed to ascertain that all the people involved are able to describe the measure in the same manner.

References Moloney, T. (2009). Business Finance. New York: Sage Publications.

We will write a custom Essay on Return on Investment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Saleemi, N. (2006). Economics in Practice. New York: Rout ledge Publishers.

Scotch, B. (2005). Business Management. London: Prentice Hall.


Siemens Saudi Arabia- International Marketing Plan Report college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Effect on marketing activities

Strategic planning

Timing and mode of entry

Marketing mix


Works Cited

Introduction Several essential factors require careful considerations to ensure the success of business for companies that wish to explore a new territory, which creates the necessity of a good marketing plan. The plan entails studying the territory, exploring its possibilities, and developing or modifying products appropriately to suit the market’s needs. Siemens, an American company, wishes to explore the Saudi Arabian market and the following are some of the essentials aspects the company needs to evaluate carefully.

Effect on marketing activities For any company that plans to venture into a new territory, it is vital to consider some important elements including the marketing strategy and the receptiveness of the environment to new products or services. Marketing can sometimes be a complex affair as various variables come into play, most of the time simultaneously.

One of the main environmental variables that would affect marketing of goods and services for Siemens in Saudi Arabia would be culture. The official religion in Saudi Arabia is Islam and as such, it naturally dictates the cultural practices for most of the population in the region. Some aspects of Islamic culture are worth considering when developing the marketing strategy.

For instance, Islamic culture requires that men provide for the women financially while the women reciprocate by taking care of the household (Long 67). The result is that men form the majority of business owners in the region. Therefore, it would be wise for the company to consider advertising that mostly appeals to the male population concerning products and services as they dictate most of the businesses in the region.

The company may also want to develop products and services for women that allow them access from the comfort of their homes. A good example is the use of Siemens’ investment services and financial solutions (Siemens Para.7). Such services allow women to involve themselves with income generating activities without breaching their culture to the benefit of the corporation.

Islamic culture also limits women from engaging in the acquisition of property. However, by using investment vehicles such as mutual funds, it is possible for the company to enable the women in the country to benefit from investment activities involving property, without having them directly involved in the transactions.

This move would be both empowering and economically sound as it generates income for a large percentage of the population without breaching the cultural dynamics and causing a hostile environment for the company. Another variable that the company ought to consider is the economic environment of the region. Saudi Arabia has a 10.9% unemployment rate according to a survey by Heritage Foundation in 2013.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The survey also reveals that foreign direct investments stand at $ 16.4 billion and that the total population in the country is twenty eight billion (Heritage Foundation Para.13). Based on these findings, Siemens has a good chance of productivity as the population provides a ready market that is large enough to produce substantial gain. The foreign direct investment statistics also provide a good marker for success in the region.

The unemployment percentage means that the company has a vacuum to fill in the economy, which depends on how good the company’s management is on market research. Providing employment opportunities through the establishment of business in the country would be a welcome move for the government, assuming that it is currently working on reducing the unemployment level in the region.

Although there are many attractive facts about the country, there are also some facts that form a negative opinion of the place, thus it is important for the company to balance the merits and demerits before forming a conclusive opinion about setting up business in the country.

For instance, the survey by Heritage Foundation indicates that the government has had a bad record regarding transparency of its operations, especially in relation to property ownership. The survey rates property rights at 40% with a similar percentage in investment freedom.

The fact that the region has been under a ruling class of elite individuals since the inception of the state makes legal and political functions to overlap, thus creating a good environment for corruption. The ruling elite control policies on investment and property ownership, hence making it difficult to predict the outcome of investments in the region.

Strategic planning In a bid to obtain actionable information, the management of the company needs to apply the use of specialists in conducting extensive surveys of the region. This move is essential for the formulation of concrete strategies that are productive for the company in the end. For instance, with regard to the company’s positioning strategy, the company should conduct surveys to get clear numbers on the products and services the region needs and the actual amount that it needs thus enabling the company calculate input costs and possible output gains.

One of the most cost effective ways for conducting surveys is through the application of online tools such as social media. According to a report by the European Travel Commission on 29 June 2013, various surveys by the Arab Advisor Group between 2010 and 2012 indicate that there are thirteen million Internet users in Saudi Arabia out of the total twenty eight million and that 54.6% of all mobile handsets consist of smart phones.

We will write a custom Report on Siemens Saudi Arabia- International Marketing Plan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The report further indicates that 39% of Internet users bought and paid for products online in 2010 and that 58% of all goods bought online in 2011 consisted of electronic products followed closely by software at 50% (European Travel Commission Para.8).

These statistics show that using the Internet to conduct surveys for the company is a viable option; especially considering the number of Internet users in the country and the percentage also includes women, who would ordinarily be difficult to reach by most other personal means due to cultural restrictions. The Internet application for surveys is also cost-effective as opposed to face-to-face interviews, and is seemingly less intrusive in nature.

However, it would also be advisable to conduct fieldwork for comparison between online results and groundwork surveys. The essence is to provide objectivity to information regarding market accessibility and need for products and services for the users. Siemens possesses a competitive advantage over other foreign companies in the region and ought to apply the same to its advantage.

Years of experience have enabled the company to develop links worldwide and make the name a reliable brand thus increasing chances of acceptability of its products in new markets. Most consumers prefer goods and services from companies they are familiar with as opposed to startup corporations due to trust issues.

Considering the current state of the economy in most countries, consumers prefer options that are less likely to result in a waste of money unless such options are substantially cheap, to the disadvantage of the production company.

The size of the company is another advantage as it enables the company to obtain substantial investments and produce goods at a scale that matches the populations need with little need for help from others in the industry. The quality of products and services is also better if such goods and services come from a company that can afford to produce them without a need for shortcut options.

Apart from being beneficial for production costs, the size of the company will also benefit the company with regard to mitigating tax charges. By supplying a large amount of goods and services, the company is in a position to make enough profits to cover its expenses including taxes and leave enough for other projects the company may have such as expansion.

Taxation is usually a tricky issue for smaller companies as it necessitates the hiking of prices of goods and services so that the entire cost shifts to the consumers. The result is that the goods and services become unaffordable for consumers or unattractive in comparison to similar goods in the market.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Siemens Saudi Arabia- International Marketing Plan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The variety of products and services would allow Siemens to shift the taxation costs to consumers without placing the weight of the entire cost on one specific product or service. For instance, the company produces electronic goods while providing infrastructural services and engineering labor. The division of the tax charges amongst the three options reduces the tax burden on each of the products and services, thus enabling the company to provide the same at affordable prices for consumers.

Timing and mode of entry In order to ensure favorable reception for products and services, it is important for any company to consider the timing of the launch and the mode of entry into the new market. For instance, had Siemens tried to penetrate the Saudi Arabian market in 2001 or 2002 after the September 11 bombings and subsequent deployment of the U.S army to Iraq, its chances of success would have been dismal.

The fact that the company had nothing to do with any of these events and that its products and services had no connection to the events would have been irrelevant as the situation would have depended largely on the relationship between the two countries and the perception the Saudi Arabian citizens had of the United States.

However, as most of the countries in the world are trying to mitigate the residual effects of the 2007-2009 global financial crisis, most governments, including that of Saudi Arabia, have resulted to attracting foreign investment to improve revenue and cater for growing populations.

Having the United States as one of the biggest consumers of oil and gas in the world, which mainly comes from Saudi Arabia, trade relations between American companies and the Saudi Arabian government are likely to be civil. The Saudi Arabian government and the American government have also been partners in eliminating the terrorism menace for their mutual benefit, an element that could be advantageous for the company in terms of trade relations.

The company also needs to take advantage of the fact that the country currently has a high unemployment rate and the population growth strains its facilities. Considering the fact that Siemens is a leading supplier of infrastructural solutions, the company’s services and products related to infrastructure development are likely to gain acceptance from the government and private investors in the country.

A comparison between the current population, its growth rate, and the land area gives clear indications that there is a vacuum in the infrastructure market and Siemens would be wise to take advantage of the opportunity by being proactive in providing a solution to the government. Although the country has oil and natural gases, electricity production is a task for other players in the energy field.

Siemens stands a good chance at selling sustainable electricity generation and maintenance solutions that cater for the current population as well as future growth as through the construction of functional, energy sufficient buildings. A good example of such a building is The Crystal project in London, a building that is functional and energy sufficient without compromising on the esthetic quality that ensures the area maintains its beauty.

The company’s mode of entry has to be effective and cost effective to ensure that the company does not lose resources that it would otherwise apply in other areas. A progressive entry strategy is the surest way of attaining the best results while maintaining a failsafe incase the venture proves not viable.

The use of the Internet for the introduction of some of the products after surveys is a good way to test the market’s receptiveness without having to incur tax costs and other costs that come with the establishment of a subsidiary. Once the company’s management is convinced that the country holds great potential for productivity, it would be wise to form affiliations with companies dealing in similar goods and services for distribution.

The benefit of this strategy is that it enables the market to test the products that the company offers while keeping the company’s costs low. A rise in demand would then be an indicator the company should open a subsidiary or subsidiaries, which depends on the goods and services the market demands.

Marketing mix A marketing mix is essential in securing the success of a business in a new market. The basic concept is the application of 4 Ps, which include price, place, product and promotion (Keegan and Green 62). When introducing its products and services to Saudi Arabia, Siemens has to ensure that the geographical location or place suits the needs of the company.

For instance, when opening a subsidiary of services involving oil related solutions, it would be prudent to ensure that the service station is within close proximity of the oil station. This aspect is important for efficiency purposes for the client and the company alike. It ensures that service delivery is efficient and effective while maintaining good prices and high quality.

The price the company sets for goods and services determines the consumption trends for the market (Keegan and Green 80). Setting prices that are higher than the competition causes the products to be unattractive to consumers while settling for a price much lower than the competition reduces the company’s potential for making profits.

The company has to strike a balance between the two considerations by incorporating its expenses and the profit margin into calculations on expected output in profits. Depending on the climate of the market, the company may also offer attractive packages such as discounts, on various products as incentives for consumers to buy more of those products.

This strategy is mainly effective for products that have less demand than others do and those whose profits largely depend on the quantity bought. Another way that the company can improve sales through pricing is by integrating several products and services to create packages that seem attractive and affordable.

For instance, the company may consider integrating the sale of electrical appliances with services for their maintenance, thus ensuring their engineers get work and the product sales remain high. In promoting the company’s products, Siemens should consider methods that are attractive to consumers, are cost effective, and are innovative and different from other producers of similar products in the market.

For instance, considering the culture in the country, it would be inappropriate to apply the use of sexually provocative advertisements, even though in most cases sex sells. Using an advertisement method that bears many similarities with a competitor in the same field dulls the perception of the audience and reduces the attention they pay to the company’s products.

Therefore, it essential to maintain innovation coupled with ensuring that the company curves a niche for its products in a new market with similar products. Lastly, the company has to ensure that its products stand out from the competition through branding and packaging. Using brand names that are hard to remember makes it difficult to sell such products.

On the other hand, using names that seem boring makes the products easily forgettable. The company has to ensure that its products have names that are catchy and appropriate for the consumers. Attractive packaging in unique ways ensures the products stand out at their points of sale, and thus create an advantage over similar products from competitors.

Conclusion The above considerations will enable the company make the right marketing decisions for the benefits of the company and consumers in the target market while maintaining productivity. The company should also explore other options in terms of geographical locations for new markets to ensure that the end market is the most productive one for the company’s sake.

Works Cited European Travel Commission: Saudi Arabia-New Media Trend Watch Long Haul 2013. Web.

Heritage Foundation: 2013 Index of Economic Freedom 2013. Web.

Keegan, Warren, and Mark Green. Global Marketing, New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2011. Print.

Long, David. Culture and Customs of Saudi Arabia (Culture and Customs of the Middle East), Connecticut: Greenwood Publishing, 2005. Print

Siemens: Siemens Saudi Arabia 2013. Web.


Gluttony in the Merchant of Four Seasons Synthesis Essay cheap essay help

According to Francine Prose, gluttony often disguises itself in different forms, like the need to get a little more, the desire to have something more delicious, or the temptation to have a snack between the meals. In the film, ‘The Merchant of Four Seasons,’ Hans, a fruit vender, is invited by an attractive married woman in her house. The woman had fallen in love with him since his youth.

He, however, declines this offer. This incidence shows gluttony on the side of the woman who, in spite of being married, is still attracted to Hans. Gluttony is also revealed in Hans’ flashback. He recalls the time when he was a police officer and was fired after subverting justice by having oral sex with a woman that he had arrested.

According to Prose, gluttony can forestall the hour of need. It usually results in someone desiring to have something a little more delicious or having more than enough. It is the uncontrolled appetite that manifests in different forms. As per the views of Gregory the Great, gluttony in most cases manifests itself in the way a person eats, how he/she plans and thinks about eating.

Hans, in the film, ‘The Merchants of Four Seasons,’ goes to a bar and intoxicates himself with alcohol. His life is brought to an abrupt end when he takes alcohol despite being diagnosed with a heart attack. Like lust, the sin of gluttony is usually committed out of necessity and the desire for pleasure.

The two sins are therefore complex as man’s survival is based on them. Without the desire to eat, humans would become extinct. It is therefore important for religion to acknowledge this reality.

Hunger and sexual desire are engraved within the human instincts and cannot be tackled the same way other sins like pride, greed and envy are tackled. According to John Cassian, lust and gluttony should be treated as illnesses that need to be cured. Traditionally, gluttony has been associated with people in their acts of relaxing and enjoying while satisfying their bodily desires.

Just as in the case where people are expected to procreate without being lustful, it is also possible to eat to one’s satisfaction without savoring food. It is therefore necessary that one eats that which is sufficient certain him/her rather than eating to satisfy a person’s obsessions, cravings or pleasure.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In Fassbinder’s film, Han’s wife is picked by a man on the street and they go to have sex while her husband is in hospital. When she reconciles with the husband, she lets him know that she had been attracted to him just because he was comical and not for any other reason. This is a clear manifestation of lust as she is not contended with her husband but instead goes a head to have an extramarital affair.

Irmgard also advices Han’s servant, Anzell, to increase the price of the produce he was selling and they share the extra cash. She did this knowing well that Hans was stalking him and this resulted in the servant being fired. Irmgard therefore exhibits gluttony. In accordance with Prose’s view that gluttons are people with underlying psychological problems, Irmgard had some underlying pains.

She often had quarrels with her husband as he did not have ‘a respectable job.’ He also assaults her and to add on that, he is an alcohol addict. After he is incapacitated by a heart attack, he becomes alienated as a man of the house and this prompts his wife to start eying Harry, their servant. After Hans’ death, he resumes his role as the man of the house.

Hans’ desire for pleasure drives him to engage in several activities as a street merchant. In desperation, due to the pressure from his family members who always looked down upon him because of his job, he resorts to drinking and violence. He also opts to revisit his former lover.

After he gets out of the bar while drunk, he goes and beats up his wife who then leaves him. This does not resolve his problems as his wife cheats on him with another man. Drinking is what kills him and even after his death the wife marries his servant. All these twists point to the aspects of gluttony and its end results.

According to Father Evagrius of Pontus, gluttony usually results in lust, which is as a result of laziness in fasting and the harboring of evil thoughts. It is a sign of moral perverseness. Compulsive eaters and drinkers are usually perceived as freaks, unfortunate human specimens or even losers. They are believed to be having low self esteem or have some experience of past abuses and use these as a cover up for their inner pains.

Gluttony is therefore perceived as a form of weakness and pollution of the human intellect. In Fassbinder’s film, Hans is looked down upon by the other family members who are higher on the social class. He therefore resorts to drinking so as to cover up for his inner pains. Even after he is diagnosed with a heart attack, he still goes ahead to drink against the medical recommendations and this results in his death.

We will write a custom Essay on Gluttony in the Merchant of Four Seasons specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the recent past, the sin of gluttony has become distinct and it manifests itself in the form of obesity and weight gain. Gluttony can therefore no longer be classified as a form of pleasure. Gluttons are believed to be misfits who do not have the capability for self control.

They eventually become overweight and for some it might even be difficult for a person to go through a door. They often become items of news. People are often thrilled by the news celebrities gaining or loosing significant amounts of weight. Some go to every length to cut significant amounts of weight in preparation for weddings. Obese people are often perceived as being obsessed with different flavors and tastes of food.

Gluttony is therefore more of a psychological disorder than a sin. It cannot be put in the same category as other dangerous sins like pride and envy which in some cases result in other people being harmed. It only harms the glutton and makes him/her less attractive.

Gluttons are perceived as people with a psychological problem who tend to cover up their condition by finding solace in food, drinks and other pleasures. This is quite evident when Hans resorts to drinking because of the frustrations he gets from his family and the society at large.

By succumbing to gluttony, someone simply substitutes the place of God with his/her stomach. This vice often leads to other vices like flattery. Gluttons are often perceived as people who have a weak moral defense as they are unable to control themselves. In ‘The Merchant of four seasons,’ Hans is under much pressure. He has just returned from a French Foreign Legion and has high hopes of becoming economically stable.

Unfortunately this does not happen according to his expectation and the expectation of his bourgeois family. He had been fired from the police force after dallying with an offender who lured him into having oral sex with her. The pressure mounts when it turns out that the only job he can land himself is that of a fruit peddler. His rich family is against this idea as it is perceived as a job for the low class people.

He is in turn perceived as a loser. He is even not allowed to marry his first love on the basis that he is a mere fruit peddler. Hans opts to marry another woman who turns out to be a manipulative wife. At one point Hans gets drunk, goes home and decides to beat her up. She then opts to leave him and this leaves him devastated.

His own wife cheats on him with another man. All these pressures are evidently the cause of Hans’ drinking habit. When he is incapacitated by the heart attack, Hans hires someone who helps him with the fruit vending business. The servant performs his duties quite well, much better than he himself did.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Gluttony in the Merchant of Four Seasons by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This does not, however, give him any comfort as he feels secluded and incapable of playing his role as the man of the house. He in the end opts to resort to drinking again and this terminates his life.

Gluttony can be perceived as the worship of human senses especially the sense of taste. People substitute the place of God with material things like food hence making their stomachs to be like their gods. In the film, Hans resorts to alcohol to find solace. This might be perceived as a form of worship as he opts for liquor in his pursuit of happiness and this leads to his destruction.

Gluttony has been known to cause of lechery and debauchery. These are all products of weak moral defenses. In the film, both Hans and his wife seem to have fallen prey to this as they are in a situation where they cannot control their obsessions. Hans is obsessed with alcohol and it leads to his destruction. Irmgard, on the other hand, is lured into having sex with another man who is not her husband.

Her desire for more money pushes her to plan with their servant to overprice the produce so as to get the extra money. This in turn results in the servant being fired by Hans. All these are signs of a weak moral defense as they both do anything in their capacity to get whatever they are obsessed with. Gluttony is not only related to food and drinking but it also entails overindulgence in other pleasurable acts like sex.

Overeating has been known to result in other evils which include loutishness, unseemly joy and dullness of mind, uncleanness and talkativeness. Gluttony often results when someone overindulges to the level where he/she becomes less conscious of the outward implication but concentrates on the inward gratification. It makes someone to stop thinking rationally.

The film ends with Hans opting to drink against the doctor’s advice. His demise is as a result of his obsession with alcohol. This is a clear signal that gluttony often ends in self destruction unlike other vices. His obsession with alcohol resulted in many other misfortunes. For instance, it causes him to become violent, beat up his wife who in the process leaves him.

This in turn begets infidelity as the wife opts to have an affair with another man and their daughter finds them in the act. It even leads to his death. This is an evidence of what the sin of gluttony can do. According to how the story ends, it is quite evident that gluttony makes people to think irrationally as evident in Hans’ obsession with alcohol, which prompts him to drink against the doctor’s advice.

Hans’s decision to propose a toast to those who had made him to be the person that he was is quite ironic. This is because they despised him and perceived him as a loser. By him opting not to toast his wife, it is a clear indication that he was sure she would end up with Harry, his servant. This is due to the fact that he felt obsolete after being incapacitated by a heart attack and Harry had taken up most of his roles.

He dies in his state of shame and dishonor. The film therefore seems to clearly indicate that gluttony and lust always result in self destruction, an incidence that occurs to Hans who finds no other way of redeeming himself.

Works Cited Elsässer, Thomas. Fassbinder’s Germany: History Identity Subject. Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press, 2006. Print.

Prose, Francine. Gluttony : The Seven Deadly Sins. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2003. Print.


The Grand Inquisitor by Fyodor Dostoevsky Critical Essay online essay help: online essay help

Fyodor Dostoevsky and Constance Garnett are two prominent authors who narrate a great deal of ideas in their work The Grand Inquisitor. Like many authors of their time, the authors explore ideological and religious ideas. Dostoevsky and Garnet belong to the age of Dante, who in his work tried to illuminate and express ideologies that shaped knowledge about God, heaven and hell.

Through literal works and art, the authors who belonged to Dante’s age tried to bring to light matters of heaven. Dostoevsky and Garnett’s poem tries to explain the end of times and authority of the cardinals in the Roman church. The authors try to solve the mystery that no man or Christ himself knows.

The authors try to illuminate the principle of faith. According to the poem, a man lived at a time of faith. The time was marred with various miracles performed by saints. The significance of miracles in those days was critical, especially when man failed in faith.

The authors are very categorical that miracles were necessary, but also offered an opportunity for the devil to devour man using false miracles. From such revelations, the authors seek to educate man the importance using prayers to hold fast in faith.

The authors demystify the grand inquisitor as a symbol of a savior. They depict the grand inquisitor as the one who bears the cross. The authors use the character of the grand inquisitor to depict a savior of mankind. The savior is depicted as one who is weary, torn and who comes to bless. There are examples in the poem, where the authors depict the grand inquisitor as one who heals the suffering and brings life to mourners.

The representation of the grand inquisitor as a cardinal is rather intriguing. The power bestowed upon the grand inquisitor by the authors brings the mysteries of the roman church into limelight. Perhaps, the authors want the reader to understand the authority bestowed upon the cardinal.

The authors liken the cardinal powers to that of Christ. The grand inquisitor in his own wisdom tries to make man understand the concept of happiness. Interestingly, the grand inquisitor is categorical that man is a rebellious creation and so may not understand his own quest for happiness.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The nature of man to go against warnings is best analyzed by the grand inquisitor. The analysis of the grand inquisitor is an example of the very lessons taught in Christian religion. The grand inquisitor is categorical that temptations of the dread spirits of destruction show a lack of admonitions and warning in man.

Ivan and Alyosha are two brothers and characters in the poem grand inquisitor. The two brothers are on a quest of understanding religion and wisdom from the grand inquisitor. The two are disturbed by the words of the grand inquisitor. The two agree and disagree on some issues alleged by the grand inquisitor. This exhibits the fate of the Roman church in Russia, where it has challenges.

The authority exhibited by the Roman church in regard to knowledge is sometimes suspicious. This is the position that many people seem to understand. Jesuits are a section of the Roman church most elite group. Perhaps, the grand inquisitor is one of the Jesuits as evidenced from his wisdom and knowledge. People who pay no allegiance to any religion often rubbish such allegations.


Nescafe Champs Leysin Logistics and Supplies Report essay help online free

Table of Contents Methodology

Survey Results and Analysis

Supply of People

Equipment Supply

Venue Logistics


Reference List

The Nescafe Champs Leysin is the oldest snowboard competition in Europe. The event currently takes place annually in the Swiss resort of Leysin. The first Nescafe Champs Leysin event took place in 1990. The three main areas of interest in the event are athletics, art, and music.

The athletes involved in the event compete for a monetary reward. Artists who come to the event develop unique artworks that give the event its unique atmosphere. The music in the event has become a signature trait of the Nescafe Champs Leysin especially because of the concert location named “Place to be”.

The nature of the event calls for careful logistical planning to ensure that everything works. This paper assesses the logistical needs of the event required to make it a success.

Methodology The primary method used to gather information pertaining to the logistical needs of the Nescafe Champs Leysin was a literature review. The literature reviewed provided insights into the logistical needs of the event. The event website was also invaluable in providing specific information relating to the event.

In order to arrive at the conclusions provided in the last section, it was necessary to choose and consider various reports with information relating to event planning, logistics, and supply chain management.

Survey Results and Analysis The three main components of the Nescafe Champs Leysin event include snowboarding, music and art. These three categories informed the structural layout of the report. Each of these three activities presents a different set of logistical challenges. The challenges fall into three categories namely, the supply of people, equipment supply, and logistics at the venue of the event.

Supply of People For the event to be successful, it is necessary to transport and accommodate a large number of people. The people in question include the event participants and the audience. In addition, many people provide technical support for the event. They include medical doctors, coaches, and security personnel.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The four main areas of concern when it comes to the logistical challenges of moving people to Leysin include marketing, ticketing, queuing, and transport.

The marketing of the Nescafe Champs Leysin involves finding ways of attracting and retaining the attention of participants and the audience. This involves finding people interested in snowboarding competitions and ensuring that they make a commitment to take part in the event.

In addition to the competitors, the marketing of the event also aims at attracting musicians and artists to the event. The other part of the mobilization exercise involves finding an audience for the event. The function of marketing in this sense is to raise awareness and to convince participants to engage with the process.

Ticketing is a very important element of the event. Ticketing is one of the primary methods that the event organizers use to raise finances to run the event. The options available to them for ticketing include the sale of online tickets and sale of tickets at the gate. Online ticketing is very attractive for an event of this nature because it reduces the logistical challenges associated with handling money.

When the spectators use the electronic ticketing solutions to buy their tickets, the organizers save on the cost of sending money to the bank. In addition, it eliminates the security issues related to the transfer of physical money.

At the same time, electronic ticketing reduces the number of people in queues at the entry points trying to buy tickets. Verification is the only activity that takes place at the gate for the people holding electronic tickets. No time goes to the exchange of money, leading to quick movement of the queues.

Queuing is a challenging logistical task in every major event. People queue to access the event sites. Queuing is also necessary to ensure that every person entering the venue goes through security checks. In addition, the queues are necessary to facilitate ticketing and the verification of electronic tickets.

We will write a custom Report on Nescafe Champs Leysin Logistics and Supplies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The logistical challenge associated with queues is that people tend to become very impatient if the queues are long or if they are not moving at a reasonable pace. This means that it is necessary to find ways of reducing queuing time either by increasing the service points or ensuring the existing points work as efficiently as possible.

Transport is easily the most complicated logistical issue relating to the Nescafe Champs Leysin. Transport issues include human transport, and the transport of supplies and equipment. Mass transport to the remote resort of Leysin requires careful planning because there is no dedicated transport service to the resort that can handle the number of people who attend the Nescafe Champs Leysin.

Apart from the transport of people, there is also a serious logistical challenge of ensuring that once the people are at the resort, they have access to supplies. What complicates this part of planning is that the event brings together people from different parts of the world. The sheer number of brands that the planners need to cater for the needs of all the people is overwhelming.

Equipment Supply Equipment supply to the Nescafe Champs Leysin includes the transportation of all the equipment for use by the athletes, musicians, and audience. As already indicated, transporting people and supplies to the venue is a logistical challenge requiring careful planning. In the same way, it is necessary to plan carefully on how to carry all the equipment that the organizers and participants need to run the event.

Just as transport requires careful planning, accommodation is also vital in the event. The large number of people visiting Leysin in a short period makes it necessary to plan on how to accommodate them. The organizers have several on-site and off-site options for accommodation. For this reason, it is necessary to ensure that all participants and spectators finalize their accommodation plans before they arrive at Leysin.

Apart from the transport of people, there is also the logistical challenge of ensuring that once the masses are at the resort, they have access to supplies. What complicates this part of planning is that the event brings together people from different regions of the world. The sheer number of brands that the planners need to cater for the needs of all the people is overwhelming.

Venue Logistics Once people arrive at the venue, they present an ongoing logistical challenge associated with crowd control. Depending on the time of the day, people tend to crowd at certain venues. For instance, the concert venue is always filled to capacity during the concert, and is always empty at any other time. This means that crowd control must follow the patterns of the movement of people.

The management of equipment at the venue is also a logistical challenge at any time. Usually, the participants come with their own snowboards based on the specifications given by the event organizers. It is common to find participants who have misplaced their boards. Similarly, it is important to ensure that all the music equipment is on site and in good condition at all times.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Nescafe Champs Leysin Logistics and Supplies by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The final aspect of venue logistics is planning for security and emergencies. The recent bombing in Boston during the 2013 Boston marathon is a reminder that sports events are prime targets for terrorism. In this sense, the organizers must ensure that the venue remains secure. At the same time, security concerns usually emerge as soon as many people gather in one place. The police must keep an eye on the people at all times.

Conclusions In order to handle the logistics associated with the Nescafe Champs Leysin, the following issues need to be considered. First, there is need to consider ways of reducing obstructions to the flow of people. For instance, the ticketing and verification system can run using Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) technologies to eliminate the need to check each ticket physically.

Secondly, planning for the transport of people to the venue would work best if there were contracts with local bus and tour companies to transport people to the venue. Thirdly, the organizers should work with a local retail chain to open a mobile supermarket within the venue. This will ensure that the planners do not worry about supplies.

Reference List Bernoff, J


Sustainability in Modern Supply Chains Research Paper college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Sustainability of Modern supply Chains

Impacts of Modern Supply Chains and Supply Chain Collaboration

Justifications for Sustainability of Supply Chains




Introduction The most crucial aim of an effective supply chain management arm of an organisation is to ensure that the supply chain management system reduces the cost associated with supplies. For this research, sustainability is defined as a matter of concern for many businesses that influences their supply chain when it comes to the costs associated with jeopardy, wastes, and the surroundings within which the businesses operate.

The supply chain is there to offer a plausible bond between the business’ inputs and outputs. This argument means that products and services need to be availed just whenever they are required in a manner that will sustain the increasing number of products that need to be availed in the market.

Fundamentally, supply chain administration involves the supervision of the progress of goods and services, finances, and information from the point of production to bulk sellers and then to the end consumers. It also encompasses “coordinating and integrating these flows both within and among companies” (Ketchen


Frito-Lay Company: Cracker Jack Evaluation Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Executive Summary

Problem Statement and Statement of Alternatives

Analysis of Alternatives

Plan Development

Works Cited

Executive Summary The Cracker Jack has been experiencing low customer identification and satisfaction. The product has been facing competition from other fast food products like baked Tostitos, Pringles potato chips, and Fritos corn chips. Even though Frito-Lay frequently ranks among the leading national advertisers of products in the US, Cracker Jack has not received wide market attention as compared to some of the above products.

A study on the consumption rate and popularity among the US citizens revealed that the product was widely unavailable in the stores. Notably, over 15% of Cracker Jack purchasers said that the product was unavailable in their local shops; as a result, they easily purchased other products instead (Kerin and Peterson 244).

Among the non-purchasers, over 30% of the population has never seen the advertisement of the product on the local media. Cracker Jack consumption rate was at 7.1% among the US households. Interestingly, the 7.1% households who use the snack locally consume less than one pound of the product per annum.

Customers had withdrawn from purchasing the product citing several reasons including the high price of the product. The price was too expensive to some households who also viewed the product as a not at all “better for you” snack. Clearly, the product had a negative reception among a certain group of consumers.

The company can invest in production of several Cracker Jack with different flavors and low market prices. In this dimension, Frito-Lay will employ product differentiation strategy that will make the product unique in the market. This strategy coupled with cost cutting mechanisms will see the customers identify with the product.

An analysis of the Direct Product Contribution Income Statement of 1993-1996 reveals that the company spent low on technical research. For instance, between 1993 and 1996, the company channeled only $1.3 million towards technical research (Kerin and Peterson 241). The dynamic market requires a dynamic marketing approach that will be able to understand the customers’ tastes and preferences.

Evidently, the weak environmental scanning techniques led to the low customers’ satisfaction. Currently, customers tend to develop different tastes for a product in order to be loyal to their producers. If Frito-Lay can produce Cracker Jack of different tastes at affordable prices and distribute them to the local shops in the US, customers will develop loyalty to the snacks.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This occurs after the firm will have identified the nature of customers it is targeting with the products. Customer identification will assist the company to tailor the products towards satisfying the customers’ needs (“The Marketing Mix and 4 Ps” par. 4).

Problem Statement and Statement of Alternatives The Frito-Lay Company should be strategizing on how to use its limited resources on increasing Cracker Jack’s brand image in the present dynamic market in order to regain its lost share of the market. Markedly, in 1980, the company spent $6 million on advertisement; this initiative made the product enjoy huge market presence. However, after 1992, Frito-Lay has never conducted a national advertisement of the product.

The move led to decline in Cracker Jack dollar sales to 9% and unit volume decline to 11.2 million pounds in 1996. Therefore, the Cracker Jack brand needs a new sales and delivery strategy in order to grow in sales and profitability of the products.

In 1997, Cracker Jack Fat Free, Nutty Deluxe, and Butter Toffee exhibited below 50% level of customer awareness even though the Cracker Jack name enjoyed universal awareness (Kerin and Peterson 249). This discloses the problem Borden Foods was experiencing albeit trade promotions in the US.

Frito-Lay can counter this challenge using a robust inclusive strategy that competitors like International Home Foods, Inc. that produces the Crunch and Munch brand uses. Customers opted for other snacks like the Crunch and Munch and other seasonal brands, which were in almost all shopping outlets.

The Frito-Lay Company should apply some of the following alternatives to get hold of the market. First, the company should produce a good variety of flavors. Customers will have a variety of options to choose from in the event that their tastes and preferences for a given product go down.

Moreover, the company ought to design the product in a manner that it becomes a snack that people can share and eat at all time, but not at specific times like mornings and evenings.

We will write a custom Essay on Frito-Lay Company: Cracker Jack specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The other alternative is to use cost leadership approach that the PepsiCo Beverage Company applies; it involves lowering the prices of various quantities of Cracker Jack in order to gain competitive advantage over its competitors (“How do you think about your marketing strategy and strategic pricing?” par. 5). According to brand-tracking studies, Cracker Jack tends to elicit memories of childhood hence not contemporary.

This feature has made it experience low consumption among the grown-ups. The company can adopt the Crunch and Munch style of associating itself with all age groups, especially matching the products’ qualities to the needs of the contemporary society.

In addition to ensuring the product’s availability in major local shopping outlets, the company should conduct a health campaign to convince consumers who view the product as unhealthy to change their perceptions. These approaches will make the product appeal to customers.

Analysis of Alternatives If the company can identify the needs of its customers and meet them successfully, it will be assured of uninterrupted high sales and profitability. For example, the production of different flavors will increase the number of consumers since people have different preferences. The Coca Cola Company is one of the companies that practice this approach in satisfying the needs of its customers.

For example, it has produced several brands of the coca cola drink, coke zero, and coke diet. Moreover, the company can adopt recent technological developments in ensuring that the brands have different flavors. Another innovative idea by Coca Cola is the introduction of the Coca Cola Free Style machine that assists consumers to mix and produce their own beverage of different flavors.

Therefore, Frito-Lay can borrow such ideas so that it positions itself appropriately in the market. In the technological aspect, the company can adopt the act of online shopping where customers can view the brands of the company, make an order for their desired products, and pay for them instantly on the internet (“How do you think about your marketing strategy and strategic pricing?” par. 7).

This will partially solve the issue of product availability in local shopping outlets.

Price reduction mechanisms require large-scale productions and supplies of Cracker Jack so that the company still makes profit. This idea involves selling of a packaged product at a low price to a similar quantity of the competitors’ product. PepsiCo practices this strategy in order to compete with Coca Cola. For instance, its 350ml Mirinda has the same market price as the 300ml Fanta of the Coca-Cola Company.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Frito-Lay Company: Cracker Jack by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This strategy has assisted PepsiCo to remain relevant in the market that has a stiff competition from Coca-Cola. At the same time, Frito-Lay should not compromise on quality at the expense of price reduction as this may reduce its creativity in the market. Further, Frito-Lay can adopt product differentiation strategy.

Since there are several competitors that sell the ready-to-eat caramel popcorn category, this alternative will assist the firm to create differences on their products. This alternative involves producing unique products that are distinct from the competitors’ products. Customers will easily identify and differentiate the Frito-Lay brands of Cracker Jack from those of competitors.

The market performance of Cracker Jack has been wanting; therefore, Frito-Lay must change the perceptions of the customers towards the product. Frito-Lay’s great focus should be on the production techniques that Borden Foods has been using, as it has been the main producer of Cracker Jack brand.

Frito-Lay investment in advertisement can also enable it reclaim the dwindling market that Borden Foods was experiencing. From the case study, Crunch and Munch brand has been leading the category of ready-to-eat caramel popcorn snacks since 1993. Attempts by Frito-Lay Company to engage in mass advertisement of the product will cause positive impacts on its sales and profitability.

Products that enjoy wide market presence through advertisements tend to record high market share in terms of sales. For instance, in 1996, advertisement spending on Crunch and Munch was $4.44 billion while that of Cracker Jack was $188 million (Kerin and Peterson 232).

The recorded dollar sales during the same year were 32% and 19% for Crunch and Munch and Cracker Jack respectively. This shows that continuous advertisement of the brand will improve the sales.

Plan Development This plan is going to specify the marketing mix that Frito-Lay Company ought to use in order to regain the dwindled market confidence on Cracker Jack. Since marketing involves selling the right product, at the right price, to the right people or place and at the right time, Frito-Lay must adjust these parameters to record growth.

According to the simulation test of the market, there were dissatisfactions among purchasers and non-purchasers on the unavailability of Cracker Jack in their shopping outlets. In addition, some customers held that the product was not appealing while the other group said that the pricing was expensive.

A cost effective alternative that the company can use is the distribution of the product to shopping centers that are accessible to all customers. This alternative increases the market coverage. The company must identify the places where the potential customers do their shopping.

Even if this remains the main alternative, the other alternatives must also adhere to the market conditions. For instance, it will be wrong to stock extremely expensive Cracker Jack in all shopping centers that customers can access, yet they cannot afford them. The high price will be a distracter for marketing. Cracker Jack will experience high sales if it is included among other fast food products.

Since Borden Foods, which is the main competitor, uses supermarkets as delivery points, Frito-Lay should strive to differentiate the outlets by concentrating in areas like business parks, restaurants and big hotels. This is similar to product differentiation that involves doing things differently from the competitors’ way.

The physical outlets require a reliable and convenient distribution channels that will ensure continuity in supply thereby minimizing situations of product unavailability in the stores (“The Marketing Mix and 4 Ps” par. 2). Moreover, the company can adopt virtual locations like e-mails and e-market.

The uniqueness in the delivery system will attract and retain customers due to curiosity of testing the new channels. Frito-Lay ought to make a quick decision on marketing of the product before launching it in the market hence successfully positioning itself for the market offers.

Works Cited How do you think about your marketing strategy and strategic pricing?. Strategic Marketing Decisions. Strategic Marketing Decisions, n.d. Web.

Kerin, Roger A., and Robert A. Peterson. Strategic marketing problems: cases and comments. 11th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2007. Print.

The Marketing Mix and 4 Ps. Mind Tools – Management Training, Leadership Training and Career Training. Mind Tools Ltd, n.d. Web.


BHP Waste Managements. Environmental Justice Case Study best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

PNG Government Action

The World Bank’s Intervention

OTML’s Role

Intervention from Local Organizations



Introduction The case study on Ok Tedi Mining Limited (OTML) in Papua New Guinea (PNG) presents an investment that has caused both positive and negative impacts on the society in which it operates. When such industries set up in a place, there are always obvious effects that occur to the natural environment, the local members of the society, the government and the sponsors.

For example, members of the surrounding community will be displaced to create room for the construction of the plant. On the other hand, the same plant can offer jobs to the locals thus acting as a source of income.

Evidently, any establishment that has benefits to a given group of people must also experience some shortcomings from other sectors. In PNG, OTML has directly employed over 1500 citizens of PNG and remains the only cost competitive producer of copper in PNG (Perspective and Links: Ok Tedi Mining Limited 2008).

However, the plant has caused adverse effects on the environment such that there have been proposals to close the plant by mid-2013. This idea has elicited debates between two groups of people – the proponents and opponents.

Others believe that the plant has caused major positive changes on the lives of PNG citizens and the PNG government in general. Different organizations have come up with different effects that the company has caused on the local village, the natural environment, and the entire management of OTML.

This essay analyzes the responses that the government of PNG, OTML, and other interested bodies has taken towards the on going debate of whether to close the plant or not. In connection to the responses, the essay will vividly discuss the effects of the plant on the environment, indigenous people of the village, the government, and many others.

PNG Government Action OTML believes that the construction and operations of the firm has affected close to 155 communities in the western province of PNG. Therefore, it has rolled out a compensation and development package plan for the affected communities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The company has been striving to balance between continuous operation to offer broad economic and social benefits to all stakeholders, and the continuous impact of the mine’s on the system of Fly River. These benefits have put many organizations and the OTML management at crossroads on the effect of closure to the local communities who were employed in the company.

The government of PNG, for instance, had to submit a World Bank Report on the effects of OTML on the environment, local communities, and the economy in a broad-spectrum (Perspective and Links: Ok Tedi Mining Limited 2008). In the meantime, the government vowed to take charge of the firm to terminate the idea of managing OTML funds in Singapore.

The fund management in Singapore occurred since the company has its legal registration in Singapore. The government has taken numerous steps towards protecting the environment of the western part of the country.

For example, in 2002, the government and BHP facilitated the formation of the PNG Sustainable Development Project (PNGSDP) to control the future destructions to the environment in order to make the environment sustainable to the present and future generations.

On the other aspect, OTML has been earning the country a significant amount of revenue as it represents 32% of the total exports. The company has also been using over 50% of its profits to invest on the people of Ok Tedi, PNG and western province in particular.

The closure of this company will directly affect the country’s returns. PNG will have to look for alternative means of recovering the funds from the mining industry and even finding the alternative means of absorbing the 2000 people who the firm directly employed (Perspective and Links: Ok Tedi Mining Limited 2008).

The government of PNG should take drastic steps to restore the state of Ok Tedi River and the Birim River that have been affected heavily by the effluents from the industry. The wastes from the mines have formed thick grey sludge on the Fly River System.

We will write a custom Case Study on BHP Waste Managements. Environmental Justice specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Water contaminations have seen a massive decrease in the number of fish in the area. The navigation systems of the rivers have also been compromised; the mines that found their way into the river have raised the riverbed. Of major concern is the massive flooding that has washed away the forest covers, bananas, and taro plantations in the area.

The food crops are the main diet for the locals. It is on record that the government had earlier rejected the idea to complete building the dam that was to act as a reservoir for settling heavy metals. This negligence saw the rise in copper concentration in water above the World Health Organization (WHO) standards. The government has to launch an initiative that will involve the locals in planting trees in their residential places (Burton 2011).

This rehabilitation program should commence after the closure of the mining company. Even though it will take several years to clean the toxics in the environment, the government must ensure that the sustainability program continues under a stringent policy.

The case of OTML represents an example of environmental injustice on the locals. When the company was being built, the locals had to give up their lands to pave the way for the investment. This move led to the displacement of the local communities.

Notably, in PNG, all lands remain under the control of the central government; therefore, the ruling elites can displace the occupants at will. Later, the negative effects of the OTML had a direct impact on the same locals who had been displaced to other unproductive lands, yet the ruling elites became the major beneficiaries of the project (Burton 2011).

The government of PNG should also address the situation of inequality in sharing of resources. In this program, the local community should be given preference over other stakeholders. In addition, the government should devise an effective resettlement program; for instance, buying lands to resettle the displaced persons and even taking care of the changing market and replacement value.

Compensations should not be in terms of cash since low-income earners are unaccustomed to large influxes of cash. The government should also note that compensation only cannot re-establish the livelihoods of displaces as this have been witnessed in other resettlement programs like in Kiambere in Kenya, the Sardar Sarovar dam in India and Akosombo dam in Ghana (Wilmsen, Webber


Twelfth Century Renaissance: How Francis and his Franciscan Brothers both Reacted and Benefited from its Development Analytical Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Introduction Many areas of Western Europe, particularly Italy, Germany and England had greatly advanced in various areas by the beginning of 12th century AD. For instance, there were advances in social organization, technology, education and economic systems (Haskins 73). The need to acquire new knowledge and develop institutions of leaning was rapidly increasing, especially in religion, theology and nature.

Most people were eager to learn religion, natural science and law in a different way. In general, people were tired of traditions and wanted a change in social and cultural aspects. In addition, people were easily accepting and embracing new ideologies. For instance, Italian cities and city-states such as Florence and Rome were changing due to the presence of scholars in philosophy, law and religion (Haskins 88).

Any person who was willing to instil some change in the social system was in a position to influence large numbers of people. In fact, great leaders during the 12 century were supported by a public opinion. The desire for change motivated leaders to inspire their societies in a significant way (Benson, Constable and Lanham 53).

All these aspects and changes in leadership contributed to the 12th Century Renaissance. The emergence of great religious leaders at the time is perhaps one of the most important aspects of the renaissance (Moorman 28). However, the emergence of St Francis of Assisi was one of the main forces that opposed change in various regions.

Francis and his followers (Franciscan Brothers) created a religious movement that greatly supported the way in which the church handled social, religious and cultural issues. They were advocating for spiritual life. In addition, they advocated for the ‘role and duty of poverty’.

In turn, this stand appeared to support the doctrines of the Church. Arguably, Franciscans reacted negatively to the people’s quest for change in Catholic leadership. However, they later benefitted from the 12th century changes as they sought to free their movement from the church’s political and social influence.

Economic and Social Features of the “Twelfth-Century Renaissance” Changes in various aspects of Christianity had the greatest impact in the contribution towards social, cultural political forms. Barbara Tuchman, a historian argues that Christianity was a key pivot in medieval life “…because it governed all aspects of life such as birth, marriage, sex and death…” (Moorman 31).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The historian says that Christianity controlled the law, medicine, science, and politics (Benson, Constable and Lanham 64). In addition, Tuchman argues that being a member of the church was a compulsory for every person (Moorman 51).

Although the church was the dominant force that supported political and religious leaders, there were several efforts to change this system in the 12th century. For instance, the people were eager to see a church that was meant to care for them.

Thus, church leaders such as St. Bernard of Clairvaux became important figures of change during the 12th century because they were entirely dependent on public desire to change (Moorman 114). One of the areas that people wanted change was personal devotion to a common person, which had been a common aspect of the Catholic Church.

Apart from forced membership, the church also required the followers to regard the popes, monks and clerics as religious and righteous figures (Benson, Constable and Lanham 171). In fact, it appeared that these church leaders were “gods” in some way, which gave them political, social and cultural powers to control the society.

Similarly, political aspects of life were under the control of the church. Any person with ideas on how to liberate the society from the church’s monopolistic control received an overwhelming support from the public. For instance, King Henry II of England obtained massive support and political strength because he was willing to do what the people wanted (Haskins 133).

Apart from the religion, the concept of justice was in dire need for change. According Haskins (143), the Church controlled the concept of justice system because every aspect of the law was based on divine law. The world politics revolved around the church, which in turn controlled justice system.

The public was willing to change these aspects. It was during the 12th century Renaissance that the people of Western Europe, especially Italy, made great efforts in an attempt to free the judicial system from the divine law. For instance, Roman law was increasingly studied and revived. Gratian, a monk, became an important figure of change after he gave a summary of the laws of the church in his “Decretium Graiani”.

We will write a custom Essay on Twelfth Century Renaissance: How Francis and his Franciscan Brothers both Reacted and Benefited from its Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Finally, the desire for knowledge was on the increase during the 12th century. Thousands of people from across the social classes sought to know more in science, religion and law. They wanted to learn these aspects free from the influence and control of the church. For instance, 12th century scholars joined Latin classes, attempted to analyze the Roman law and the Catholic doctrine.

In addition, scholars attempted to learn and analyze Muslim faith and laws, Greek laws and other texts in order to compare them with Catholic laws. For example, Peter Abelard made significant influence in education and law because he developed ideologies that attracted people.

How did the Franciscans react and benefit from the changes in the 12th century? Although the Franciscan brothers and their movement did not support the changes in the 12th century, they later benefitted from it in a manner that allowed them to spread their new ideologies, interact with the people and obtain support from both the public and the clerics (Senocak 192).

At first, Francis of Assisi himself reacted negatively to the changes the people wanted to see in the church, its leadership and control of social and political aspects (Sharp 126). For instance, with his group of about 11 followers, Francis travelled widely in Western Europe, where he preached the need to maintain the church traditions against the people’s desire for change.

For example, Francis preached in support of poverty among the Christians because he believed that Christians should devote their life (Senocak 136). He had a collection of scriptural passages from the bible and the church emphasizing on the duty of poverty. However, the Franciscan brothers did not provide a solution to problem created by superiority of clerics at the expense of the poor (Sharp 102).

Due to the ideologies that supported the church, the clerics, the pope and the monks to an extent that they were given food, housing facilities and other things (Sharp 96) supported the Franciscan brothers. For instance, Pope Innocent III considered the “Three Orders” developed by the Franciscans as a good tool for spreading his influence in order to deal with the 12th century religious renaissance (Senocak 224).

The pope thought that by supporting the Franciscans, he would persuade the people to maintain a status quo rather than calling for changes. In fact, the church considered the 12th century changes as a form of heresy.

Despite their support of the church and the status quo, the Franciscans later benefitted from the changes brought by the 12th century renaissance. For instance, the control of “the Order” became a problem to the Franciscans. At first, the Franciscans had received support from the church, which gave them certain political and religious powers in certain areas such as France and Germany (Senocak 216).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Twelfth Century Renaissance: How Francis and his Franciscan Brothers both Reacted and Benefited from its Development by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, several followers disagreed on the role and duty of poverty. There were disagreements on how Franciscans should live and lead the church. In addition, Elias, one of the most powerful Franciscan leaders, assumed the powers to govern a centralised government in Assisi. He sought to re-interpret the role of poverty (Sharp 56). He built several houses for the members.

He was in constant disagreement with the Pope and Italian President Gregory IX. Eias was deposed and replaced by Alberta of Pisa (Sharp 29). Due to the influence of the Pope and the government in Franciscan leadership, it was clear that the Franciscans needed to advocate for change in church leadership in order to maintain their influence (Sharp 34).

Members increasingly saw the need to change the church and reduce its control on the politics and their movement. Since the 12th century Renaissance had succeeded in reducing the influence of the church on social, political and economic aspects of the society, the Franciscans benefitted from these changes in their efforts to reduce the influence of the Pope and the church in their movement.

Works Cited Benson, Robert, Giles Constable, and Carol Lanham. Renaissance and Renewal in the Twelfth Century. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 2006. Print

Haskins, Charles. The Renaissance of the Twelfth Century. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2007. Print.

Moorman, Humpidge. A History of the Franciscan Order: From Its Origins to the Year 1517. London: Franciscan Institute Publications, 2008. Print

Senocak, Neslihan. The Poor and the Perfect: The Rise of Learning in the Franciscan Order, 1209–1310. Cornell: Cornell University Press, 2012. Print

Sharp, David. Franciscan Philosophy at Oxford in the Thirteenth Century. London: Oxford University Press, 2003. Print


Critically assess the extent to which HPWP relies on the intensification of work Essay writing essay help

Introduction The high performance work practices abbreviated as HPWP denotes an all-purpose managerial representation encompassing several aspects. However, the description of High Performance Work Practices meadow proves to engage some involvedness. HPWP has conquered the modernization of human resource management.

In fact, studies conducted in the past fifteen years relating to the nature of high performance work practices and their implications on organizational performance have investigated various aspects of human resource (Bacon


Questions For Secondary Source Analysis #1 (Please Choose Only One Article from those listed below, all are in the course Essay essay help

Questions For Secondary Source Analysis #1 (Please Choose Only One Article from those listed below, all are in the course pack) Kathleen Brown’s The Anxious World of the Slaveowning Patriarch (Section 1, p.37) Philip Morgan’s The Effects of Paternalism Among Whites and Blacks (Section 2, p. 73) Sylvia Frey’s The Impact of African American Resistance During the War (Section 3, p. 91) Edmund Morgan’s Slavery and Freedom: The American Paradox (Section 4, p. 116) Based on your reading of one of the four above articles (all are in the course pack), answer the following questions in detail, save as a .doc or .pdf, and place submit by the due date. ANALYZING A SECONDARY SOURCE 1. Who is this author and what are his/her credentials? (you may have to do a little research here) 2. Who are the key people in this article? 3. What are the key events? 4. What are the key subjects? 5. Is this article based on primary sources or other secondary sources? 6. Name one primary source the historian uses. 7. What is the main argument or thesis? 8. How does the writer build her/his argument? 9. How would you critique or question this argument?


Game Theory Term Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Cooperative game theory

Non -cooperative game theory

Normal Form Game

Extensive Form Game

Nash Equilibrium

Works Cited

Introduction Game theory incorporates a recognized study of disagreements and partnerships. Game theory has diverse concepts that are applicable to the activities of numerous means, which are interdependent. The negotiators might encompass of individuals, groups, governments, or an amalgamation of these. The game theory procedure offers a language to develop, assemble, analyze, and comprehend strategic situations (Myerson 5).

Game theory takes place from the daily activities that people undertake such as problem mapping. The activity of matching problems such as whether a student should sublet his or her room on campus for other benefits connotes generates a conflict. The theory emanates from the notion that decision-making entails conflicts and cooperation (Myerson 5). The game forms the subject of study in the theory.

Cooperative game theory Cooperative game theory incorporates a high-level reference that identifies only the gains each group or alliance obtains when its adherents work in solidarity. However, the game does not describe the procedure employed to create the alliance. For example, the voting systems in politics sometimes require coalition development (Myerson 217).

The voting takes place without an explanation on the negotiations conducted behind the scenes. Cooperative game theory explores the coalition creation deals based on the level of power held by different partners. Furthermore, cooperative theory elucidates sharing of gains generated from such deals.

Nash suggested a method to share gains realized from coalition making processes (Myerson 96). He suggested a bargaining strategy founded on the strengths of the individual parties making the coalition.

Non -cooperative game theory Non – cooperative game theory deals with the categorization of strategic choices. The theory operates on the precincts that details of the arrangements and the timing of the release of choices plays a role in determining the ending. Nash suggested that an ideal bargaining strategy would indicate a particular procedure that predetermines how and when the actors in the game can make their offers (Myerson 92).

Normal Form Game The normal form signifies a simple type of game that employs a strategic method. The approach requires actors to provide their tactics and the possible effects that can emerge singly or through incorporation of diverse sets. The distinct payoff every actor gets connotes the results (Myerson 189). The payoff signifies a number. The term utility connotes the number. Utility helps in defining how much the participant prefers the result.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Extensive Form Game The extensive form has more details than the normal form does. The extensive form is a comprehensive explanation of how actors can play the game in an extended period (Tadelis 129). The game has guidelines that entail the criteria players follow as they engage in the process. The rule also characterizes the extent of information actors can hold as they participate in the process.

Furthermore, the rule stipulates the times when uncertainties associated with the game are determined (Tadelis 129). Applicable direct approaches help in the scrutiny of competitions in extensive forms. Transformation of negotiations in extensive forms into corresponding premeditated forms also facilitates the scrutiny.

Nash Equilibrium The concept has a more general approach. The equilibrium makes recommendations on appropriate strategies to different players. The payers do not have the powers to change the strategies on their own (Tadelis 145). It is notable that antagonist adheres with the provided recommendations.

The rationality approach applies in this theory. The equilibrium also emerges through the expectations that all players are rational (Tadelis 145). Therefore, Nash equilibrium suggests that every player can expect their competitors to adhere to the recommendations.

Works Cited Myerson, Roger B. Game Theory: Analysis of Conflict. Cambridge, Mass: Harvard University Press, 2013. Print.

Tadelis, Steven. Game Theory: An Introduction. Oxford: Princeton University Press, 2013. Print.


Athens Put Socrates and Philosophy on Trial Essay best college essay help

Introduction Philosophy is an ancient field of study that entails systematic study of knowledge, nature, existence, reality, mind, and reason through logical and rational arguments. Philosophers use logical and rational arguments when explaining their perception of life and their existence. For centuries, humans have been accumulating knowledge about their existence in a bid to understand the nature of life.

In Athens, Socrates was the most prominent philosopher who examined the lives of Athenians and found that they were groping in the darkness of ignorance since they did not understand their existence. Thus, Socrates argued that ‘unexamined life is not worth living’ after observing the how the Athenians lived.

As he tried to enlighten the people, Athenians leaders observed that Socrates was spoiling the minds of the youths, and thus guilty of using his philosophies inappropriately. Hence, this essay argues that Athenian leaders put Socrates and his philosophy on trial, for they did not like to examine and assess their lives using philosophy.

Unexamined Life Socrates was an Athenian philosopher who made a significant contribution to the development of the Western philosophy. Although Socrates was one of the wisest men in Athens, he considered himself as ignorant. He argued that gaining wisdom only begins when one understands own ignorance as it forms the basis of knowledge.

During his life, Socrates observed that Athenians lived miserable lives since they could not understand the essence of life. Thus, Socrates decided to examine the lives of the Athenians and teach the youths on how to attain better lives as he envisioned.

According to Socrates, ‘unexamined life is not worth living’ because people are groping in the dark, and thus unable to attain real meaning of life or live worthy lives. Therefore, Socrates talked to Athenians while examining their lives and teaching youths on how to gain wisdom and live worthy lives.

Socrates used the Allegory of the Cave to describe how Athenians are groping in the darkness without hope of attaining real meaning of life. In the allegory, Socrates argues that Athenians are seeing illusions in life and taking them as reality, just as prisoners in the cave assumed that shadows are real people walking across the wall.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The prisoners in the cave have accustomed to the shadows until they could not differentiate reality and illusions. In this view, Socrates asserts that philosophers like him are among people who have come out of the cave and are able to differentiate reality and illusions. Hence, the work of Socrates was to enlighten the Athenians so that they can transform their understanding of life from cave illusions to the reality in the world.

Although Socrates tried to enlighten the youths, Athenian leaders had a different perception. The Athenian leaders perceived that Socrates was spoiling the minds of the youths with philosophical doctrines that are against laws and regulations of the Athenian empire. In essence, what Socrates did was to examine the lives of the Athenians in a bid to enhance their understanding of life and resolution of issues affecting their lives.

Despite Socrates’ important role in enlightening the youth, the Athenian leaders charged Socrates and dismissed his philosophy as destructive. In response, Socrates protested that the jury did set the penalty very high that he could not afford to pay, and thus putting him and his philosophy on trial. Despite his plea and protest, the jury still sentenced Socrates to death.

In the course of examining the lives of the Athenians, Socrates also questioned the existence of the piety. Socrates analyzed Euthyphro concept and asserted that the gods love pious things and hate impious things. In his argument about piety, Socrates came up with the Euthyphro dilemma since he wondered whether the gods loves pious things or the gods make things pious by loving them.

Socrates believed that things are pious on their own and independent of the gods. Hence, piety is an inherent attribute of things and not gods. The Euthyphro dilemma attracted massive criticisms from Athenians because it touched on a sensitive matter about the Athenian gods and their deity roles.

If god cannot make anything pious, it means they have no ability to transform the lives of people from impiety to piety. Such dilemma made the Athenians charge Socrates for introducing new doctrines that are against their gods. Hence, Athenians accused Socrates of introducing foreign gods while relegating Athenian gods.

Conclusion Socrates was a noble philosopher who examined the lives of the Athenians and realized that they were ignorant about life. According his assessment, Socrates argued that ‘unexamined life is not worth living’ because people grope while searching for the real meaning of life.

We will write a custom Essay on Athens Put Socrates and Philosophy on Trial specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Despite the fact that Socrates examined the lives of youths and taught them, Athenian leaders accused him of corrupting their minds while introducing foreign gods. Eventually, the jury sentenced Socrates to death for alleged destructive teachings and impious philosophy. Thus, the Athenians put Socrates and his philosophy on trial when they sentenced him to death and rejected his philosophy as destructive.


European Airline Analysis Analytical Essay college essay help: college essay help

Introduction Airline industry in Europe has been in operation for a long period, and its market has continued to increase over time due to air traffic demand. The industry expanded to include destinations in most parts of Europe. The industry has various airline subsidiaries, and operates with other subsidiaries not from the airline business.

It has operations in the insurance business, airline catering business, and maintenance of aircrafts among other business operations. The industry is owned by the government and private investors, which is inclusive of Deutsche Bank and Deutsche Post bank. It also partners with other airlines in other countries such as JetBlue in the U.S., Air India, Air Malta and Luxair among other partners in this business. It also operates a range of aircrafts including Boeing 707, 720 and Airbus A300 among others.

This industry provides airline services within Europe to all class members, which are first class, business class and economy class with proper airbuses used for all these groups of people (Lufthansa, 2013). The trend has changed in the recent past due to insecurity which is caused by terrorist attacks in most cases.

Market structure The airline industry has ultimate control over air transportation hindering other players to join the industry. It comprises of all passengers who use air transportation either scheduled or chartered, but does not include air freight transport. The International flights have the largest market share in the industry that accounts for 68.9% of the total volume.

Germany accounts for 14% while UK has 12%. People from Canada and the United States are considered as trans-border passengers, and they are treated as international passengers. The revenue derived from European airline is classified either from the Western Europe or the Eastern Europe.

The industry stabilizes its market share on the medium and short hauls routes, which coupled with their excellent products, have made it possible to meet their customers’ demands. Included in the vision is also group and leading edge technology, which enables the companies in the industry to improve their opportunities in the competitive market.

The firms in the industry are able to communicate their intentions to stakeholders and the customers. All the policies and procedures that govern air transportation are formulated and implemented by bodies set by the industry hence they have oligopoly influence.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Supply and demand condition There has been a decline in the airline market. The cost of airline continues to increase following insecurity thus the demand for the services goes on the decline due to the impact of price on demand. The issue of insecurity following frequent attacks from the terrorists has also been in the front line in reducing airline services demand.

Different European regions deal with air security in different ways. For example, in the U.S., the homeland security continues to request high budget for the purpose of dealing with aviation security issues. France, Italy, Germany, Spain, and the UK are among the busiest states in Europe, but they are also faced by the challenge of insecurity, thus reduction in demand.

Technology The continent has put a great effort in increasing technology, which is not only involved in flight operation, but also checking explosive machines that can be dangerous to airports and the passengers. The planes are advanced, having sensors and alarming signs that can be interpreted by security personnel in case of any explosives detected. There are plans to institute highly advanced technology.

For example, in 2011, body scanning machines were installed in many aviation checkpoints. The first is the use of hardened cockpit while the other is the use of federal air Marshall. Others include intelligence, task force against terrorism, crew vetting, travel document checker, customs protection, border protection, checked baggage and canines, bomb appraisal officers, random employee screening among others.

There are three main advanced methods of improving security. These are federal air Marshall, hardened doors at the cockpit and passenger resistance. Federal air Marshal is not very important in the first section because this outweighs the benefits. However, hardened doors have more benefits over the costs while other measures like vigilant intelligence, passport control and airport screening are likely to increase security.

Government regulation The government incurs some fees on behalf of individuals. In addition, the homeland security department still investigates how airlines are in compliance with efficiency and fiscal discipline. However, this does not mean that they are exemplified from paying security fees. A look at how security fees might be expensive in America is explained by the constant activities that take place for security purposes.

For example, when an aircraft loses its radio control while on air, security jets must be flown to escort the airline to its destination. This is very costly since jet fuel is expensive for the period the airbus remains in the air. In addition, incidences of unruly passengers also add to the coat of aviation security.

We will write a custom Essay on European Airline Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Aviation officers have agreed that customers are the ones that pay for these extra security requirements to ensure that they act responsibly while in the airport and avoid issues that can cause alarm being mistaken for a terrorist attack. It is the duty of the governing body or the government to distribute the funds rose for risk reduction purposes in an equitable and consistent manner with the main goal of achieving the best outcome.

There is no common law that has been founded to deal with costs related to the security breach. In some European regions, there are new laws on aviation security that are in the process of development. This implies that it is very likely that the costs of security in aviation and hence the costs of air fare might increase with time. This means that travel will be more expensive for the consumers.

For example, reports on air tickets from Brussels International Airport and other airports in the Belgium and outside the country show that air tickets have risen because of the doubling of security charges since 2001. Studies show that the air charges have risen about 7 times in the past five years in this airport. A proposal had been raised by the European commission in September 2005 that was meant to regulate aviation security.

However, the debate is under the European parliament’s Transport Committee. The main aim of this proposal is to clarify and simplify European rules on air security (Lufthansa, 2010). However, there is no current solution to the current problem facing the funding of air security.

Future condition The management has been developing some plans that would result in improvement of the industry in the future. There are plans to improve airport security, which is the greatest threat to the industry. This team is working together with the government to ensure that right measures are put in place to reduce terrorism and other threats that are posing a danger to the passengers and airline employees.

They have a budget for advanced technology that is essential in running and carrying out security operations. This management team is planning to work together with the government to ensure that the interests of the industry are catered for without exploiting the passengers.

It is expected that the industry profitability is going to be restored due to the following improvements in technological, managerial, government policies that can encourage more customers to use airlines without feeling that they are being exploited or are spending extra money when they use airlines.

Macroeconomic factors European airline industry contributes to several macroeconomic factors, which include employment, gross domestic product, producer price index, and interest rates. The high and escalating prices on fuel, the shortage that was caused by Hurricane Katrina, and terrorist bombing had a great impact on macro and micro economics resulting in a ripple effect that was felt for quite some time.

Not sure if you can write a paper on European Airline Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Increase in the airline services reduces the disposable income for the passengers using these services thus having an impact on Gross Domestic Product. The increased prices result in reduced demand because of the law of demand and supply. This affects producer price index. Low demand can cause some employing to be redundant hence unemployment is created.

Organizing and investing resources Cost leader

Global competition results from the availability of similar companies in the market that offers similar products. Companies try to market their products and services to secure a better market share to increase profitability. The management has to ensure that they formulate the best policies that will facilitate production of quality products that are competitive in the market at reasonable production cost.

This is achieved by managing all the resources, acquiring raw materials from reliable supplies, ensuring employees’ satisfaction, and setting rules and regulations that can help the company to achieve the set goals. The management’s decision plays a key role in ensuring that the running of the company maintains the set standards and the available resources are maximally utilized.

The company has set rules and regulations that govern it. These regulations ensure that the relationship between the employees and customers are observed and maintained. Severe disciplinary action is taken to any employee who breaks these rules. When these rules are implemented, an organization gains competitive advantage.

A cost leadership strategy is essential in investing and utilizing resources. Cost management plan is based on advertising where price acts as the main marketing instrument. The cost leader must ensure that the company offers its services at the lowest cost than any other player in the industry. Cost manager must ensure costs are reduced in marketing and non-marketing functions.

Cost management is applied where a business has a wide market share enabling it to reduce costs due to employment of economies of scale. Cost leader must be aggressive in constructing efficient scale facilities, tight cost and overhead control, apply cost reduction techniques acquired through experience and minimize general cost incurred in marketing.

Product differentiation

Differential strategies are measures taken to ensure that the products and services are unique and can be easily differentiated from those of competitors. Differential strategy involves having products in a peculiar form, brand name, technology, and other details that help customers to identify the product. The aim of differential strategy is to create customer franchise as a result of brand royalty.

The differentiator can increase margin and avoid competing at low cost section of the market (Flamholtz


Greening of Hotels. Concept Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Introduction Greening is a calculated effort by hoteliers to engage in environmentally friendly and energy saving actions. Going green is a global phenomenon. Many organizations are making sustained efforts towards this. In the hotel industry, stakeholders are engaged in a mental and attitude paradigm shift to engage the goodwill of its customers in helping it go green.

Some of the efforts include reusing some of the hotel products such as linens, minimal lighting in hotel rooms, minimal usage of water, reduction of food wastages through ordering ‘just enough’, among others.

All these have a cost reducing effect and enable the hoteliers to participate in the noble practice to save the planet. This paper will discuss the concept of Greening Hotels, its effect on the various stakeholders including the customers, the significance of this concept, what the future holds for the development and growth of this noble concept in other industries and within this industry (Buildings, 2012).

Origin of Greening of Hotels Environmentalists coined the term Global Warming over two decades ago. In that time and beyond, there has been in-depth research dedicated towards establishing the effect of global warming on the planet. Global warming according to experts will continuously and gradually erode the ‘naturalness’ in the world and bring with it catastrophic consequences (Top Canadian, 2012).

About two decades ago, a nonprofit organization was established in the United States to foster a self-regulation in terms of consumption of resources in the hotel industry particularly (Top Canadian, 2012). These resources did not necessarily have the direct effect of reducing costs.

However, the self-regulation by all stakeholders involved would go a long way in reducing wastages and hence curtailing a growing trend in the depletion of the scarce naturally found resources (Buildings, 2012).

Green Hotels Association’s aim was to bring together major hoteliers in the world in a common agenda. The association established some of the most contentious facets of day-today hotel operations that touched on resource probity. Green Hotels Association came up with a Catalog of Environmental Products for the Lodging Industry that enumerated some of the best ways to have a sustainable way of using resources.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This association was the pioneer institution to instill environmental sense in the hotel industry (Top Canadian, 2012). Others that came later formed their basis of operation on the foundation of Green Hotels Association. They include the Four Seasons’ 10 Million Trees Initiative, Hotel Carbon Measurement Initiative among others (Top Canadian, 2012).

Most of these initiatives are organized and managed by members. The members environmental good will ambassadors who also find it important to jump into the bandwagon of environmental conservation (Singer, 2012).

Examples of Practices of Greening Greening of Hotels is an all round initiative whose noble aim is to ensure that the naturally found resources are preserved and conserved for future usage. Although greening may appear as a fashion charade by hoteliers and others, it is an effort towards saving the planet and the players need to take it seriously. The following are some of the ways in which greening is been applied to the hotel industry (Singer, 2012).


The hotels have made a sustained effort to urge its guests to embrace the concept of reusing some of the materials in the hotel. These include linens, towels, and sheets. This way the cost involved in replacing these materials is reduced radically. Although this is not forced, the hoteliers have developed a way in which they let the customers inform them if they are okay non-replacements on particular days.

The performance of the hotel industry is very difficult to measure and define because it is a fragmented and dynamic economic sector in the world. Travel, change of place, and voyages help to instill vigor to people’s minds and thus enable them to be more effective, reliable, healthy, and economically productive. Besides bringing delight to people, tourism activities generate revenue to major stakeholders in the industry.

Most of the exotic tourist centers charge fees for visits, accommodation, food, refreshments, and recreational activities undertaken by tourists. As a noble occupation and an industry of private and public interests, revenue generated from tourism continues to be a key contributor to economic development of most global economies.

Domestic and international tourism boost economic efficiency, socio-cultural equity, environmental conservation, and development. In addition, it leads to creation of national and international reputation, environmental conservation, safety, and equity in society, and encourage economic development of complementary industries such as recreation and hospitality (Buildings, 2012).

We will write a custom Essay on Greening of Hotels. Concept specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Saving

In this area, unnecessary costs may also be meted. In an effort to ensure that they have value for money, customers engage in frantic spending. This spills down the path of misuse and may be deemed unnecessary at times. Hoteliers having realized this and in an effort to salvage the environment and cut costs have continuously instilled upon the clients to practice probity.

This includes using the necessary amounts of water and ensuring all water taps are closed. The other area is ensuring that customers do not waste food by ordering the correct amounts (Top Canadian, 2012). Saving also extends to electricity usage.

In this area, hoteliers have made efforts to install energy saving bulbs. In the same breadth, hoteliers have instructed their visitors to turn off unnecessary lighting while visiting their premises. This culture has gone a long way to ensure that energy is saved (Top Canadian, 2012).

Shift towards Green Products

The hotel industry is quickly shifting towards perceivably or factually green products. For instance, hotels are shifting towards using cleaning detergents with non-toxic ingredients and thus environmentally friendly. The water and laundry machines are been replaced with models that save detergents and water at the same time.

Third, the hoteliers are affecting the psychology of visitors by providing them with walking maps and bicycle riding route maps. This way, visitors feel the urge to walk and do not consume fuel and the potential of releasing hazardous fumes to the environment is hugely curtailed (Pittaway, Carmouche


The biggest estate on earth: How aborigines made Australia Report college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction




Introduction The book, The biggest estate on earth: How aborigines made Australia, discuses the effects of white settlement in the Australian continent. It discusses the history of the Aboriginal Australians and the way they lived before colonization. The Aboriginal Australians of the late 1700s were hunters who relied on hunting and gathering for sustain their living.

They also practiced farming and used fire, while hunting for wild animals. Fire attracted the animals making it easy for people to hunt the prey down. Gammage (2012) argues that the first Australians to practice farming did so by developing a system which ensured there was adequate water and food throughout the year.

In his article “The First Farmers” published in Brisbane Times, Tony Stephens agrees with Gammage’s view on the history of the Indigenous Australians. In his review, Stephens illustrates what Gammage wrote about the European invasion and how it changed Australia. The Europeans came and took over the land of the Aboriginal people and even adopted their methods of farming.

Review According to Tony Stephens who reviewed the book by Gammage, the author’s aim was to inform the readers about the lifestyles of the Aboriginal Australians before the white settlers arrived. He focused on showing how wise and organised they were. They were even able to use fire to hunt animals, and this proves that they were able people (Gammage, 2012).

The activities practiced in the pre-colonial Australia show the vast knowledge that the Aboriginal Australians had. They designed and created land systems which ensured that there was enough supply of food and water. Gammage recognised the scale of the work they had done for land management as well as their skills and knowledge which they has applied to achieve their goals.

Aboriginal Australians’ land management practice enabled the European settlers to start farming in the continent. This shows that the Indigenous Australians were skilful and powerful enough to be able to influence the Europeans who considered the local population to be uncivilised.

Stephens acknowledges Gammage’s aims and his achievements. The Aborigines were knowledgeable enough to use fire for their benefit and prevent the happenings of fire which may kill a lot of animals and destroy everything on its way. They also grew foods, such as yams, millet and different fruits.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Gammage tried to bring up the fact that the colonialists structures tampered with land management of the Aboriginal Australians who were more knowledgeable than they were perceived to be. They valued their environment and took care of everything that was in it. Stephens (2011, p.3) particularly cites Gammage saying, ”The more carefully they (Aboriginal people) made the land, the more likely settlers were to take it”.

The Europeans justified their right to colonise the Indigenous Australians because they thought European civilisation was more progressive and developed than the Aboriginal Australians were, and thus Europeans felt their superiority.

The aborigines even knew the kind of environment needed for every animal. For instance, they knew that bees lived in dessert black wood and kangaroos preferred short grass (Stephens, 2011, p.2). This knowledge helped them in hunting animals which they used as food and for other purposes. They also knew the areas where plants thrive well. This knowledge enabled them to have sufficient food throughout the year.

The book provides valuable pieces of information about the Aborigines and their way of life. According to Blanley, “aborigines made Australia what it is by their extensive knowledge of fire and ecology” (2011, p.11). The Aborigines knew their environment quite well and knew how important it was to take care of.

Fire was used to hunt animals. They created patterns that attracted animals such as gazelles, making it easy for them to catch the prey. It was also used as a hiding place for hunters. The Aborigines ensured supply of food through their farming systems (Whitehouse, 2012, p.213).

Gammage considered various works from different perspectives for his book. He used writings of historians such as James Cook and Abel Tasman. These historians had widely written on the history of the Aborigines and therefore provided a rich source of information. He also examined works of art and drawings such as those by Lycett that show what Australia was before being invaded by the Europeans.

In his book, Gammege extensively considered ecological information which was left by the aborigines which was also important in his work (Blanley, 2011, p.15). Gammage was a renowned historian who had credible knowledge and information about the Aborigines and their ways of pre-colonial live.

We will write a custom Report on The biggest estate on earth: How aborigines made Australia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Gammage’s book gives the reader a different opinion on the relationship between Aborigines and land. He makes it clear that the Aborigines were knowledgeable people. The book indicates that their knowledge was more developed, but unfortunately, it was not recognised by the Europeans. The Europeans viewed the Aborigines as people who were only meant to hunt and gather.

Gammage shows how Europeans affected the Australian’s development and how their activities affected land and animals. It is important to note that the Aborigines practiced kinds of farming which enabled them to have food and water throughout the year (Whitehouse, 2012).

Conclusion The Australian Aborigines were very intelligent and knowledgeable about their environment. Before the invasions of the European settlers, they hunted wild animals using fire. They also had their farms, grew crops such as yams and millet and reared animals. The Europeans claimed that the Aborigines were disorganised and did not know land management.

Gammage, after an intensive research, presents to the reader that the Aborigines were very knowledgeable. He even intrigues that the direction the smoke followed in Lycett’s painting indicated that the Aborigines were careful to make sure that fire did not follow the direction of the forest.

It is important to note therefore that the coming of the Europeans did not contribute much to the Aborigines kind of lives as they had already adapted to theirs.

Europeans thought that Aborigines did not know anything and defined civilization as living the way they lived. The Aborigines strived to make their country better than it was. They did not need the Europeans to improve their country because they were able to do it with their knowledge and expertise.

References Blanley, G 2011, Masters of the Blaze. Web.

Gammage, B 2012, The Biggest Estate on Earth: How Aborigines Made Australia. Allen


Policy Analysis Report on Improvement in the coordination of services in the health sector Analytical Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Introduction Healthcare services are essential services that require proper coordination and improved systems of operation that are set under innovative ideals. This is because the services are instrumental in enhancing individuals’ wellness and physical stability that promotes their productivity levels.

The services also ensure the development of healthy societies through effective mitigation of severe diseases that majorly affect individuals’ health status. Indeed, there is increased need to improve the quality of healthcare services in most settings by adopting innovative and proper coordination of activities.

This is essential in curbing the spread of various diseases such as malaria, cancer, tuberculosis and asthma. This can be achieved through effective administration of preventive and curative interventions to patients that have not been undertaken effectively due to poor coordination of activities.

Therefore, this report is relevant since it adopts improvement in the coordination of healthcare services in Australia as a conventional and innovative technique of advancing quality of Medicare to patients. The innovation is regarded as the lifeblood of economic and social integration in most nations, including Australia. This is evident since it defines the level of productivity that a nation can record over certain time.

Relevance and what instigates the development of the innovation

Clearly, inferior healthcare programs and poor coordination of activities have been impeding service delivery in the health sector. This has led to high rate of death due to ineffective response to patient issues and poor coordination of their treatment.

This is evident since most hospitals operate under inferior operating plans, deployment of resources and coordination of various activities that include drug procurement and systematic provision of therapeutic assistance to patients. The noted gaps that threaten to compromise the quality of medical services in health institutions have prompted the need for the adoption of an innovative system of operation.

Notably, the innovative technology that proves promising in steering service delivery in the health sector as identified by professionals’ remains the improvement in the coordination of activities (Allison 1997: 133).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, authorities and health officials are under obligation to improve coordination of activities in hospitals as an innovative technique to provide quality medical solutions to counter health issues in various nations. Due to this, this report’s main aim is to equip key stakeholders in the health sector with pertinent information pertaining to the significance of effective coordination of activities in hospitals (Allison 1997: 134).

Recent innovation in the health sector

Effective coordination of activities and support systems is central in any institution that aspires to record good performance. Coordination is a performance tool that ensures proper alignment of activities with the aim of meeting clients’ expectations. In hospitals, coordination is regarded as the lifeblood that sustains operations and delivery of quality medical assistance to patients’ in real-time (Paul and Robert 2007: 2).

Without coordination that entails sharing of information, formulation of policies and deployment of medical staff, patients cannot receive the best assistance. Therefore, the recent innovation that aims at improving coordination of activities in the health sector is essentially pertinent. It is bound to facilitate proper eradication or mitigation of various complications that have been ailing service delivery in the health sector.

The innovative concept focuses on laying down proper mechanisms of service delivery that are unique and conventional in nature. In particular, it seeks to enhance communication between departments, staff members and patients by creating an effective organizational structure. The structure will help in ensuring that there is a proper understanding between stakeholders.

It will create an effective channel through which information is to flow (Paul and Robert 2007: 5). This is vital since quality healthcare is dependent on the information that is conveyed by patients and medical officials pertaining to what one is ailing from and treatment procedures, respectively. Effective coordination of activities will also facilitate proper allocation of resources and management of cash flows.

It will also facilitate the development of proper procurement procedures of medical equipment. This is vital since procuring various medical equipments requires stakeholder input to aid acquisition of right equipments (Karima 2013: 168). Indeed, improving coordination of services in the health sector is a viable innovation that holds the capacity to enhance quality inpatient management.

This is evident since it provides a flexible framework of operation that relies on methodological approaches in delivering outstanding medical interventions. It is also meant to improve health outcomes apart from promoting the execution of effective intervention measures (Edward 2006: 95).

We will write a custom Essay on Policy Analysis Report on Improvement in the coordination of services in the health sector specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Innovative healthcare initiatives undertaken in Australia and the role of authorities

As noted, authorities in Australia have laid down viable strategies for enhancing quality service delivery in the health sector. The modalities that are being adopted, such as the improvement of coordination of services are set with a mission to build a healthy nation to steer development goals.

This is significant since no nation can achieve its objectives, including the millennium goals if its citizens are ailing (Edward 2006: 95). For that reason, authorities and health officials in Australia noted with great concern that the first step in achieving both economic and social goals is to improve healthcare systems.

They emphasize the need to adopt new systems of operations, purchasing of modern medical equipment and hiring of qualified medical personnel. They also cited the need for the improvement of coordination between stakeholders in the health sector as an innovative strategy. Despite the relevance of these initiatives, they cannot be achieved without proper coordination and understanding between key stakeholders.

This has prompted the need for health centers to improve coordination of services between departments. This entails sharing of patient data between critical departments that are involved in patient treatment such as registry, diagnostic and drug distribution departments (Karima 2013: 168).

It is an innovative approach that holds the capacity of facilitating timely response to patients. It will also ensure that patients are well taken care of since coordination guarantees effective patient administration.

Coordination of healthcare services, its characteristics, the logic for its introduction, its contribution to policy development and links between the service development, social and political change

Imperatively, the introduction of effective coordination of services is an innovative approach that remains critical in most settings. The initiative is considered as a viable and innovative approach since it seeks to revolutionize how activities are executed in the health sector, especially in Australia.

This is evident since it seeks to provide necessary incentives that will facilitate quality service delivery in the medical sector (Joyce and Wallace 2006: 59). Firstly, it is bound to enhance information flow between health stakeholders.

It is also set to improve the management of health institutions in Australia that has been facing immense coordination challenges. This will promote effective establishment of the available competence and limitations that can impede service delivery thereby, prompting the development of credible solutions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Policy Analysis Report on Improvement in the coordination of services in the health sector by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Thirdly, the approach will steer the introduction and use of modern communication equipment that are efficient in coordinating activities. This will ensure that healthcare services are properly managed and that modern best practices are upheld. Rationally, effective coordination of healthcare services requires holistic and inter-sectoral collaborative approach.

It requires participation of key stakeholders who understand the challenges that affect the provision of quality Medicare services (Joyce and Wallace 2006: 68). This is vital in developing patient-oriented coordinating mechanisms that are economically viable and socially acceptable. The mechanisms must be financially sustainable and socially pertinent to cater for the interest of every stakeholder.

The approach is essential in the realization of this initiative since it holds the capacity of promoting the advancement of common health activities that are based on shared values or interests (Karima 2013: 168). It is also bound to promote collective policy formulation on issues that appertains to healthcare services in Australia.

This is a major step towards revolutionizing healthcare service delivery in Australia, where policy formulation on key issues has been facing various impediments due to poor coordination (Paul and Robert 2007: 2). Further, the concept is set with aim of promoting joint planning and collective delivery of services to patients in hospitals.

Conclusion Indeed, effective coordination of healthcare services is essential in ensuring the provision of quality, affordable and timely nursing care to patients. It holds the capacity of enhancing individual’s performance levels since it promotes the development of viable mitigating measures to various detrimental diseases that affect individuals.

The initiative also helps in building proper collaborative healthcare coordinating mechanisms. The mechanisms aid policy formulation, planning and exchange of doctors between nations.

Reference List Allison, B. (1997), Sustainable Health Care Financing in Southern Africa: Papers from an Edi Health Policy Seminar Held in Johannesburg, South Africa, June 1996, Washington, D.C: World Bank.

Edward, P. (2006), Organisational Development in Healthcare: Approaches, Innovations, Achievements, Abingdon: Radcliffe Medical.

Joyce, F. and Wallace, M. (2006), Encyclopedia of Nursing Research. New York: Springer Pub.

Karima, S. (2013), The Health Sector in Ghana: A Comprehensive Assessment.,Washington, D.C: World Bank.

Paul, B. and Robert. G. (2007), Bringing User Experience to Healthcare Improvement: The Concepts, Methods and Practices of Experience-Based Design, Oxford: Radcliffe Pub.


Parlement of Paris under Louis XV Essay (Critical Writing) essay help site:edu

The period of the reign of Louis XV is characterised by the significant public, judges, and parlements’ opposition to the monarch’s government and to the proposed policies and laws. The opposition can be explained from several perspectives. Thus, the judges did not consider the regent and Louis XV as powerful leaders because their economic and political reforms ended as the great losses for the country.

Furthermore, the role of the judges in the state was restored during the reign of the regent, but the fact only complicated the situation, making the opposition more obvious.

From this point, the opposition against the reign of Louis XV and the associated policies was based on discussing the monarch’s reign as weak with references to the unsuccessful financial policies and to many ineffective diplomatic decisions with references to the results of the European wars.

The government of Louis XV implemented two ineffective financial policies which made the country’s economics stagnate, and they even led to the decline of definite industries. Moreover, during a long period of time, the French economy depended on inadequate taxation policy.

The first attempt to improve the financial situation within the country was associated with the implementation of John Law’s experiment which ended with the significant inflation.

The next attempt to change the approaches to the country’s finances was the focus on the fiscal policies. The policy was implemented after the Seven Years War and provoked worsening of the economic situation with references to the newly increased taxation (Swann 1995). The opposition was inevitable.

One more reason for developing the opposition is the inability of the government to propose the effective strategy and policy to contribute to the country’s reputation and progress. The participation of France in the Seven Years War did not add to the country’s reputation or status, but it weakened the potential and all the country’s resources, leading to the economic and social instability.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, the situation was not improved because the judges, as the main opposition force, questioned the authority of the monarch and his decision (Swann 1995). Thus, they did not support any reforms proposed to gain the economic and political balance within the country.

However, it is also possible to assume that the opposition was significantly based on the ideological wars which were typical for France during the whole period of the monarch’s reign. The status of Unigenitus was one of the most controversial questions associated with the ideological and religious lives of the country.

Thus, the role of opposition against the government of Louis XV can be discussed with references to the activities of the Jansenist representatives and to the fact of the Jesuits expulsion in 1764 (Linton 1995; Swann 1995). Nevertheless, the ideological wars had less significant effects on the further development of the country in comparison with the financial and diplomatic failures.

Thus, much opposition to the government of Louis XV depends on the general weakness of strategies and policies used by the regent and monarch in order to rule the country. In spite of several years of stability achieved by the monarch’s ministers, the reign of Louis XV is characterised by the loss of the country’s international reputation and internal power.

The end of the monarch’s reign is also associated with the opposition movement which became the real challenge for authority and led to the dramatic changes in the country’s politics.

References Linton, M 1995, ‘The rhetoric of virtue and the parlements, 1770-1775’, French History, vol. 9 no. 1, pp. 180-201.

Swann, J 1995, Politics and the Parlement of Paris under Louis XV, 1754-1774, Cambridge University Press, USA.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Parlement of Paris under Louis XV specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More


Globalisation and the Future of Islam-West Relations Term Paper cheap essay help

The relationship between the Western world and the Islamic world is a complicated matter which has raised many questions allover the world. These bloody relations have been characterised by consistent confrontations that have existed between the two sides for many centuries.

Muslims, who appears to be on the receiving end of these confrontations, have always viewed this as a one-sided onslaught by the Western world, probably owing to their culture and religion.

The other possible reason which has contributed toward these Islam-Western confrontations is the Muslim perception that the main reason as to why Western countries would invade their territories was to plunder their rich resources and take full control of their markets. However, the issue of this tense Islam-West relationship being an insoluble problem is a far-fetched issue.

This is because there is a big contrast in the way the two repelling sides treat each other. For instance, while the attitude of the Westerners toward the Muslim societies appears to be more positive, Muslims have viewed Westerners as their biggest antagonists in life, and have always defined them with negative characteristics.

In other terms, Muslim societies have always felt more embittered toward the Western world than vice versa, where the Islamic followers seem to blame the West for the bloody relations between them. This is owing to the US foreign policy which appears to punish Islam, and also for their decision to consistently support the UK and other allied dictators from the Western region against the Muslims.

Despite the constant wars against Muslims, which seems to take many forms, there have also been plans and negotiations all over the world to establish a permanent solution to this progressive issue.

Moreover, the rapid wave of globalisation taking place in the current world has promised to change many things including the bad relations that have existed between some countries and communities. In this regard, Islam-west relations are likely to improve in the near future as a result of globalisation.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Globalisation, as we all know, involves bringing nations and communities together using processes which are likely to promote global exchanges of important aspects of life. Globalisation involves removing existing barriers to pave way for harmonisation among people of different ethnic groups, religions and culture.

As a matter of fact, protests against Islam are taking place in various forms in the West. An example is the insulting form of resistance which the people of Islamic culture have to put up with in some Western countries, due to hatred and discrimination.

Most of these discrimination cases are said to be common in work places, learning institutions and shopping zones, among other places of common interest where people are likely to meet (Blankenhorn 59). Even though there have never been serious cases of Muslim discrimination from Western governments, Islam followers have always associated Westerners with all sorts of negativity.

One of the major concerns that have been expressed by the Muslims against the Western world is that, the latter has been hostile towards them. This, however, has been one of the many issues that have necessitated repression of the Arabs by the Western world.

Apart from the several reasons that have been expressed earlier on, these anti-Muslim attacks have also been necessitated by the Western belief that some Muslims societies have been supporting terrorism and other acts of violence happening the world today.

These sentiments of enmity against the Muslims have occurred following the belief that Muslim followers have constantly being involved in major terrorist attacks around the world.

This antagonistic way of life between the Muslims and the West has led to devastating issues and events that would necessitate bloody relations between the two sides. In fact, the world has not forgotten the implications of the recent US disarmament war on Iraq – a devastating exercise which has left the Muslim world almost torn apart into pieces.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Globalisation and the Future of Islam-West Relations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More After many years marked by wars and riots over speculated weapons of mass destruction in the Middle East, most people in the world are still convinced that the relationship between Muslims and the West is generally worse these days than before. Even though past attempts to unite the two sides have proved futile, there is optimism that the future holds much hope for the Islam-Western relations.

This is possible, considering the current aspects of globalisation which have continued to play a significant role in bringing further interdependence of cultural and economic activities in the world (Center 87).

As it would be observed, globalisation offers a promising basis upon which the current Western-Islam state of affairs can be addressed and resolved collectively. For instance, the current aspects of globalisation have made it easier for peaceful negotiations aimed at uniting the two sides to be conducted.

As mentioned earlier, globalisation involves the destruction of old habits and adoption of new styles in aspects of social life, politics and the economy, among other things. These changes are likely to occur as a result of current advancements in technology, which appears to be taking place so fast across the world.

As it would be observed, the rampant technological wave allover the world is characterised by significant developments and advances in transport and telecommunications infrastructure. As Lyons observe, the use of engaging aspects of interaction such as the internet have played a key role in enhancing communication by increasing the flow of information among people allover the world (102).

What is interesting about these improvements however is that, they have opened up important avenues through which the international communities can take part in healing the wounds, simply by posting ideas that could help improve the Muslims’ relationship with the Western world.

It should be observed here that, these improvements have made human improved human interactions in the world, compared to the past where effective interaction and communication would be a serious challenge.

One important aspect of these interactions is that they have helped in establishing and strengthening cross-cultural contacts among people allover the world. More importantly, these developments have widely been used to spread democratic ideas which are aimed at resolving the progressive conflicts existing between the Muslims and the Westerners, thus enhancing social benefits between the two sides.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Globalisation and the Future of Islam-West Relations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Even though both the Western and the Muslim worlds appears to have a common agreement in the perception that the Muslim societies should be more economically stable than they are today, there are also varied reactions from the two sides against each.

According to Hunter, while the Westerners have expressed concerns that Muslims have consistently resisted their policies and plans to help them get rid of the harsh economic challenges facing them, Muslim publics have dismissed these claims, blaming the West for their lack of prosperity with their so-called policies (24).

In other terms, majority of the Muslim societies have remained adamant in the perception that Western policies are the major cause of the vast economic challenges observed in their region nowadays.

On the contrary, majorities of the Western nations such as the U.S., France and the UK have constantly argued that Muslims are in fact the ones to blame here, presumably owing to the corrupt nature of their governments and the inadequate levels of education observed in many Muslim nations. In real sense, this is arguably the highest level of misunderstanding which can occur between any two countries or communities.

This actually is where the idea of globalisation comes in. It is time for the two repelling sides to have more in common than they do differ, and there is no way this can be achieved, except by adopting and embracing the aspects of globalisation which are likely to speed up global interconnection.

One effective approach here is for both Muslims and the West to make good use of the interactive platforms offered by globalisation to convince one another of their best plans and opinions towards each other. This will not only enhance understanding between the two regions, but it will also give way for improved relations between them.

As a matter of fact, globalisation also involves the process of increasing interdependence of production, commodity marketing, financial markets and national economies among other keys aspects of development. Naturally, the concept of globalisation plays a key role in drawing attention to technological and economical aspects of life (Mayall 244).

In this regard, globalisation remains a key factor when it comes to building and strengthening international relations between communities and people of different cultural identities. The idea of globalisation has proved to be effective in facilitating the ability of Muslim societies and the Western world to converge into economical and political grounds.

This continued integration and active participation through social matters in the light of globalisation are likely to generate new thoughts, especially positive ones, thus helping in eradicating the negative perceptions that have existed between the West and the Muslims.

More importantly, these varied interactions on economical grounds have also added up to establish a new order of relations by which the two regions are likely to become united through the activities of transnational business.

As it is observed in this paper, the idea of globalisation and its positive aspects in life are likely to play a significant role in determining Western-Muslim relations in the near future.

Tension between the two powers, which appears to have heightened in the last one decade or so are likely to lessen in today’s turbulent world, where matters of international affairs and relationships have been prioritised as key issues that must be given much concern and attention.

As the West and the Muslim societies adapt to the changing demands and interests of the international community, they are able to discover new lessons through different levels of interactions. These interactions, as observed in this paper, are some of the vast ways through which the concept of globalisation applies in linking cultures and international relations.

No matter all the formidable obstacles and challenges, the relationship between the Muslim world and the Western world is likely to take a different course in the near future, owing to the current aspects of globalisation.

Works Cited Blankenhorn, David. The Islam/West Debate: Documents from a Global Debate on Terrorism, US Policy, and the Middle East, Lanham: Rowman


Amusing Ourselves to Death Thesis Synthesis Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

The author talks about the effects of the media on the population, particularly political and economic life. People are fed with varying information regarding what happens in government. Before the advent of the television, people relied on the newspapers and articles for information, but this changed with time when people were forced to depend on the television for critical information.

With time, the mass media has taken over because it relays information faster and more accurate as compared to the television. The author observes that the electronic media, such as the internet, cell phones, and DVDs, determine the type of information that people listen to in the modern society.

The book is a prophetic in nature since it predicts that human life, particularly in terms of politics, would be reduced to the level of entertainment. The author is saddened by the fact that religion is losing meaning in the modern society since the mass media controls it. According to his view, the mass media should be manipulated to serve the interests of the majority in society.

The mass media should not be allowed to control human life since it has negative influence, particularly on children and the youth. Many people consume according to the media adverts meaning that the new trend affects even the health of individuals.

Human beings have the highest goals that can only be attained when the media is channeled to serve their interests. The main point of the author is that the media affects human life negatively hence it should be redesigned to serve human needs.

The book is divided into two major parts with part one having five sections while the second part has six sections. The most important section in the first part is the section talking about the media as an epistemology. This means that political information in the modern society relies on the social media.

Any political debate or discourse with an aim of attaining its aims must focus on capturing the attention of the electorate in the social media. In the third section, the author underscores the fact that the American society is just one of the modern societies that the social media has taken over its communication activities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The fourth section of part observes further that the mind is programmed in a way that would just respond to information in the social media. People trust information in the social media as compared to any other source. The second part of the book examines number of instances that the social media has influenced politics in the United States.

From Postman’s analysis, it can be concluded that the social media is the new way of reaching out to the electorate since most of them are available there. This shows that politics have developed over several years to be what it is today. Before the social media, the author noted that the mass media was the commonly used technique in reaching out to the electorate.

Postman’s dream suggesting that the media should be used to serve human interests is being fulfilled since it is creating mass awareness. Politics is regarding its position in society since the media serves its interests, but not the other way round. It should also be noted that the social media has had tremendous effects on social life as compared to the television.


Role of the Press in Civil Rights Synthesis Essay a level english language essay help

Two veteran journalists come together to investigate the role played by the media during the Civil Rights era. Hank Klibanoff and Gene Roberts are both seasoned award winning journalists whose familiarity with south side journalism proves valuable in “The Race Beat”. The two journalists have done a tremendous job in arranging the history of the press activities over the Civil Rights era.

“The Race Beat” covers several aspects concerning the history of the black press. This history dates as far back as the nineteenth century. This paper proves that although the black press started the push for Civil Rights in the south, the integration of the nation’s press turned the tables on segregation.

“The Race Beat” outlines the progress of media coverage in the South. At the beginning of the book, the authors paint a picture of a zealous black press agitating for equality. During these early times, it was customary to expect a story about racial inequality to be emphasized only by the black media. Any Civil Rights stories by the rest of the media came as a surprise to the general population.

After this initial push by dedicated African American newsmen, the southern editors entered the arena. Most of these southerners were composed of liberal newspaper and magazine editors. The bravery and energy exhibited by some of these editors served as motivation for most southern reporters. According to the authors, the south was soon flocked by national news reporters and photographers.

The book’s climax has the nation’s attention tuned to events surrounding the Civil Rights. For instance, the book details an event in which Robert Schakne a CBS reporter forced the crowd to give a synthetic reaction just so he could film it. This event shows that the demand for Civil Rights stories was at an all time high.

The interest in Civil Rights coverage was mostly fueled by increased national demand for segregation related stories. An example of such a story includes the trial for the murder of Emmett Till. This trial was covered extensively by the national media.

The turning point in the press coverage of the Civil Rights is most likely the division among southern editors. At the beginning, most southern editors were contented with observing events from far away. However, at one point in the book the southern editors started taking Civil Rights issues more personally. For instance, some editors from the south started calling for mass resistance.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, the editors from the south were forming partnerships with segregationists. These behaviors were countered by the fearless acts of other southern editors who were sympathetic of the Civil Rights Movement. The push and pull between southern editors acted as the invitation to the national media.

Eventually, the voice of the segregationists was becoming overwhelmed by the presence of national media. The presence of the national media proved to be a major advantage for the Civil Rights Movement.

The competition factor between national media acted as the final push against Civil Rights. At one point, reporters from all parts of the country were fighting for opportunities to portray injustices.

The authors give an overview of the situation in Little Rock School where reporters from all parts of the country had gathered. This fanaticism eventually turned into real compassion. The book indicates that without realizing it the reporters’ hearts were already won over by the Civil Rights Movement.


Social Media Marketing Plan Research Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Monitoring



Key Performance Indicators (KIPs)



Return on Investment


Monitoring In social media, monitoring refers to the method of tracking, measuring and evaluating the marketing activities of a company’s on the social platform. From the definition, monitoring has various components as discussed under tracking, measuring, evaluating and tools used for monitoring on the social media (Barker, Barker, Bormann,


Relationship between Capitalism and a Logically Formal Rational Legal System Analytical Essay essay help online: essay help online

The seminal work of Max Weber has largely been used to provide and elaborate the law and its role in the development of capitalism. All rational forms of law are considered with special consideration of Weber’s input towards the understanding of the rationality of law. Weber contended that the dynamics of markets that are largely regulated by capitalism need to apply the rule of law.

The degree of calculability and legal rationality has been a pivot point in the growth of a formal and effective administration of justice. The relationship between growth of capitalism and the rule of law has been known to exist for many decades now (Hennis, 1983). The rule of law in such instances assumes a different character that is dependent on the stage of capitalism.

The form of capitalism structures established cannot work without relying on an established rule of law. The emergence of capitalism owes a great deal to law. The structure of capitalism depends on many other aspects of law. According to Weber, the said structures are put together by established legal institutions that have regulatory authority.

Weber designed his propositions by showing that legal institutions form and help in explaining the different phases of capitalism. In the wording of Weber, the relationship between capitalism and law has been used to emphasize the legal rationality (Hennis, 1983). This essay will explain and critically analyse the relation that Weber sought to draw between capitalism and a logically formal, rational legal system.

To be able to comprehend Weber’s philosophy, it is crucial to look into the economic activities that were taking place in Europe among other regions of the world. Most societies have taken law as the main governing tool. The discussion of law by Weber has taken many forms, but it is clear that his works have a lawyer, as well as a historian perspective (Milovanovic, 1989).

With capitalism being greatly associated with Europe, it consequently emerges that many legal systems in Europe are part and parcel of capitalism. It should be noted that even though the law has helped in the development of capitalism, the development has made several influences. The uniqueness of the capitalistic legal system squarely lies on the internal needs of the legal profession.

There has been massive speculation on the place of law in development of capitalism. Weber and other 19th century scholars observed that law had a major role to play in industrial civilization. They made strides in identifying the social role of the law. Since law existed before industrialization, the connection between law and modernization has been continuously probed (Levine, 1981)

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Weber’s interests in the law and legal life have offered fundamental information to modern theorists. However, his work has been said, by some, to be full of suggestive conclusions and not easy to follow at all. In other words, his work has been considered hard to base thoughts on, either on social or legal perspective.

The defence against the foregoing statement is that Weber’s work has obviously been misused and misinterpreted in many occasions. Theories have been developed based on Weber’s insight in law, society and economy (Löwith, 1982).

To explain further, Weber provided a full explanation on industrial capitalism and why it arose in the West. His theories went beyond the personal understanding of the law. He introduced the foundations of how the bourgeoisie capitalism started. His works were a complete sociological and historical research that had various dimensions of societies and the respective structures.

Weber attempted to explain the role of religion, economy and law in understanding structures of given societies. His theory was mainly centred on showing how the said structures do not exist alone, but in full coordination with others (Bendix, 1977).

Weber sought to offer a comprehensive explanation on why some of the events preceding capitalism were happening in Europe and not in other parts of the world. The role of the law in the growth of capitalism could go unnoticed. Weber made many theories out of it, with full explanation of the European law.

It was Weber’s contention that the European law had several favourable features that offered a favourable ground for capitalism to thrive (Kalberg, 1980). The European law played a crucial role above the other legal systems in other jurisdiction.

This has been a guiding explanation on why capitalism originated from Europe. Weber clearly illustrated the importance of the European law features towards economic development using the general sociological theory.

We will write a custom Essay on Relationship between Capitalism and a Logically Formal Rational Legal System specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Weber was quick to point out that it was not the western world alone that had legal systems. The broad understanding of the systems of different countries helped him in placing them in their distinct ways in which they shaped the society. Worth noting is the fact that he found those legal systems distinct and endeavoured to make the distinctions very clear.

His development of typologies that showed how the European law was distinct from other legal systems was highly allowed. His historical analysis of the European law aided in showing that the differences had a specific origin.

In addition, Weber used the parallel theoretical analysis that European law fitted the needs of capitalism more than other systems. His conclusions on the legal systems are drawn basing on the fact that all civilizations had a specific feature in their legal system that made capitalism possible (Feldman, 1991).

Weber’s belief in the European society dynamics and its legal society were not as a result of an economic situation. He consistently rejected the thought that capitalism interfered with the European law. He was quick to point out that the law existed before capitalism, thus it was only law that could influence capitalism and not the other way round.

Weber observed that the growth of the European legal systems has been through non economic factors. He cited the internal needs of the legal profession to be main factor that led to the advanced legal system in Europe. The economic factors in the bourgeois class seemed important, but they had no role in providing a determinative role in the particular legal systems in different parts of Europe (Lash


Employee Compensation. Human Resource Management Report writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Types of compensation

Determinants of pay rates

Benefits of comprehensive benefit plans

Organization Obligations


Works Cited

Introduction Employee compensation is a sub-division of human resource that encompasses automatic or guaranteed pay, variable pay, equity-based compensation, and benefits. Compensation involves tangible and intangible products that employers award their workers (Reh par. 1). Employers pay employees for their contributions within the business enterprise to enticing them to continue working for the firm.

Types of compensation Under guaranteed pay, there is the basic salary that is a fixed reward, which employers give their employees. This monetary reward can be on a daily, weekly, monthly, or hourly basis. On the other hand, variable pay is the rewards that employees receive due to their performance within the firm. Notably, it is not obligatory that an employee will get this pay like the guaranteed pay.

For example, an employer can set goals for all employees and whoever surpasses the target receives a bonus for the hard work. Employers usually use variable pay plans such as bonuses to motivate the employees towards attaining the strategic objectives and goals of the company. Benefits in employee compensation are always set up to address specific needs, which are not in monetary form (Reh par. 3).

Vacations and insurance are some of the essential plans that handle employee benefits, as they do are not tangible like wages and salary. Lastly, equity-based compensation involves compensating employees using their shares in the firm; they have to commit part of their earnings on shares of the firm.

Here, employers use different channels like stock options, restricted stock, and employee stock purchase plans to obtain funds for the company, which the employees will earn inform of dividends. In this plan, employees partially gain the stake in the organization thus enabling employees to increase their total level of compensation through cashing out of the stock options.

Determinants of pay rates There are factors that determine the compensation pay rates among different countries. The first parameter is individual skills and level of experience that workers command towards their jobs. Some jobs require skilled personnel; for instance, only a computer programmer will perform the computer programming activities and not any other employee who has done other course like business administration.

Again, some jobs like packaging of products in a company do not require specialized skills. These groups of people will receive different compensations in appreciation of skills and experience. In addition, demand and supply of labour affects determines the salary rates. If the supply of certain skills is higher than the market demand, the earning for these skills will go down.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, if the market demands a scarce skill, it will force organizations to adjust their compensation plans upwards to get and maintain the few skilled personnel in their departments. Clearly, the market forces of demand and supply affect the prevailing pay that jobs will attract. The profitability or the pay-ability of an organization also determines the wage and salary levels (“Factors Involved in Determining Salary” par. 6).

Organizations that run at a loss or obtain low profits will design low pay for their employees across their departments. This is practically evident during the economic recession of 2008 to 2009 where most firms had to use wage cuts as a means of survival during the economic crisis. Again, non-profit making organizations such as educational institutions tend to offer low salaries due to their non-profit making nature.

Moreover, the cost of living can be a determinant of salary and wage rates in companies worldwide. Countries that experience high cost of living will have to pay higher wages to their employees than those that experience low cost of living (“Factors Involved in Determining Salary” par. 3).

For example, an employee who expects to relocate from Texarkana to Honolulu will have to receive $87,880- if he/she is earning $40,000 in Texarkana in order to remain at the initial standard of living. This shows over 100% difference in earnings. Obviously, business organizations in Honolulu will have to pay high wages due to the high living standard in the region.

Some firms do commit to pay their workers above the expected standards so that they can attract and maintain the skilled personnel. This is evident in organizations that desire to control the entire market and influence them to consume their products.

Additionally, labour unions can influence the rate of pay for employees; they can engage the management of their organizations through collective bargaining to ensure that employees receive favourable earnings.

Benefits of comprehensive benefit plans When engaging in job designs, employers always try to provide the various job categories with a comprehensive benefit plans. The current global and competitive market has made it necessary for the HRM to be more creative and innovative in their management than before.

We will write a custom Report on Employee Compensation. Human Resource Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Further, the present diverse working generations such as baby boomers, generation X and Y have posed immense challenges to managers in designing an inclusive benefit plans. Organizations that have a comprehensive benefit plan will be able to recruit and retain qualified personnel across all generations.

This increases productivity of the firm as the job assures employees of their security at the workplace (“Compensation


Apple Incorporated Analysis Essay (Article) a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Currently, Apple Incorporated is one of the most reputable companies in the world. The company was formerly known as Apple Computer Incorporated. Apple is a multi-national corporation with its headquarters in the United States. The company’s centre of operation is in Cupertino, California. Apple Incorporated dropped the word computer from its title in 2007.

This was after the company decided to shift from extensive computer-manufacture to the manufacture of other consumer-oriented electronics. Apple is only second to Samsung when it comes to manufacturers of information-technology gadgets.

Apple is third after Samsung and Nokia among global mobile phone manufacturers. At the beginning of 2013, Apple was worth over $400 billion. In addition, the company has over seventy-two thousand permanent employees around the world. Apple’s annual revenue for the year 2012 was one hundred and fifty six billion dollars (Apple’s Annual Report, 2012).

Apple is an information-technology based company that undertakes the manufacture of both software and hardware products. However, the company is synonymous with hardware products such as the Mac computers, iPhones tablets, and the iPods (Linzmayer, 2009).

The company also manufactures software products such as operating systems and browsers. Apple’s most popular software innovations include the iTunes, the OS X, iLife, and iWork.

Apple Incorporated is the brainchild of three information technology experts namely Steve Jobs, Ronald Wayne, and Steve Wozniak. The three men formed Apple in 1976 with the aim of selling personal computers that were then known as Apple 1 (Helander, Landauer


Imagine that you have been charged with transforming the performance of a team at your workplace. Specifically, it is under-performing, and your supervisor wants the team to be high-performing within six months. Based on the information in Chapter 18 of Organizational Behavior in Health Care and your own research develop a presentation for your supervisor that addresses the following: Discuss reasons that healthcare teams under-perform. Outline best practices for team performance. Discuss the various organizational barriers that exist in your organization that affect team effectiveness. Describe motivational strategies that address team level performance. Present your team performance improvement plan making sure to include specific time-bound goals. Provide examples from the organization and from current research to support your comments and ideas. argumentative essay help

Your presentation should meet the following structural requirements: Organized, using professional themes and transitions. It should consist of nine slides, not including the title and reference slides. Each slide must provide detailed speaker’s notes, with a minimum of 100 words per slide. Notes must draw from and cite relevant reference materials. Provide support for your statements with in-text citations from a minimum of six scholarly articles. Two of these sources may be from the class readings, textbook, or lectures, but the other four must be external. The Saudi Digital Library is a good place to find these references. Follow APA 7th edition and Saudi Electronic University writing standards.


Overview of the Operations of Save the Children Report college admissions essay help

Save the Children was born out of the need to address the plight of Children in Europe after the First World War in 1919. The founders were two sisters, Eglantyne Jebb and Dorothy Buxton.

The two sisters felt that action was needed to deal with the dire health and nutrition problems that children in Berlin and Vienna, among other European cities, were facing. Their initial activities led to the arrest of Jebb. Nonetheless, they went on to establish the human rights organization currently known as Save the Children.

The Role that Save the Children Plays Save the Children focuses on the plight of children in various countries and seeks to address their concerns. The range of issues that the organization deals with varies from country to country.

The main areas the organization deals with include the following. Save the Children advocates for children’s rights, the education of children, and the protection of children. The organization also addresses the impact of climate change on children, poverty, and hunger. The organization also runs programs dealing with child health, and HIV.

The role that Save the Children plays in children’s rights is three fold. First, the organization empowers children to participate in demanding for their rights by providing avenues for communication with policy makers.

Secondly, the organization supports other organizations that work towards the achievement of children’s rights. Thirdly, Save the Children runs programs that target policy makers directly by advocating for the inclusion of children’s issues at the policy level.

Many children in the world need protection. In places where children have no protection, they fall into the hands of people who abuse them. Unprotected children may end up as child soldiers, sex workers, or domestic workers. Save the Children run programs in several countries that aim at protecting children from abuse.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the area of education, Save the Children is working with other organizations in programs that support the UN millennium development goals that state that all children should be in school by 2015.

Secondly, the organization is running the FAST program in Britain to give support to children from poor families to enable them to compete better with children from rich families. Save the Children is also behind the efforts to make education a part of the emergency response to natural disasters and conflict, alongside the provision of food, shelter, and clothing.

Save the Children recognizes that climate change is one of the most significant challenges of the twenty first century. More importantly, children will endure the most of the impacts of climate change. For instance, climate change will affect food security and nutrition in many parts of the world.

Children usually suffer the most from nutritional deficiency because they need proper nutrition to mature. For this reason, Save the Children runs programs that prioritize climate change interventions because it is a threat the future of children.

Save the Children also tries to address poverty. A child born into a poor family has reduced chances of success in life compared to a child born into a wealthy family. Save the Children believes that there is need to address this disparity to ensure that all children have a fair chance to succeed in life. The organization runs programs that seek to level the playing field for all children.

The organization also runs programs that address hunger. Save the Children believes that malnutrition is the root cause of one third of all deaths of children aged five and below. Malnutrition leads to weakened bodies that cannot fight off illnesses.

In addition, children suffering from malnutrition have stunted growth, which affects their earning potential later in life. This is the basis of the involvement of Save the Children in poverty eradication.

We will write a custom Report on Overview of the Operations of Save the Children specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Save the Children is involved in the provision of healthcare as a response to the challenge of child mortality associated with poor healthcare. Health problems cause the death of children because of malnutrition, lack of medicine, or lack of medical facilities. One of the ways that Save the Children intervenes in healthcare is by supporting clinics that provide health services to needy children.

Methodology Save the Children uses multiple methods to address issues. The main methods the organization uses are advocacy, provision of practical support, and networking with like-minded organizations. Advocacy refers to the ability to lobby for the development of policies and laws that protect the rights of children. Often, lack of legal protection aggravates child abuse in any jurisdiction.

For instance, passing laws that criminalize child marriage and underage sex leads to reduced prevalence of these forms of child abuse. The abolishment of slave trade commenced with the passing of relevant laws in the British parliament. This demonstrates the power of advocacy in delivering change especially in the long term.

The second method the organization employs to meet its goals is the provision of practical support. Save the Children supports clinics in order to provide healthcare for needy children. It also gives mothers vouchers to get food to meet their nutritional needs. In this sense, the organization intervenes directly in the issues it seeks to address.

The third method it uses in its operations is that it supports organizations that deal with the specific interests of Save the Children. This support includes sponsoring programs in organizations involved in the protection of children’s rights. The human rights movement in the entire world understands the power of speaking with a common voice where there is a common interest.

The Place of Save the Children Save the Children occupies a unique place in the human rights movement across the world. While human rights movements tended to deal with the issues of marginalized communities such as the blacks in South Africa and America, Children did not always stand out as a human rights constituency.

The uniqueness of Save the Children in the global human rights movement is that it has no clear geographical or political markers. Every country in the world has children whose rights needs protection.

The second unique element about Save the Children is that its constituency outgrows its efforts. After eighteen years, children seize to be children. The transition to adulthood removes them from the jurisdiction of Save the Children.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Overview of the Operations of Save the Children by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In many human rights situations, the primary beneficiaries of an organization tend to remain static. For instance, the beneficiaries of the civil rights movement in South Africa still posses their defining characteristics. Their needs evolved after the collapse of apartheid but they remain a clear constituency. This is not the same situation when it comes to Save the Children.

The third unique feature that marks the place of Save the Children in the global human rights movement is that the organization uses a holistic approach in its activities. It deals with advocacy, practical support, and cooperation with like-minded organizations. Human rights organizations tend to specialize in one area rather than pursue several approaches simultaneously.


Warfare and Violence in Ancient Times Exploratory Essay online essay help: online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Egyptians

The Assyrians

The Greece-Macedonia

The Maya

The Aztecs

The Incas


Works Cited

Introduction Political economy is vital to existence and expansion of any country. This is evident in ancient empires, which used political economy to strengthen their grip on colonies. For instance, Imperialism, which is currently utilized in United States, was developed by Assyrians. Moreover, use of electric batteries, flush toilets, paved roads and locks were used in Assyria before modernization.

Furthermore, their farming techniques were advanced with irrigation forming a major part of cultivation. These were great advancements at the time. No wonder they are considered among the greatest civilizations of ancient times. Their ability to unify cities in times when war was the order of things was exemplary.

This brings to focus the importance of good administration and political economy. This paper will discuss civilization as conveyed by ancient empires such as Egyptians, Assyrians, Macedonians, Aztecs, Incas and the Maya (Gascoigne 1).

Among the ideologies brought forth in ancient times, none has matched Assyrians. Their excellent and evolutionary political skills as well as administration were very important in world revolution. Other empires also helped shape the world. These included Egyptians, Incas, Aztecs, Macedonians and the Maya. For instance, Egyptians contributed to writings as well as Assyrians.

Incas on the other hand, were well organized with division of labor and specialization being the major benefits from their culture. Maya on the other hand were very good at influencing their neighbors without use of violence. Moreover, they contributed greatly to philosophy, astronomy and literature among others. This is same with Aztecs, who were very crucial in alliances and political studies.

Macedonians were so powerful that enemies trembled at their feet. Moreover, they had well trained soldiers with witty leaders such a Philips II, among others. It is also important to note the artifacts and architecture seen in Aztecs and Mayan times. These were very influential to modern world (Ancient Military 1).

The Egyptians Egyptian empire was great in the ancient times. It conquered several other empires and was victorious in many occasions. However, its popularity was mainly on its contribution to civilization inn agriculture, medicine, literature and mathematics, among others.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Egyptian people settled in Northern part of Africa around the banks of River Nile. They cultivated land near river Nile and used very sophisticated canals in irrigation systems. River Nile provided water for the rich valley in which they cultivated their crops. Egyptians were ruled by hereditary kings known as the Pharaoh.

The peak of their civilization coalesced in 3,150 BC, during time of first Pharaoh. Its contributions to civilization during these periods included storage pyramids for grain, techniques for medicine and algebraic mathematical systems, which are still utilized to day. Other contributions to civilization included writing, architecture and embalming, among others.

However, the Roman Empire conquered and reduced it to a province by 31 BC. Their political ideology was on absolute power by the King who dictated moral values. Pharaoh had his general, ministers and wise men as advisors (Tyldesley 1).

The Assyrians Assyria extends from west of Euphrates to North of Haran, and Lake Urmi in Iran. This civilization covered four current nations in Turkey, Iran, Iraq and Syria. It had two great rivers that passed between it namely Euphrates and Tigris. The rivers supplied water for irrigation and other uses. The Language spoken in Assyria was Akkadian, which was written in cuneiform.

They were Semitic people who were indigenous to Mesopotamia. Their writings wee at first based on tablets and clay, however, by 750 B.C.; they had started writing on papyrus. Assyrian Empire was at its greatest between 900 and 600 B.C. They developed several ideologies such as universal empire and deity, among others. These were adopted by Arameans, among others neighbors they influenced.

They adopted Aramaic due to their interaction with them although it was infused with Akkadian language. Their most influential period began in 2371 B.C., when Akkad established his Assyrian Kingdom.

In 1813 B.C. The kingdom was firmly established by Shamshi-Ada, who united Nineveh, Arbel, Ashur and Arrapkha. Of great importance during this period to modern civilization was his political skills and administrative efficiency that enabled him to unite the cities (BetBasoo 1).

We will write a custom Essay on Warfare and Violence in Ancient Times specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the 900 A.D., Assyria rose again and experienced great administrative efficiency and economic boost through Ashur-dan II. During tis period, they recorded huge harvests of grain in Mesopotamia. They defeated Arameans and controlled them during this time. Assyrian control expanded to southern Lebanon as well as Zagross mountain, among others.

They had well-organized military that ensure success in conquering and securing new footholds. Through their advanced political skills, they managed to rule over Egypt, Cyprus, Caspian and Anatolia, among other. They brought together both barbaric and nomadic people in these regions and civilized them. Things like locks and keys were invented in Assyria.

These fundamentals occur in our daily lives. Moreover, it is in Assyria that keeping time was developed. It is also quite important to note that paved roads, which are used today, were first developed in Assyria. Others include use of iron, magnifying glasses, libraries, plumbing, guitars, flush toilets, electric batteries, arches and aqueducts, among others.

Various ideologies also came from Assyria these included imperial administrations, breakdown of ethnic barriers, cultural unification, spread of Christianity, Judaism and Islam, among others. It is therefore quite clear that Assyria contributed greatly to modern civilization (BetBasoo 1).

The Greece-Macedonia Macedonians lived in Northern Greece and enjoyed a stable dynasty around 700 A.D. The word Macedonia is believed to have originated from Makednos, which means tall. Macedonians had a powerful army that conquered those around them. They engaged potential captives in war and secured all their regions.

Through this, they conquered those regions. They had a stable dynasty in the 7th century B.C. However, after there centuries, they became so powerful that they had ability to dominate Greek. Their society was feudal where the King and his nobles would do as they chose.

Their accession and civilization began in 356BC when Philip II took power. He used bribes and military genius as well as skillful diplomacy to conquer his neighbors. He defeated several powers in Greece like Athens and Thebes, among others. He went on to convince Greece into a treaty to conquer Persia although this failed when he was murdered in His daughter’s wedding.

His son Alexander the great took over and kept with fight to conger his neighbors. He managed this successfully until his death in 323. His death brought a sharp division in Macedonia as his family members fought for power.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Warfare and Violence in Ancient Times by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Olimpias her mother went on a coup but failed. This signified the end of Macedonian conquer as Rome took over and reduced it to a province. Warfare was an integral part of their part in conquering neighbors. However, they only managed this for a short while (Gascoigne 1).

The Maya The Maya, like Aztecs are Mesoamerican civilization. They developed language spoken in pre Columbian America. They are also known for mathematical systems, architecture and art as well as astronomical systems. They are known to have established their empire between 2000BC to 250 A.D. This period was known as classic period and it witnessed they best state of development.

Like the Aztecs and Incas, Maya were destroyed by Spanish. They had numerous contact and cultural diffusion with Mesoamerican civilization. For instance, they developed their own calendar through civilization. Their influence was vast in Northern El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras as well as central Mexico.

They had highly skilled artists who made sculptures and ceramics. Most of their images were decorated in wood and stones. They also had geometric figures as well as hieroglyphs. In addition, they offered ceramics to the dead. The Maya people never disappeared even after Spanish Conquest.

Currently they form sizable populations across Maya area. They have unique sets of beliefs and traditions that resulted from both post and pre Columbian cultures and ideas. In fact, some of their languages are still spoken such as Rabinal Achi, among others. In 2005, this language was recognized by UNESCO in a play as the Intangible and oral Heritage of humanity.

The Maya had hereditary rulers as their heads, they were known as ajaw. The ajaws ruled over cities. In general, Maya people civilized people through their influence unlike other civilizations. Like Aztecs and Incas, the Maya believed in many gods. They also offered human sacrifices like the Aztecs (Coe 31).

The Aztecs Aztecs dominated many parts of Mesoamerica between 1400 and 1600 A.D. Their civilization period lasted about two centuries. They came from large groups that spoke Nahuatl as their language. Due to diversity, Aztecs did not have a particular culture although their civilization was based on Mesoamerican culture.

Their population was over 20 million. Tenochtitlan was their capital and it was build at the centered in an island of Lake Texcoco. Aztecs were very powerful as they ruled through alliances. However, they also ruled through fear as was witnessed in their downfall at the hands of Spanish emperor Cortes. Aztecs are known for irrigation systems and mass maize production as well as use cacao bean in food.

Some of their inventions are still utilize by modern world. They also had well structured educational systems that emphasized on literature, philosophy, astronomy and history, among others. Their numeric system was based on the number twenty with calendars based on their leaders and gods. It is also quite important to note that Aztec sacrificed human captives in order to continue their civilization.

This was grave in that they took out captives hearts when still alive. It has been shown that tens of thousands of people hade been sacrificed at the great pyramid of Tenochtitlan.

Just like the Incans, land was controlled and given to commoners for cultivation at a fee. In most cases, people would be enslaved to cultivate land, which was owned, by kings and nobles. At the peak of their rule, Spanish army led by Cortes conquered them (Clendinnen 20).

The Incas The Incas ruled its South America Empire for about three centuries. They were a small tribe but conquered a great part of South America during their time. The areas included in their rule were parts of Bolivia, Chile, north Argentina as well as Ecuador. Their mode of rule was by conquering and assimilating. Whenever they conjured an area, they would teach inhabitants their way of life and expect them to follow.

For instance, they used to take sons of their leader’s sons and made them rulers over them. However, they had to rule the Inca way. Their government system was in form of a pyramid with Sapa Inca at the top. Sapa Inca, which meant unique Inca, was believed to have come from the sun god.

He therefore commanded respect from the Inca people. This pyramid started with Sapa, through to Nobles, then curacas, after which craftsmen and farmers. The Empire was well organized with tasks divided to each group of people. Andres mountain inhabited most of the Incas with their cities well fortified. Every person in Inca was organized with a role to play in life. Sapa Inca owned all the land.

He would give some to farmers for cultivation in return for work. Although they did not invent writing, the Incas used a device known as quipu to keep records. Their civilization began by the capture of Moche culture in central Peru. This went on for more centuries although they were later destroyed by Spanish conquests (Lambert 1).

Conclusion There are various similarities between ancient and modern civilization. Some of which include study of philosophy, astronomy, literature and history, among others as seen in the Aztecs.

Food production and irrigation can also be traced back to these ancient societies with utilized crude but capable systems to irrigate their farms. It is also quite important to note that both Aztecs and Maya shared various practices like study of astronomy and history, among others. While Aztec land was owned by nobles and kings that of Incas was owned by their leader known as Incas.

The Incas conquered people and assimilate them into their way of life. On the other hand, Aztecs conquered and sacrificed as well as enslaved their captives. It can also be noted that the Incas were more organized and structured than Aztecs. The Maya, like Aztecs sacrificed people to their gods. The Incas, Maya and Aztecs both had religious calendars that were inspired by religious cynics.

While Maya used their influence to conquer neighbors, Macedonia on the other hand used warfare with skillful tactics, bribery and well trained military. This was witnessed in Philips’ tactics during the invasion of Greece. Assyria can be considered as the most influential empire in ancient world. This is mainly because of the contributions it brought to its colonies as well as to modern civilization.

While other empires like Aztecs exploited their captives, Assyrians taught them how to live a civilized life with modernized lifestyles. Like Egypt, they focused on political economy, which produced large grains. Besides, United States is ruled through imperial system of government where various governors report to the federal government, this was adopted from Assyrians.

To crown it all, use of electric batteries, flush toilets, paved roads, among other were very significant in those periods. Besides, even the modern world took time to understand these concepts (Ancient Military 1).

Works Cited Ancient Military. “Ancient Military History”. AM. Web.

BetBasoo, Peter. (2007). “Brief History of Assyrians”. Aina. Web.

Clendinnen, Inga. Aztecs: An Interpretation. Cambridge and New York: Cambridge University Press, 1991. Print.

Coe, Michael. The Maya (6th ed.). New York: Dante Reed, 1999, p. 31.

Gascoigne, Bamber. “History of Macedonia”. History World. Web.

Lambert, Tim. “The Incas”. Local Histories, 2008. Web.

Tyldesley, Joyce. “History: Ancient Egypt and the Modern World”. BBC. Web.


Law as the Study of Prediction Essay (Critical Writing) online essay help

In his essay The Paths of Law Oliver Holmes tries to explain his understanding of jurisprudence and its main principles. In particular, he argues that the main purpose of this discipline is to predict legal outcomes or results of a person’s action.

In his opinion, the study of law is not always related to the assessment of people’s moral behavior; more likely, its task is to foresee the forces of law and their effects on an individual and society. This argument gives rise to the question whether the study of law can be viewed as a science. This paper will determine if such interpretation is justifiable and applicable to modern standards of legal profession.

First, Oliver Holmes points out lawyers often adopt the methods of reasoning which are typical of sciences, for example, deduction, analogy, and discrimination. To some extent, they are more related to mathematics rather than philosophy or ethics. Therefore, it is possible to say that the study of law bears close resemblance to a science.

In his discussion, Oliver Holmes primarily focuses on public forces or the actions of the court rather than the ethical truths which underlie these public forces. Admittedly, while providing legal advice to a client, lawyers often pay more attention to the material interests of this person rather than ethical concerns.

This evidence also suggests that jurisprudence is oriented toward material or practical purposes instead of deeper understanding of moral truths. This feature makes the study of law similar to a science.

There is another important element of Holmes’s discussion. He believes that legal professionals, especially judges or legislators should focus more on social advantage.

Therefore, one of their tasks is to maximize the benefits of the community and individual. Judging from this claim, one can compare jurisprudence to such economics. Thus, if we adopt utilitarian perspective of Oliver Holmes, we can say that law can be considered as a science.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nevertheless, Oliver Holmes admits that laws reflect moral development of a community or country. Therefore, it is quite possible that the study of law can evolve with time passing. It should be noted that this essay was written at the end of the nineteenth century, and since that time, jurisprudence has changed significantly.

Modern law students have to study various ethical theories which can explain the principles to which a lawyer should adhere to. Thus, the study of law has both scientific and ethical or philosophical components. This is the reason why the arguments expressed by Oliver Holmes cannot be fully accepted.

Purely scientific interpretation of the law can overlook the fact that legal acts are based on ethical principles and standards. Without understanding of these principles, lawyers as well as legislators will be unable to uphold the values of a society.

This discussion indicates that the study of law definitely relies on the methods and principles adopted by scientists. Their decision making and analysis of information can rely on deductive reasoning or analogy.

Moreover, they often try to maximize the social benefits that the community or individual will derive from public forces. Hence, it definitely has scientific component. Yet, jurisprudence is also of a study of moral truths and values that regulate the professional behavior of a lawyer and the actions of an individual. Thus, it can be regarded as a combination of ethics and science.


Performance Appraisal in Organizations Analytical Essay essay help free: essay help free

Introduction Performance appraisal has a very short history. It only began taking root in the early periods of 20th century. Performance appraisal is a common concept in the field of contemporary personnel management. It began as a simple way of justifying employees’ income. Since its inception, the concept has become universal and seems inevitable for every human resource department (Grote, 2002).

Three points of concern with the given company’s current evaluation form

The current company’s evaluation form has quite a number of points of concern. One of the points is that the current evaluation is not properly structured and is single sided. Besides, the evaluation form is not effective and seems to be done by only one person, the plant manager. Moreover, the plant manager only makes tentative decisions of the evaluation criteria. This is not effective.

The second point of concern is that the current evaluation form seems to emphasize on personal character and the relationship with other workmates. In this case, the form does not take into effective consideration of the fact that the engineer has made tremendous contributions to the company’s profitability.

The third point of concern is that the current form of evaluation does not allow for participatory evaluation. The plant manager does the evaluation by himself and does not involve others in the whole process.

The commonly-used sets of criteria which should be evaluated in a performance evaluation

The commonly used sets of criteria which should be evaluated in a performance evaluation include contribution, skill set, work ethics and professional development. In relation to contribution, the focus is placed on contributions made by an individual toward the achievement of organizational goals and objectives (Robbins, 2009).

For instance, the focus may be placed on quantity sales, negotiated contracts and the value of financial benefits an employee may contribute to the company. Another set of evaluation may entail assessing an employee’s skills. For instance, in the process of evaluating skills set, the main concern may be technical skills and ability to troubleshoot problems and offer solutions to the problems (Robbins, 2009).

Evaluation based on work ethics may include assessment of an employee’s punctuality, motivation, absenteeism and interpersonal skills. Professional development may include assessing the commitment of an employee to further skills development. Specific deliverables may entail whether or not an employee attends workshops and training events (Robbins, 2009).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Relative value of the commonly-used sets of criteria

Every set of evaluation criteria has its own value. However, it is important to note that the set of criteria are all inclusively valuable in the process of performance evaluation.

The criteria assess various aspects of an employee’s personality which is crucial for the success of a corporate organization. Evaluation based on an employee’s contribution assists in determining how much the employee is bringing in for the company. This can be evaluated based on quantitative achievements of an employee (Robbins, 2009).

A skill set also has its own value. Besides evaluating the contribution of an employee to the company, assessing the skills of an employee is also valuable. This kind of assessment is important in determining the skills base of a corporate organization as a whole; it enables the organization to know the capability of every employee (Robbins, 2009).

Work ethics is important in terms of effectiveness at work. Performing evaluation based on this criterion assist in determining whether an employee follows the laid down regulations and norms; it may involve evaluating the commitment of an employee to an organizational culture.

Evaluation based on professional development is also valuable in terms of knowing an employee’s commitment to personal development and development of others within the organization; the process helps in gauging whether an employee is committed to achieving greater excellence (Robbins, 2009).

Advantages and disadvantages of including supervisors, peers, and subordinates in the evaluation process

The involvement of supervisors, peers and subordinates in the process of evaluation is advantageous. This makes everyone working for the corporation to feel part of the entire process and hence lend his or her full support to the criteria that may be set for the process.

Again, this kind of involvement enables the supervisors, peers and subordinates to consider the system of evaluation as fair because they are able to contribute their views in the process. This also gives them a platform to have a say on the evaluation process (Kleynhans, 2006).

We will write a custom Essay on Performance Appraisal in Organizations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, involving them may also have some disadvantage. One of the disadvantages of this kind of involvement is that it is difficult to interpret the findings in case they may vary from one individual to the other.

Again, there may be biases in the evaluation process since an individual may give a low rating to the person he or she is not in good terms with. Besides, subordinates may not be comfortable to rate their supervisor (Kleynhans, 2006).

Three common performance evaluation methods used to analyze performance data after it has been gathered

Performance data analysis can be done using various methods. Three of these methods include use of graphic scales, checklists and critical incident method. All these methods are reliable. However, they differ in certain aspects (Schermerhorn, 2011). Checklist method involves a set of questions to which responses are either yes or no; this is quantitative in nature. However, it is not as effective as the graphic scale method.

Graphic scale method can be defined as any form of rating scale that consists of points calibrated within a continuum. In this method, managers are provided with a means of making judgement on the level of effectiveness for each employee along the provided continuum; the continuum has anchor points that clearly distinguish levels of effectiveness within the drawn continuum.

Besides, graphic scale allows a manager to grade performance in various tasks on one scale. A manager can compare the performance of more than one employee on a graphic scale at once (Schermerhorn, 2011). Graphic scale method is mainly preferred because it can be adapted to different specific formats.

Moreover, it is preferred for the reasons that it is easy to construct, it has a high level of acceptability for users and have a significant face value. Therefore, the manager of the corporation may consider using graphic scale method in performing employees’ evaluation.

Critical incident is a method that has been used for long. However, it has the potential of biases and errors since it involves recording of bad and good things done an employee. Some good and bad things may be missed in the recording process. Besides, it is unreliable due to possible biases of a manager with regard to a particular employee (Schermerhorn, 2011).

Biases and errors that frequently impact the accuracy of performance evaluations

There are many biases and errors that may impact the accuracy of performance evaluation. First, there is a possibility of personal bias by a supervisor; this is based on the perception that a supervisor may have on each employee working under his or her supervision.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Performance Appraisal in Organizations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For this reason, there is a purpose to fear that an employee whose performances require fair ratings, but is not in good terms with his or her supervisor, may receive a low rating instead and vice versa. Second, there is also a possibility of spillover effect. In this case, evaluation may be based on the past performance; this may override the current performances and hence demoralize employees instead of motivating them.

Third, there is horn effect. This is where an individual’s performance is evaluated based on negative features or quality. This implies that a supervisor may only concentrate on what an employee does wrong at the expense of what the employee does right.

The effect of this is that brilliant employees may not be taking new initiatives that they perceive to have the possibility of leading them into making mistakes; in this case, the employees may just stick to the traditional ways that are not prone to mistakes while performing their duties.

Lastly, halo effect is also a possible bias; this can be defined as the tendency to rate an employee low or high in his or her entire performance just because he got either low or high rating in just one or few areas in the process of work. This has the potential of creating dissatisfied and discouraged work force within a corporation.

Appropriate tools and techniques that can be used to improve performance evaluations in the given situation

Currently, the company uses one-sided technique. This is the reason the evaluation process is not effective. In order to improve performance evaluations, interactive and developmental techniques should be adopted.

Interactive technique will allow all stakeholders to participate in the evaluation process while a developmental technique is where the development progress of an employee over time. Each part of an employee’s work is evaluated differently. Both of these techniques will greatly enhance evaluation performances in the company.

Conclusion Employees’ performance evaluation is important for every corporate organization (Grote, 2002). The problem with the evaluation form of the company is that it is one-sided process in which the plant manager is the one doing the evaluation.

It is therefore important for the company to adopt a participatory approach to ensure effectiveness of the entire evaluation process. It is important to note that the performance evaluation process is bound to have biases and errors some of which may be personal. The three common evaluation methods include checklist, graphic scales and critical event method.

References Grote, R. (2002). The Performance Appraisal Question and Answer Book: A Survival Guide for Managers. Hampshire: AMACOM Div American Mgmt Assn.

Kleynhans, R. (2006). Human Resource Management. South Africa: Pearson South Africa.

Robbins, S. (2009). Organizational Behaviour: Global and Southern African Perspectives. Cape Town: Pearson South Africa.

Schermerhorn, J. (2011). Exploring Management. Hampshire: John Wiley and Sons.


Library Management System Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help

The library management system is a type of enterprise resource planning system that is primarily used in libraries. Enterprise resource planning systems provide a technological platform where an organization can integrate and coordinate its internal processes (K. Laudon, J. Laudon and Brabston 13).

The library management system allows a library to keep track of all its books, and also manage its members. Some of the services offered by a library management system include book requests by the members of the library, and denial or issuance of the requests by the librarian.

The system has several modules that serve various functions. The acquisition module manages the ordering, purchase and receipt of books for use in the library, thereby keeping records of all incoming books. The cataloging module classifies and indexes books received in the library. This helps the library record all its books, while making also making it easier to access a new book.

New books are indexed by a unique code or book ID that will simplify the identification process. The circulation module helps the library better manage the distribution process. The library, through the circulation module, can track all books loaned out to library users, and books returned.

Tables As a result of the modules, the library management system has four sets of tables. Under the first table, designated for library users, entry fields include the user ID tag, user name, date of admission, and the number of books issued. The book detail table includes fields such as the library book code, library book title, the book category, book author, and the book status.

The book status could imply whether or not the book is available for borrowing. An important limited edition copy could be slated as not available, implying that it is for library use only. Issue details table includes the book issue ID and issue details such as expiry date on a borrowed book. Book category table fields help in classifying book titles within the library. The fields include category name and the category ID.

A library management system has several groups of users who serve different functions. Members of the library management system can log into the system using their username and a password. Members can use the system to search all titles stored within the library, and view the availability of each.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Members will also be required to pay fines for lost or late books. Members, who mostly comprise of students, have a limited number of books that they can borrow from the library at any given time. Lecturers are also users of the library management system. Like members, they can search titles inside the library but have more privileges than students since they can borrow more books simultaneously.

Librarians act as the administrator of the system. They can view and manage member and lecturer accounts and get their information by using a name or an ID. As administrators, librarians can view and create new accounts into the system, and also have the task of issuing books from the library. Librarians can add library cards and assign them to members, while managing the information in the database.

The administrative account allows the librarian to add or remove items in the database. Moreover, the librarian can receive payments from members, and subsequently update the related account. Inputs into the transaction processing system (TPS) are derived from members of the database, while the output is used by the librarian in making routine decisions.

Entity Relationship Diagram

Entity relationship diagrams are tools used to illustrate the relationship between different entities or objects within a system. Members request books into the system, while librarians issue the books to members, depending on the outcome of the approval or denial process. The librarian has access to various functions within the library management system.

We will write a custom Essay on Library Management System specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The user interface is the same for all users when logging into the system, but functions depend on the user, as determined by the username and the password. The librarian will access a different interface once he has logged in, and can access different functionalities and view different icons from those accessed by normal members.

The librarian can issue or return books into the library management system, and can conduct searches on members and books in the system. The librarian also has add or delete function, which allows the librarian to add or delete member and staff accounts, and manage books in the library management system.

The librarian’s interface, which is also his menu, lists all the functions that the librarian can access including; adding or deleting a member, adding or deleting a book, searching and viewing member accounts, searching and viewing book details, and issuing or returning a book.

Works Cited Laudon, Kenneth, Jane Laudon,


Management of Small Business Evaluation Essay essay help site:edu

Competitive Advantage Strategies The business environment is very competitive especially in the modern world where technology has advanced and increased dynamism in the environment. Due to these changes, many organizations operating in different industries are seeking to establish themselves through use of various strategies. One of the common strategies is establishment of a competitive advantage.

A competitive advantage is qualities that characterize a given organization that makes it outstanding from the rest of the competitors in the industry.

Total Quality management is one of the strategies used by firms to create a competitive advantage through development of quality products that fit directly into consumer needs. Despite its common use by many organizations, other strategies could be used by organizations to establish a competitive advantage.

Cost Leadership

Companies that have ability and capacity to produce goods use this generic strategy and services at costs that are lower than those of their competitors are and therefore earn more profit in selling high product quantities. As mentioned by Campbell et al (2002, p. 178), for a company to gain cost leadership, there has to be costs control and efficiencies. The company should seek to gain a unique access to lower cost materials.

Low cost in production could be achieved through vertical integration decisions and optimal outsourcing. As long as cost of production is low, a company can offer products at lower prices and maximize sales. Companies that use cost leadership strategy take advantage of the economies of scale whereby the company produces large amount to enhance its competition in the market.

A good example of a company that has applied this strategy includes Wal-Mart. This is one of the largest retailers across the world. Wratshko (2009, p. 53) argued that low cost strategy is central to the production and delivery of quality and competitive products at Wal-Mart Company.

The company has for years translated its low cost advantage into a price advantage, its customers enjoy low costs, and this has largely improved the company’s market share. The enlarged market share in turn increases the company’s opportunity to enjoy economies of scale with ruthless cost reductions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Wal-Mart is known as a low price supplier of variety of goods. Wal-Mart compares its every activity with those of its competitors along the value chain and is committed to surpass the competitors through price reduction.

The company has remained innovative; this helps in improving processes and developing new products at low costs. One of the main drivers of low cost strategy at Wal-Mart is its supplier relationships; the company maintains in-bound logistics and supplies.

Market Segmentation

According to Campbell et al (2002, p. 180), a focus strategy focuses on a given market segment in which it applies cost leadership or differentiation strategy. Use of focus strategy helps in gaining customers’ satisfaction and loyalty. Coca Cola Company is well known of using focus strategy to enter new markets as the strategy was successfully used in China.

After establishing the market, the company uses differentiation strategy to provide unique products in the market. Most companies that use differentiation-focused strategy are able to provide a broad range of commodities in a given market. Focus strategy may however suffer changes in targeted segments and imitation.

Product Differentiation

According to Campbell et al (2002, p. 178), differentiation strategy involves creation of unique products and services in a given industry. The unique products and services have to be valued by customers as unique and the uniqueness is reflected in features, product design, brand image, network, and technology and customer service.

Companies that desire to use differentiation strategies have to develop commodities that offer unique attributes, which customers have and will value and perceive different and better than other competitors products.

The uniqueness of the commodity adds value to it and this may require a company to charge a certain premium price, following the product’s uniqueness, the company can pass the increased cost to its customers who may not find substitutes easily.

We will write a custom Essay on Management of Small Business specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More To succeed in the differentiation strategy, a firm has to invest in research to build innovative ideas; this requires the product development team to be creative and highly skilled. Due to the premium price that may be passed to customers, the sales team has to be strong and aggressive, with ability to communicate the product’s strengths to customers. The strategy also requires corporate reputation for innovation and quality.

Out of the above three competitive strategies, there is no superior strategy as all provide an organization with a competitive advantage over its competitors. It is difficult to combine the generic strategies, mixing the strategies yields either heavy costs or confusion in terms of targeted customers.

A company may use one strategy and after establishing itself in a given market aspect, it can then adopt a different strategy to improve on the existing strategy. For instance, a firm can use focus strategy and after segmenting the market, it can use differentiation or cost leadership strategy. Differentiation and cost leadership strategy cannot be combined since it is hard to differentiate products and at the same time minimize costs.

Company Markets Various markets in which an organization could sell its products exist. Geographic Segment: This segmentation divides the market into different geographical units such as neighbourhood, city, country, world regions and climate. Due to the diversity of the target markets, employee branding demands according to the geographical area to reach the entire target customer.

Behavioural Segment: This segmentation divides the market groups according to the knowledge, attitudes, uses, and responses of customers to the product (Xbox, 2011). For example, customer make purchases based on the benefits they get from the product, level of usage of the product, level of loyalty, user status, and level of their readiness to purchase.

Employees train to distinguish consumers; identify consumer needs, design products that meet consumer needs to maximize their satisfaction, pre and post purchase behaviour, choose relevant marketing strategies, and be able to influence consumers’ perception and decisions.

Psychographic Segment: This segmentation divides the target market according to the social status and lifestyle. The employee is able to know when to trigger the need of consumers, emphasize the dissatisfaction in the consumer, concentrate its efforts to its target market, and understand the changes in the consumer demands

Marketing Plan for a Kinetic Xbox 360

This section examines a marketing plan for a fictitious product Kinetic Xbox 360 an electronic device used in the gaming world.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Management of Small Business by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Product Description

Xbox is one of the two largest gaming devices used in the world. Microsoft has always been on the frontier of computer innovation since its foundation and has innovated Xbox as one of its best products. Xbox Kinetic is the first step in the next big product in gaming. Xbox has come up with a new technology that detects movements of the body and applies them as instructions when playing a game.

That is why the Kinetic Xbox has the motto, “You are the controller. No gadgets, no gizmos, just you!” It works by setting up a centrepiece that has a camera that perceives the body movements and the voice. This movements and use of the voice act as the controllers of the game. Xbox Kinect has started a mini-revolution in gaming due to aerobic portion that people have started to play video games for exercise (Xbox, 2011).

This product offers unique qualities since the controls are the body movements. Games offered by Xbox kinetic range from normal sports video games to shooter games all the way to exercise or workout routines. The sleek design of the product gives the consumer a product that does not look out of place in front of the TV.

The technology innovation was by outside companies Rare and PrimeSense who combined efforts to come up with a system that uses infrared translators of 3D body motion as controls of a game. This product obviously has a brand name associated with it, which is why its success was almost instantaneous. Xbox and Microsoft’s loyal customers trusted that the product would be just as great as their other products.

Target Market and Market Size

Market size is the number of buyers and sellers in a particular market. It measures the total value and volume of sales made to the target customers. It helps emerging enterprises and existing companies to identify the number of their potential customers in their new product or service. According to research done on June 2011, Kinetic Xbox 360 has the largest market size among other consumer software products.

It recorded a total annual sale of 5 million of motion sensing Kinetic from 3 million sales last year. This shows an increase in the annual sales. The company also produces kinetic systems whose sales increase from 2.5 million to 4.1 million sales within a period of 25 days of the marketing campaign (Warren, 2011).

This shows that the company has a greater chance of attracting and maintaining more customers to its new product. The company sold 297,000 units of Xbox 360 in April making it the most preferred and demanded software product in U.S. The products market size increases by 60% each year.

Market Segmentation

Market segmentation is a collection of prospective buyers into groups or segments with common needs and responses to a particular product or service. Given that a consumer is a unique being and tends to control all that goes on his or her mind and life in reference to a given product, the marketer has to understand the consumer and his way of thinking when identifying his target customers (West, 2010).

Market segmentation enables focus on subsets of potential customers. Proper market segmentation enables the business to achieve maximum returns from sales and marketing expenditure regardless of the nature of customers and competitors.

Behavioural Market Segment

This segmentation divides the market groups according to the knowledge, attitudes, uses, and responses of customers to the product. For example, the customer makes purchases based on the benefits they get from the product, level of usage of the product, level of loyalty, user status, and level of their readiness to purchase. For this market segment, the company intends to market Kinetic Xbox through:

Use of waves of body parts and the voice: The customer benefits from doing exercises on all the body parts and at the same time relaxing his or her mind during the entertainment. This interests the consumers to increase their purchase and usage of the product.

Ability to play games on the screen: Games are the most preferred form of entertainment. The product enables the user to play the games he or she likes since the product provides a variety of them. This helps to maintain and attract new customers due to the influence of the benefits of personal experience (Warren, 201).

Extending the product operations in the mobile phones: Most people carry their mobile phones everywhere hence introducing the product in the mobile phones means that customers can use it anywhere they need it (Warren, 2011).

Partnership with Face book: This product helps its customers to socialize with their partners and friends. It encourages customers to use the product to satisfy their needs and wants for instant communication and competition.

Customer Analysis

This analysis enables the establishment of a market that survives in the competitive market. The TV commercials advertise the product constantly to remind and inform the customers about the product. Face book enhances social networking of friends and partners.

The product targets family and friends of all gender and age and eliminates the use of education by replacing controlling devices with wave of body parts and use of the voice to control the game.

Consumers have different tastes and preferences hence understanding their needs and want more than they do created market for the product. The marketer wants to examine the effectiveness of these strategies in attracting and maintaining more customers.

Competitor Analysis

The company produces unique and quality products that differentiate the company products and services from its competitors. Its efforts to understand consumer needs and wants of change in the routine of playing games has generated a bigger market share and advanced the profits of the company (Taylor, 2011).


Parents have the chance of protecting their children from influence of the product through interacting during playing the game for example, crime, drugs, and sexually implicit images influence children under 18 years since they experiment that which they see.

This also reduces the chances of penalties for under age negative influence by the Supreme Court when reported by the parents since parents have the responsibility of controlling their children since they understand the games as well.

The parents’ preference for this product for their children will increase the market share of the product. This makes them apart of the company (Taylor, 2011). The retailers and promotional partners for example, the studios, distribute the products (Xbox, 2011).

Macro Environment Factors

These factors are beyond the company’s control hence must be considered in the decision making process since it affects the overall performance and strategies of the company (Taylor, 2011).

Political Factors

Include the pressure groups, government agencies, and the legislation limiting the activities of the company. For instance, the Supreme Court charges high penalties to the company for releasing illegal images, that is, crime and sexually implicit images to children less than 18 years.

The company introduces a product that includes the parents’ participation to ensure that they have control over their children influence. Pressure groups, for example, the ESRB control the software producers from release of images that have negative impacts on the society. The company should consider the rules and regulation set by these organizations to avoid extra expenditure on penalties.

Social Factors

These forces affect the behaviour, attitude, and preference of consumers. The company has introduced a unique product that interests many consumers. The product also includes the parents in the use of the product increasing socialization in the society. The company should consider enhancing these factors to attract and maintain more customers (Taylor, 2011).

Economic Factors

These involve factors that affect the purchasing power of customers. The price of the product is high hence reducing the willingness of the consumer to spend on the product. The company should consider lowering the prices to increase the market size to maximize its profits.

Natural Resources

They include the raw materials and the energy sources. The company has introduced batteries and 2GB broadband to enable efficient use of the product. The company should introduce more improved and durable facilities to cater for long period needs of the consumers (Xbox, 2011).

Technological Factors

These forces affect introduction of new products and creation of markets and opportunities for the product. The company produces the best technology compared to the other software companies. It is the high time the company hires qualified employees to enhance technology to compete effectively in the future with its competitors and to maintain its position in the technology sector.

Demographic Factors

These factors involve the size of population, location, race, and occupation. There is a lot of racism in U.S. hence; the company should put efforts to reduce it in order to enhance its product penetration in the market. The company should promote their products severely in dense populated areas to enlarge its market size quickly with less expense (Taylor, 2011).

SWOT Analysis


Despite the high prices, the product remains the most demanded in U.S. compared to the other software products. The has a chance of making very high profits now and in the future due to its high acceptability and adaptation by the consumers.


The high prices discourage customers from purchasing the product since games are associated with gabbling.


The product has unique characteristics that create addiction of the product enabling the company to make more profits. The product use is by anyone despite the age and gender creating greater chances for high usage of the product thus yielding more profits.


The high prices make the consumers shift from the product to that of the competitors leading to a decrease in its market share.

Media Strategies

According to Kitchen


Coca Cola Company’s Communication Message Critical Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction



List of References

Introduction The Coca Cola Company is one of the multinational firms that have learnt the art of passing communications to their clients in the form of advertisement (Gerber 2008, p. 78). One of the most interesting advertisements that this firm has used is the one targeting the African market. In this advert, this firm has developed a short play involving African youths. The youths are in a party, but they realize that they do not have the refreshment that always characterizes such parties.

While these individuals are looking for a way out, a Coca Cola van comes to the vicinity and they all start singing and running towards the can. As they unpack the drinks, it is apparent that they are happy that their problem has been solved. This short play is accompanied by a beautiful song which says, ‘I love you Africa.’ The last message in the advertisement says, ‘Live on the Coke side o life.’

Discussion The Coca Cola television commercial was developed in a way that brings out the message intended by the company to the audience. The beginning of the advertisement does not betray the possibility that this is an advertisement. It starts out as an interesting story of youths out to look for pleasure is a beautiful sandy beach. However, their joy is negatively affected by the absence of refreshment.

They look worried as it has come to their realization that happiness they were looking for cannot be achieved without the refreshments. They look confused because their location might not allow them to find an instant solution. Just as they were almost despairing, a solution comes knocking. The Coca Cola drinks therefore, are seen as a source of happiness.

This advertisement has succeeded in passing a number of communications to its consumers in the target market. The first message is that Coke is a source of happiness. Another message is that Coke will always be available when you need it the most. The advertisement also says that Coke will always penetrate to those areas you least expect it would (Handlechner 2008, p. 112).

The advert was developed in a near perfect manner. In this advert, the company makes the target market believe that Coke is a local drink that has been available to the locals for years. The advertisement also targets its largest market segment which is the youth (Gountas


Design: Effects on Themes in Theater Analytical Essay online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction





Introduction Theater is an intricate form of artistic expression. Some of its main applications include the creation of an avenue for the transfusion of culture from one generation to another and maintenance of the uniqueness of various aspects of specific societies. Plays form part of the many ways through which theater passes on culture through several generations in a society.

Although educative in nature, plays also serve as means of entertainment for most people. Themes represent the important elements that comprise a play or story. Unlike storytelling, plays bring imagery in stories to life. They enable audience to connect better with the story while obtaining entertainment as a bonus.

However, the successful execution of these functions depends on the observance of certain aspects of the play by the various involved parties. For instance, the utilization of objects such as lighting, props, and costumes has the ability to affect the audience’s perception of the play and understanding of the story.

To aid in a better elaboration of this concept, this paper explores a case study of the play Romeo and Juliet presented at the California Shakespeare Center on 25 July 2013. The essence is to analyze lighting, props, and costumes in terms of their effect on the themes in the story and a general understanding of the entire play by the audience.

Lighting One of the most important aspects in designing a set for a play is choosing the appropriate lighting for each scene. The lighting helps in the creation of the mood for the play and enhances the theme so that the audience connects with the director’s vision for the play.

For instance, dim lighting creates a romantic or sad feel to a scene in a play, thus enabling the audience to understand the story through emotional connection through enhancement via light. Therefore, it is utterly critical to make the right choice of lighting depending on various factors such as the location of the stage and the time of day the play shows.

For the play, Romeo and Juliet, a California Shakespeare Theater production hosted on the theater grounds on 25 July 2013, the directors, in conjunction with the set designers, chose to hold the play at an outdoor setting. This aspect means that factors such as natural light from the sun or moon or foggy weather came into consideration.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The crew thus had to ensure that the lighting sets the mood for each scene without interference by these circumstances. One of the main advantages for the location is that the natural surrounding creates a more realistic feeling to the play as it is easier to incorporate scenes that require nature’s raw beauty outdoors than it is to create such on an indoor setting.

The crew did a brilliant job in choosing the location as well as the time of day to show the play. The Shakespeare Center is located on a hilly serene area with lush green trees and a cool breeze. In consideration of the fact that most people refer to the play as a romantic story, albeit with a tragic ending, the scenery matches the general theme of the entire play.

The only disadvantage for the setting is the chilly weather that results from the cold evening breeze, which is typical of mountainous regions. The choice of location provided for perfect lighting for the entire play. The lighting enhanced the themes of contract between light and darkness, irony, and romance without the application of excessive effort on the part of the set designer.

For instance, in the balcony scene where Romeo meditates on Juliet’s beauty, it is easy for the audience to create the contrast between the sun and the moon as they experience both during the performance of the play by watching the sunset and the moon rise.

The time set for the play allowed the audience to ease into the play using natural evening light and gradual transition into artificial lighting, thus creating an overall natural mood to the occurrence of the play. This way, the play felt more ‘real’ as opposed to an act, hence enabling better emotional and psychological connection with the audience.

Additionally, it is much easier to introduce light in right amounts to a dark area than it is to make a bright area appropriately dark when need be, a concept that the set designers took full advantage. For instance, the use of lighting during the scene where the two lovers spend a night together, the use of appropriately dim lighting enabled the designers create a romantic feel to the episode, and matching the director’s vision for the part in the play.

The use of floodlights to create the illusion of daytime also worked perfectly in creating irony in the contrast between light and darkness. For instance, the audience experienced the difference between the romantic and seemingly rightful acts done in the scene where the lovers lay together at night and the scene immediately after, where Romeo has to leave in the morning to commence his exile, which is a seemingly shameful duty.

We will write a custom Essay on Design: Effects on Themes in Theater specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Costumes It is easy for the audience to connect with the storyline of a play just by looking at the costumes that the actors wear. The choice of costumes indicates the culture and societal norms to which the audience should relate the play. For instance, the play Romeo and Juliet is reminiscent of the Edwardian era during which the playwright, Shakespeare, lived.

Attire in the Edwardian era was indicative of society’s insistence on chastity as one of its most important moral values, especially for women, and class for men. Most plays’ directors and designers who organize plays based on Shakespeare’s script comply with this mode of dress as a communication tool with the audience and project themes in the story in general.

However, the director, Shana Cooper, with assistance from the costume designer, Christine Crook, decided to take a different direction by using modern designs for the play apparel as opposed to costumes that indicate the story’s expected cultural background. The main advantage for use of such costumes concerning the audiences is that it enables them to apply a more modern perspective to the story as opposed to the application of imagination as is usually the case in most Shakespeare plays.

By choosing outfits such as jeans, sneakers, and dresses with modern designs, the costume designer appeals to the audiences’ experiences as a basis for their understanding of the story as is the director’s plan, which is easier for most people in the current era. In the play, the costume designer applied the use of fabrics such as satin and lace with a modern cut to reflect Juliet’s class as opposed to depending on the overall medieval designs.

In addition, the length of dresses for female actors in the play remains below knee length to embody the theme of chastity present in plays with older settings. Also notable in Juliet’s costume is the designer’s use of sheer fabric that creates a sense of rebellion and indicates the character’s age without compromising on the elegance representative of the character’s social class in the play.

Although the use of modern outfits such as costumes adds a new twist to the story, it also alters the mindset of the audience regarding the concept of the story. The original story reflects on the culture of the Edwardian era and the consequences that came with the practice of society’s norms at the time. However, in Shana Coopers’ twist, that concept is lost through the application of modern apparel to a classic story.

Another disadvantage of using a different range of costumes is that some of the themes lose their meaning in the story. For instance, chastity decreases in importance in relation to the story when the audience can see through the main character’s dress, thus presenting a very different ideology from what Shakespeare had in mind.

The inclusion of nudity, albeit of a mild nature, when Romeo and Juliet spend the night together also creates a different perspective of norms that were morally acceptable in the story. Although the scene is more believable to the audience, it alters their perception on discretion concerning sexual behavior.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Design: Effects on Themes in Theater by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Overall, although the costumes add a modern twist to the story, they also take away some aspects that are unique to the play, such as the cultural nature of the society that the story represents.

Props Props are objects that actors use on stage to aid in their performance, especially in the expression of various concepts in a play. They are essential in creating a better understanding of the story for the audience through reflecting the director’s vision for the play. Most enactments of Romeo and Juliet create scenes that represent the setting of the Edwardian era, which mainly consisted of buildings that reflected social stratification on the society.

For instance, the Capulet and the Montague families in the play represent two feuding families from the same social class. Therefore, in most cases, plays include props that indicate their wealthy status, such as antique furniture and elegant buildings with balconies with the most common being castle designed props. Although seemingly irrelevant with regard to the storyline, they are crucial in creating the appropriate mental picture for the audience.

The overall application of the props on set enhanced themes such as danger and violence, although the designer failed to exploit the full potential of the props in the creation of a realistic experience throughout the story. Although the application of an outdoor setting is creative in making the mood for the play, the set designer, Daniel Ostling, fails to utilize the appropriate application of props in the play.

Such oversight diminishes the importance and portrayal of themes, such as wealth, which are important in the understanding of the reason behind the constant violence between the two families. Instead of props that indicate majestic buildings, the set designer uses a makeshift balcony and a ladder that in no way portrays elegance.

It is difficult for an audience to imagine Romeo as a man from a rich family when the actor portraying the character stands on a plain platform in place of a balcony. Additionally, in doing so, the designer exhibits his or her assumption that the audience is conversant with the story, thus denying the portion of the audience who are experiencing the play for the first time some important details to the story.

Another disadvantage of using inadequate props for the play is that they change the audience’s perception of the performance. Most actors endear to make their performances feel as real as possible by telling the story behind the play as best they can. However, by using substandard props, the set designer reduces the performances of the actors to mere illustrations.

The downside to such action is that such an audience may only appreciate the experience enough to watch the performance once and may not recommend the same to others, hence reducing revenue generation for the theater and esteem for the actors. Not all props in the play were substandard.

However, some props were impressive, hence creating a feeling of exhilaration for the audience. For instance, the use of a real fire pit added the realness of the story, and thus making the performance more realistic. The utilization of an outdoor setup added to the possibility of creativity for the set designer in enhancing themes such as violence and danger.

Conclusion Although the play provided much entertainment and observed a majority of the essential components of the story, the use of lighting, choice of costumes, and props largely affected the audience’s perception of the story in the play. Some of the effects were positive while others were negative in the sense that they altered the overall story and the subsequent lessons the author sought to impart. In essence, the play was a nice performance, with a modern twist to a classic tale.


Civil Movements: Discrimination and Its Consequences Research Paper writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Synopsis of the Problem

Achievements of Civil Movements

Problems Encountered


Works Cited

Introduction Since time in memorial, different groups of people in human history have received varied treatment based on their gender, race and ethnicity. This means that some injustices and inequalities exist in various parts of the world. In this regard, human rights groups and civil movements have emerged to challenge the existing social structure and social arrangements that segregate some members of society.

By definition, civil liberties are those rights that a person should be allowed to exercise without restriction. In other words, they are natural and granted naturally. The UN charter states that individuals must exercise their rights without state intervention.

Conversely, state sovereignty is incompatible with individual freedoms and rights. In the United States, the constitution allows people to participate in public activities without discrimination based on either race or gender.

The constitution was amended to suit the desires and wishes of the majority. After the American Civil War, the US government came up with laws that would bar some states from exercising political injustices as regards to voting and electioneering process in general. Various groups have stood up firmly to demand for their rights, including the 1960s civil groups.

Even though the US constitution and various acts of congress condemn discrimination and injustice, various groups are still faced with a problem of domination and sub-ordination in key sectors of the economy. Few people control the means of production while men own the majority of societal wealth. Some groups such as women and the youths are not incorporated in political processes as equal partners.

Their roles are not clearly defined, which leaves something to be desired. This article addresses the problem of discrimination and its consequences. This would be an attempt to explain the existing injustices in various sectors of the economy and in the society generally.

Synopsis of the Problem The main problems that breed injustices in the American society are male patriarchy, unequal economic relations (capitalism), political participation and racial discrimination. The three problems are closely related in that one affects the other. The black race and women are more affected because their culture is never respected.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Furthermore, they are the proletariat meaning that the bourgeoisie uses them in acquiring power and material possessions. Women are always relegated to the private domain of the home while the black race is forced to work for the white race in order to make a living (Azevedo 54). The unequal relation between men and women and between the blacks and whites is a major problem that concerns the civil movements.

In fact, the majority of civil groups are formed to address the problem of unequal distribution of wealth and the position of women and the blacks in society. It is noted that the blacks were shipped from Africa in the 16th to 19th centuries to work for the white race. This implies that they were treated in the same way as stocks.

Human beings were elements that could be used in trade, just as gold, silver and coffee. Slaves went through unpalatable conditions while in the hands of white masters. They could be beaten, overworked, harassed sexually and in extreme cases, exterminated.

Africans could not tolerate these conditions, which forced them to engage whites and the government in conflicts in order to free themselves. They formed various civil groups that would liberate them from the house of bondage. The civil movements were formed in various places within the country but the major ones were created in 1960s. The civil groups gave Africans and other neglected groups a chance to articulate their issues.

Through the groups, various reforms were made, including constitutional amendments. The civil organizations were first controlled by the government but were later on allowed to operate as private entities. Most groups were controlled by religious organizations and faiths.

Maulana Karenga observes that the major aim of civil groups was to break down impediments that affected socio-political and economic participation within the US society (185). The organizations intended to remove penalties and societal barriers that segregated people based on race and gender. Africans in America had tried to gain political and economic freedom for over a century, being traced back to the Civil War.

This means that in American history, blacks have never enjoyed their freedoms as regards to political participation such as voting for preferred candidates, being voted for, being appointed to key government positions and being involved in governmental decision-making. In the economic front, they were included in the financial system as underdogs.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Civil Movements: Discrimination and Its Consequences specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Though Africans were making some progress pertaining to their rights and freedoms, the southerners had formulated stricter rules and regulations that could not allow blacks to interact freely in society. The southerners perpetually subjugated and oppressed the civil society. This means that people were not allowed to assemble or move freely.

In the south, Africans could not access equal opportunities in terms of education and social interaction. Public services such as schools, hospitals and other recreational facilities were not available to Africans. Racial discrimination was practiced in all parts of the country. For instance, those individuals who escaped from the south encountered similar problems elsewhere.

The society had an issue with the black race because no one appreciated the fact that each person has an equal opportunity in life. The south implemented unpopular laws, which were oppressive in nature. They were referred to as Crow’s laws. It is evident that the society disliked the black race. The police implemented the law separately. Strict measures were applied to Africans while the whites were favored in many occasions.

In the labor market, blacks never feared any better. They were allocated inferior jobs and were subjected to poor working conditions, without proper housing policies. White citizens harassed blacks but the law enforcement agencies never acted to avert the situation. Blacks were subjected to public beating or were arrested without proper reason in case found intermingling with the whites.

Achievements of Civil Movements Africans in America managed to change some policies that infringed on their rights and freedoms. Unity is one of the factors that helped Africans since they would act as an entity but not as individuals. This ensured that they were not victimized and harassed. The first break through was witnessed in 1909 when the National Association for the Advancement of Colored People (NAACP) was formed.

The organization was formed in response to the 1908 riots that occurred in Illinois State. The organization aimed at improving the lifestyles of Africans by condemning racial segregation. However, as Maulana Karenga puts it, the movement was ineffective because it was controlled by the white race. This means that it could not apply techniques such as violent rioting meaning that it was not militant.

To some extent, the movement managed to put off repressive Crow’s laws that permitted the lynching of Africans in public places. The activities of blacks were boosted in 1950s when the high court decided that laws discriminating blacks be put off.

In the education front, the court rejected the south’s move to have a separate educational curriculum for white and black students. It can be concluded that NAACP managed to convince the government to allow Africans to vote. This played a key role in abolishing segregation and racial violence.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Civil Movements: Discrimination and Its Consequences by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Another important achievement was witnessed in 1956 when rioters stormed the streets demanding for equal representation and freedom of movement. The protests took place at Montgomery Bus station where the blacks decided to change the seating arrangements, which was also racially segregated. For a long time, the rights of blacks had been infringed because they were not allowed to decide where to seat when travelling.

Africans decided not to use bus services and opted for other means of transportation for over a year. This was a blow to the whites. Whites had no option but to grant independence to black passengers. The achievements at Montgomery encouraged other blacks to take part in the same inconsistencies hence granting Africans more powers all over the country.

Civil movements were transformed with the emergency of leaders such as Martin Luther king Jr. The leader was very dynamic as regards to political activities in the entire US. Luther King ensured that blacks made a progress in the political field. The activist was involved in the Montgomery bus strike and other important activities that followed. In particular, he contributed in the establishment of the southern Christian Leadership.

In 1963, he participated in a peaceful demonstration that serves as an icon to the activities of the civil groups. It was at the same time that he gave a famous speech titled ‘I have a dream’. The contents of the speech inspired so many people in the entire US. Luther King was one of the best orators since he commanded a high respect among both whites and blacks.

During the Washington demonstration, he led a group that consisted of over 250, 0000 people. The 1963 demonstration wanted the government to check on police brutality, segregation in public schools and provision of an effective job program.

Africans had no jobs, apart from being harassed by the police. It is unfair to mention civil movements in the US without describing the efforts of Martin Luther King Jr. He was rewarded with a noble peace prize due to his incomparable contributions to the activities of civil organizations. Martin Luther King ensured that each person was allowed to exercise his or her right without state intervention.

Problems Encountered One of the major problems was resistance from whites and government. The activities of blacks were interpreted as a direct violation of law. The police could frequently corner African leaders and harass them thoroughly. Whites ridiculed Africans, terming them as failures. It was very difficult for Africans to convince other races that each person had a right and a role to play in society.

During the development of the movement, Africans were perpetually denied services such as shopping. This implies that whites could not sell anything to Africans. In other words, the civil movements had no government support. They had to fight it alone, which proved to be tricky.

Furthermore, Africans had no resources to be utilized in coordinating their activities. Calling for mass action demands capital. However, Africans soldiered on with their efforts despite lacking enough capital (Jacob 90).

For feminist civil movements, the major problem was unity. Women were not united because their objectives were not uniform. Black women were much concerned about living standards and improvement of social services such as healthcare, medication, childcare services and food security. On the other hand, academic feminists wanted the state to recognize academic literature formulated by women.

They proposed that feminist courses should be incorporated in the national curricula. In this field, feminine courses are currently offered in various institutions of higher learning. White feminism wanted the government to institute laws that could provide them with equal opportunities.

They were also concerned about domestic violence where women were forced to have sex with their male counterparts. Conflict of interests could be singled out as the major problem encountered by women in their quest to freedom (McPherson 89).

Conclusion Overall, the civil rights movements have helped black people and other minorities achieve their dreams and goals. The civil groups insist that an individual has the right to do as he or she wishes as long as he or she does not violate the law. In this regard, each person has the potential to fulfill his or her wishes. The state should only act as a means to individual fulfillment. This has seen many blacks participate in elections actively.

It is not surprising that the current US president is a black. This is highly attributable to the activities of civil movements since independence. However, racial and gender discrimination is still eminent in society. However, more needs to be done to eliminate the problem.

Works Cited Azevedo, Joaquim. Africana studies: a survey of Africa and the African Diaspora. 3rd ed. Carolina: Carolina Academic Press, 2005. Web.

Jacob, Harriet. Incidents in the life of a slave girl. Harvard: Harvard University Press, 2007. Print.

Karenga, Maulana. Introduction to Black studies. 2nd ed. Michigan: University of Sankore Press, 2010. Web.

McPherson, James. Battle Cry of Freedom: The Civil War Era. Oxford: Pulitzer Prize, 2003. Print.


Electronic Cigarettes: Could they Help University Students Give Smoking Up? Exploratory Essay essay help: essay help

The Habit of Smoking Reasons why University Students Smoke

University students use smoking to alleviate stress from constant studying and the constant pressures in their social lives. Others start smoking due to the peer pressure from their friends. Students, especially those who suffer from low self esteem, are the most likely to start smoking in an effort to blend in with “the crowd”, who in this case are their peers (Zachary


1.Compare and contrast those ways of knowing with the methodology of early pioneers of psychology as a science: Wundt and Essay college essay help near me

1.Compare and contrast those ways of knowing with the methodology of early pioneers of psychology as a science: Wundt and James. How are they similar and how are they different? 2.What are at least two concepts from this week’s lecture that were new to you and changed the way you thought about academic and scientific research? 3.What are some early ideas that you have for your research paper topics and how do you imagine that this week’s lecture might help you to study those topics? this is the lecture video research paper video topics


Language Intervention – Accents and Dialects Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Dialects and accents

Factors that influence the emergence of new dialects

Importance of dialects and accents in society



Introduction Language of any culture has over the year’s undergone changes in varying degrees. This is due to the change in lifestyles that has seen new vocabularies introduced into the existing language. Such alterations have contributed to the rise of dialects in the respective languages used across the world. While most people believe that an accent is something that other people have, the reality is that everyone has an accent.

Accents allow us to make a distinction between people from different regions. A dialect and an accent can be differentiated by listening to the changes in vocabulary and the changes in the sound of a speaker. This paper will look at the role of regional accents and dialects in the modern society, highlighting their contribution in our lives.

Dialects and accents An accent is socially distinct. It affects the way we interact with other people. According to Wells, people rely on a speaker’s speech to try and identify where the person grew up and the region you come from1. This is because a persons accent is a powerful indicator of his/her geographical identity.

An accent according to most people is a pronunciation that is different from their own. The accent may be considered as inferior or superior by other people, but it may be socially distinct.

An accent is also geographically distinct; this could be endorsed by the use of words such as “a Scottish accent” or a “British accent” while referring to other peoples accents. These tags have various meanings and vary depending on where we live.

Most linguists share the point of view that every speaker of a language speaks it with an accent. The accent acquired is highly influenced by the persons geographical location. After studying the geographical patterns of different countries in Europe, Wells, notes that it is possible to plot a map showing the geographical patters of people, using their geographical distribution.2

Over the years though, it has become increasingly difficult to link the various accents used with certain geographical locations. This is due to the geographical mobility of the population.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The result is that we can no longer use the geographical distribution model to pin point the language distribution across the different regions. Wells notes that people are moving from place to place diluting the geographical distribution that existed. We are more likely to make generalization about which regions an accent belongs.3 The model tends to fail due to the lack of local geographical variation within each country.

Countries around the world have quite a high degree of social variation in accent attributed among other factors, the increased mobility. Among the countries with such social variation include: Australia, New Zealand and South Africa. It is important to note that the characteristics thought to be ethnic are in fact geographical.

Factors that influence the emergence of new dialects Community practice has contributed to the emergence of new dialects. Denham


Causes of Civil War in America Research Paper essay help online: essay help online

The source of Civil War in America could have resulted from various reasons. For instance, slavery in the U.S greatly triggered the eruption of Civil War in America. It started in Virginia as early as 1619. Before the Civil War, the conflict between the northern and southern American States revolved around the issue of slavery.

The southern politicians managed to maintain the control of the federal government throughout the first half of the 19th century by assuring the southerners to defend the abolition of the slavery in those states that supported the use of slave labor in the American cotton plantations.

Despite the fact that most presidents from the United States of America came from the south, the southern politicians were generally concerned about maintaining a balance of power within the senate. The balance was important to them to maintain the use of slave labor.

However, the challenge to maintain a balance between those states that supported the liberty of slaves as well as those that supported slavery heightened as more states were included into the union. In 1820, Maine joined the union as a free state, while Missouri joined the union as a slave trade.

The balance between those states that supported the use of slave labor in American plantations and those that opposed it was compromised in 1850 when the union allowed California to join it as a free state in exchange of laws that were meant to enforce slavery. The balance was further worsened when Minnesota and Oregon states that supported liberty of slaves joined the union later on (Hickman 4).

The diverse views that existed between the northern and southern states about slavery symbolized the philosophical as well as economical differences that existed between the northern and southern states.

Whereas the northern states believed in industrialization, infrastructural growth, influx of Europeans immigrations, high birth rates as well as urbanization, the southern states embraced agrarian plantations economy that was sparsely populated.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The high boost in northern population together with the incorporation of more free states in the union increased the chances of an election of a northern president who was anti-slavery (Hickman 4).

There was a lot of anxiety in the elections held on1860 which resulted from the division of the democrats. The absence of a candidate with a national appeal signaled an impending change. Abraham Lincoln was the candidate who was vying for the presidency as a republican, while Stephen Douglas was for the northern Democrats.

The southerners nominated John C.Breckinridge and the Border States formed a new party referred to as the Constitutional party and nominated John C. Bell as their own candidate. After the elections Abraham Lincoln was declared the winner of the north, while Breckinridge won in the south, Bell the winner of the Border States, while Douglas won the Missouri and New Jersey states.

Because of the high population that existed in the northern states as a result of their well formulated policies that encouraged urbanization, high birth rate as well as high influx of European immigrations, Abraham Lincoln managed to lead all the candidates in votes. The victory of Lincoln brought a lot of apprehension in the union since he was anti-slavery.

The southerners had always feared any probability of the union government being under the control of anti-slavery. The victory of Abraham Lincoln resulted to secession of those states that supported slavery from the union. Those states that declared a downturn from the union included states such as Carolina, Florida, Mississippi, Alabama, Texas, Louisiana as well as Georgia ( par.3).

The splitting of the union resulted to an eruption of a Civil War in America. It is believed to be the bitterest conflict that has ever occurred in the United States of America. The cause of the Civil War in the United States of America was highly attributed to the election of Abraham Lincoln and in particular as a result of the significant lifestyle difference that existed between the northern and the southern states.

The northern states of America were heavily industrialized with factories and manufacturing was their main occupation. Conversely, the southern states relied heavily on agriculture. They had established big cotton plantations that demanded large number of workers to provide labor when planting as well as while harvesting the cotton (Hickman 5).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Causes of Civil War in America specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More While slave trade was declared illegal as early as 1800, the slaves that were working on American cotton plantations were not freed. The Northern states pushed for complete abolishment of slavery since they did not require slaves to work in their industries.

The northern states were accommodative and had assimilated the concept of industrialization from the European nations as well as from those Europeans who had migrated in the states. On the other hand, the southerners were conservative and greatly opposed the influx immigration of the Europeans in their states.

Their rigidity and inability to accommodate new people and new ideas developed the southerners into conservative people who lacked a vision of the impending change that was sure to come in the near future. Therefore, the southerners can be highly blamed to be the cause of Civil War in America ( par.5).

The southern states continued to use slaves to provide free and compulsory labor in their plantations despite the abolition of slavery as early as 1800. They feared that the ban of slave labor will result to severe economic impacts on them, since they greatly relied on slaves to provide labor in their plantations. On the other hand, the southerners should have accepted the abolition of slave trade early enough to avoid such incidents.

They should have been aware that the use of free and compulsory labor could not last forever. In addition, they had enough time to strategize on how to adapt alternative methods to provide labor in their plantations.

Sixty years after the abolition of slavery was enough time for the southerners to transform their farming methodologies. For instance, they could have negotiated with the slaves on how to compensate them after working in their farms, instead of pressurizing them to work in their plantations for free. The election of Abraham Lincoln meant doom to the southerners. This was because he was opposed to the concept of slavery.

Thus, that is the reason that prompted those states that supported slave trade to opt to break away from supporting him. After receding, they formed the Confederate States of America. Subsequently, this resulted to the eruption of the civil war that lasted for approximately 4 years. The War consisted of more than 50 main battles and over 5000 minor combats. The battles resulted to over 600,000 deaths.

Nevertheless, the union soldiers were more powerful and possessed more resources. For this reason, they eventually defeated the Confederate soldiers. On April 9, 1865 General Lee who was the commander leading the Confederate troops surrendered and thus the war came to an end. Five days after the end of the War, a treaty was signed and President Abraham Lincoln was assassinated by southerner sympathizers (Hoemann par. 5).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Causes of Civil War in America by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited “U.S. Civil War.” 2011. Web.

Hickman, Kennedy. “American Civil War: Causes.” 2011.Web.

Hoemann, George. “American Civil War.” 2011. Web. “The American Civil War.” 2011. Web.


Ethical Relativism in Human Rights Analytical Essay writing essay help

Table of Contents Nature of the Human Society


Human Rights Progress


Works Cited

Contemporary ethical relativism can be traced to Edward Westermarck’s work in the book, “Ethical relativity and the development of Ethical ideas” (MacKinnon 230). Relativism defines the variations in levels of truth or principles.

This is a philosophical concept that acknowledges varied levels of human rights, depending on the situation or circumstance. Proponents of subjectivism have voiced several arguments against ethical relativism because relativism is associated with the denial of objectivity (Frederick 187).

Human right arguments against relativism are supported by the fact that human rights are normally perceived to be universal. From this understanding, people who voice the opinion that different degrees of human rights should be acknowledged often support the ethical relativism concept.

The ethical relativism debate is revolutionary because most of our global principles and ideas about human rights keep changing by the day. For instance, modern-day human rights principles are more sophisticated than conventional human rights principles.

For instance, sexuality has consistently changed across human generations. Currently, there are gay rights, homosexual rights and such like issues, which were never present before. Our ideas and values as a society have therefore changed over the years.

The fragmentation of the society is also another important issue to be understood in the study of ethical relativism. In fact, the fragmentation of the society is at the center of this debate because our beliefs, values and ideals are different. For instance, what may be perceived to be normal in Asia may not be normal in America. Similarly, what may be perceived to be normal in Africa may not be normal in Europe.

For example, certain cultural practices in Africa and Asia (such as female genital mutilation) is perceived to be a normal cultural practice in some parts of Africa and Asia but the same practice may be termed a violation of human rights in Europe or America. The ethical relativism debate is therefore a dicey issue in today’s society and the entire controversy is getting more complicated with the evolution of human ideals.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Based on this understanding, this paper argues against the fact that contemporary ethical relativism should be included in modern-day human right movements. To support this point of view, the nature of human society, the standardization of human rights and the progress of human rights will be analyzed.

Nature of the Human Society Proponents of contemporary ethical relativism argue that the human society is inherently divided and independent. In this regard, they propose that human rights should acknowledge these distinctions and apply a fragmented application of human rights principles.

This argument is flawed because when studying the human society, the society is not perceived to be dotted with racial, gender, cultural and such like distinctions (Raven 3). Therefore, the society is not defined by these elements.

In the evolution of the human right movement, the society is not perceived from its “fragmented” point of view. Essentially, human rights tend to refer to all human beings because there is no person who is better or less human than the other is. People live in one society and encounter almost the same experiences in life.

For instance, the same reasons that a society may perceive a cultural practice to be unethical is the same reason another society may see the same practice to be unethical. For instance, some societies are known to preserve life more than others do.

However, other societies may perceive death to be a normal occurrence and therefore, there is a possibility that human rights implementation may not be as effective as societies that have a high regard for human life. Nonetheless, though there may be variations in perception, the same principle of life remains the same.

Life is precious for every human being. It would be a misconceived idea to believe that life is important for one group in the society, while it is not important for another group. The idea of ethical relativism therefore stands to be reviewed because human rights are not relative; they are the same across all divisions of the society (Raven 3).

We will write a custom Essay on Ethical Relativism in Human Rights specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Standardization Ethical relativism is normally considered a philosophy that emanates from the concept of circumstance. For instance, ethical thoughts are borne from a predetermined way of doing things (which may vary across circumstances and societies). As a result, ethical relativism is a concept that depends on the actions of others.

Considering people have different perceptions and actions, there is no standard way of perceiving ethical actions. In other words, there is no single measure of comparison to understand one ethical practice viz-a-viz another (Globe Ethics 1). For instance, on the political front, China and the US have adopted different perspectives of democracy and its gains.

With the growing emergence of China as a world super power, there have been growing ideas that democracy does not entirely amount to economic prosperity. A comparison is hereby made between China and the US because China does not practice democracy in the same way the US does. Conversely, there is no standardized measure of determining success.

Human rights tend to instill a sense of standardization across societies because it is universal (Donnelly 1). The concept of ethical relativism fails the standardization benchmark because we cannot determine what a human right is and what is not.

In fact, if the same concept of ethical relativism were left to infiltrate the human rights movement, the entire concept of human rights would fade. Instead, there would be a fragmented application of human rights, where societies violate the rights of individuals and hide behind the fact that human rights are relative.

There have been many occasions where several governments have committed human right violations in the world. Such crimes have been witnessed in Yugoslavia, Darfur (Sudan), Liberia among other places. A lack of standardization (like the ethical relativism concept suggests) would mean that such human rights violations will be unpunished.

For instance, the establishment of the international criminal court is the embodiment of universal human rights, which offers a benchmark for standardization. Therefore, regardless of their locality, people can still be held accountable for human right violations.

For instance, in the recent past, the world has been treated to episodes of former presidents (such as Charles Taylor) being taken to the international criminal court to answer against charges of human rights. Even though the ICC court is based in Hague, leaders all over the world have to answer to it.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ethical Relativism in Human Rights by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The universality of the human right applications has therefore brought accountability in the world. If ethical relativism were left to infiltrate the human rights movement, human right violators would not be held accountable for their actions.

Human Rights Progress The concept of ethical relativism not only stipulates that we cannot make comparisons regarding different ethical principles; it also stipulates that we cannot make comparisons regarding human right progress across time (Donnelly 1). In this situation, it is difficult to establish if the world is making progress regarding human rights or not.

In a world of relativism, it would almost be impossible to establish if there is societal development, or not. In fact, the entire concept of civilization would disappear because civilization is the growth in societal ideals and values across time (Donnelly 15). Moreover, civilization is a common benchmark of the society where different societies evaluate their progress across time.

The same principle is applicable in human rights because the concept of human right is progressive. In fact, the essence of this paper is to evaluate the influence of ethical relativism on the human rights movement.

In a world of ethical relativism, there would be no human right movement because the concept of time would be eliminated. Comprehensively, it would be correct to note that ethical relativism does not make sense of human rights progress.

Conclusion Weighing the arguments on ethical relativism, this paper notes that the concept of ethical relativism should have no place in human rights movements. Ethical relativism misrepresents the very nature of the human society because it introduces a fragmented nature in our human form, which does not exist.

In addition, contemporary ethical relativism introduces the element of variation in the application of human rights, thereby alienating the concept of accountability in the human society. In such a situation, it would be difficult to hold people accountable for their actions.

Lastly, this paper explains that, contemporary ethical relativism is insensitive to the philosophy of human rights progress. A sense of stagnancy is therefore likely to be experienced in such a case. Comprehensively, factoring the above arguments, contemporary ethical relativism should have no place in modern-day human rights movement.

Works Cited Donnelly, Jack. Universal Human Rights In Theory And Practice. Cornell: Cornell University Press, 2003. Print.

Frederick, Robert. A Companion To Business Ethics. London: John Wiley


Economy of United Arab Emirates Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Socio-Economic Background

Oil and Gas in the UAE

Non-Oil Sectors

Current and future of UAE



Introduction United Arab Emirates (UAE) is a federal state located in the Middle East region. It is precisely found in the southeast of the Arabian Peninsula in Western Asia on the Persian Gulf and it borders Oman and Saudi Arabia (USA International Publications, 2007).

Moreover, the federal neighbors Iraq, Kuwait, Bahrain, Qatar, and Iran. UAE became a federal in 1971, and the states that make up UAE federal state include Abu Dhabi, Ajman, Dubai, Furairah, Ras al-Khaimah, Sharjah, and Umm al-Quwain (USA International Publications, 2007). Today, UAE has its capital in Abu Dhabi, which also acts as the political, economic, and social administrative center of the federal state.

The official language of the federal is Arabic, while Islam is the official religion. The form of government is a constitutional monarchy, where the current president is Khalifa bin Zayed Al Nahayan, while the prime minister is known as Mohammed bin Rashid Al Maktoum (USA International Publications, 2007).

UAE’s per capita GDP is estimated to be at par with those of leading West European nations, while the growth of economy has largely been associated with oil revenue and increasing service sector economy.

Socio-Economic Background Before the formation of the federal states and the discovery of oil within the UAE federal, the country’s economy depended largely on subsistence agriculture, nomadic animal husbandry, extraction of pearls and the trade in pearls, fishing, and seafaring (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

During this period, the country was ‘unaware’ of oil resources and therefore, what was witnessed was limited exploitation of natural resources in the country, which later resulted into emergence and continued exercise of simple subsistence economy (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

Economic development for the country is traced to the formulation of The UAE First Development Decade, which was formulated in 1970, prior to the formation of the federal states on 2 December 1971 (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This was the moment the federal established roadmap for the development of its formal economic, social, and political institutions and coincided with massive increase in extraction and production of oil resources. The economic growth of the country was to be boosted in 1973 when the world witnessed massive increase in oil prices, a situation that led to increased oil export by the federal state (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

Since its formation, UAE has enjoyed relative political stability, where political structures in the country appear to resonate well among the different ethnic groups in the country.

Moreover, the country’s political class has constantly tried to enhance equitable distribution of oil resources and this has led to development and high performance of social and economic infrastructure, high salaries for workers, and high standard of social services such as health and education (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

This has raised living standards in the country and effectively reducing the likelihood of internal political and social unrest. Moreover, the government of the federal since its formation has continuously promoted aspects of human rights, and this, in essence, has led to promotion and maintenance of political and social stability (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

Since its formation, UAE Federal State has been trying to promote and develop key economic sectors in the country. However, the dominant economic sector, from which the federal continues to generate high revenues, is oil, gas and mineral economy (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001). The country is perceived to contain vast reserves of oil, both offshore and onshore.

At the moment, UAE is believed to be drilling and producing about 2 million barrels of oil daily, although with enhanced technology, the country can produced up to 3 million barrels of oil a day (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

According to 2000 estimates, it was established that UAE has in possession around 98.8 billion barrels of oil which makes the country as the third largest oil reserves in the world after Saudi Arabia and Iraq (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Economy of United Arab Emirates specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More At the same time, UAE’s oil reserves are estimated to constitute 10% of overall global oil reserves as per 2000 estimates (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001). Given its daily production of oil, UAE’s oil reserves have been estimated to have a lifespan of around 123 years before they can be depleted.

Natural gases constitute another resource that UAE economy depends on. For example, in 2000, it was estimated that UAE has an approximately 6 trillion cubic meters of proven gas (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001). At the same time, it was established that the country possess about 4% of total gas reserves. As a result, UAE is ranked at position four in the entire world as far as gas production and reserves are concerned.

Daily production of gas in the country is estimated to be about 2940 million cubic feet, where if the current daily gas production is maintained, the reserves of gas the country holds will last for around 60 years (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

Other natural minerals that are vital to the economy of the country can be subdivided into three categories: rocks, sand and soils, and metals. Rocks and sand have been exploited where they are widely used in the construction industry.

Although still poorly performing, agriculture constitutes another sector to the economy, which contributes about 4% to the GDO (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001).

Agriculture development in the country has largely been limited with scarcity of land, harsh environmental conditions, and limited water resources (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001). However, the government for the last 30 years has been increasing efforts to develop agriculture sector through numerous incentives and support programmes.

Service sector is also growing as one avenue contributing to the growth of UAE economy.

Today, the country GDP has been boosted by service sector economy elements like: commerce; hospitality industry, comprising restaurants and hotels; transport sector; storage sector; communications; finance and insurance; real estates and related government services (Al-Abed and Hellyer, 2001). At the moment, it is estimated that the service sector contribute about 40% to the GDP of the country.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Economy of United Arab Emirates by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Oil and Gas in the UAE In 1981, there was the establishment of the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC), which brought together six countries of Middle East involved in the production of hydrocarbons resources (Fasano-Filho and Schaechter, 2003). The six countries that make up the GCC block include Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, and the United Arab Emirates (Fasano-Filho and Schaechter, 2003).

The countries came together with the aim of helping each other grow and progress economically. In order to achieve these economic goals, the GCC Block aimed at coordinating country members’ financial, monetary, and banking policies that was aimed at establishing a common monetary union (Fasano-Filho and Schaechter, 2003).

The countries came together largely given their commonality in aspects of politics, cultural, language, economic background, and religious aspects. Involved countries entered into agreement that aimed at cooperating in matters of economy.

One of the major achievements of the GCC Block has been realized through introduction of single currency in the GCC member states based on the commonality aspects member countries share.

The major objective for this initiative is to see member countries build on a considerable degree of monetary convergence in about ten years to come that is characterized by high degree of exchange rate stability, general low inflation rates, and co-moving interest rates (Fasano-Filho and Schaechter, 2003).

At the same time, GCC Countries as part of their cooperation set plans to integrate their stock markets, where already some attempts have been made towards this goal.

Initially, two plans were available for implementation and they included merging all the stock markets into a regional bourse and also connecting them and establishing common unified rules and regulations.

Member countries were to operate within the regulations in their individual stock exchange and this in turn was to make it possible for the citizens of the member countries to trade in stocks under similar rules (Fasano-Filho and Schaechter, 2003).

The role of this regional block to member countries can be perceived within the purviews the countries have made as far as economic integration is concerned. The preoccupations among member countries have been premised on the need to achieve economic and financial integration.

Numerous efforts have been made by member countries and such efforts include lifting formal impediments that earlier restricted free movement of national goods, labor, and capital across the countries. Subsequently, the countries have been able to develop similar policy preferences in key areas of concern.

For example, the countries have been successful in maintaining price and nominal exchange rate stability, together with an open trade regime and liberal capital flows. Moreover, the countries of GCC have been able to initiate in place an open-border foreign labor policy that aims to ensure there is sufficient supply of labor across the countries.

It should be remembered that, activities carried out by GCC countries has not just concentrated at seeing growth in hydrocarbons sector but has also accelerated efforts at initiating structural and institutional reforms aimed at encouraging diversification, enhancing non-oil growth, and also developing human capital (Fasano-Filho and Schaechter, 2003).

As a result of these efforts to promote common economic goals among the GCC Countries, the member countries have been able to increase their GDP per capita by about 32% especially from 2002-2007 (Saif, 2009).

Oil producing countries across the world have for a long time operated under the umbrella of the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC), which in its entity is a permanent, intergovernmental organization (OPEC, N.d).

It was established in 1960 at conference held in Baghdad where the pioneer countries of the organization included: Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, Saudi Arabia, and Venezuela (OPEC, N.d).

Later on, these countries were joined by other oil producing countries such as Libya, United Arab Emirates (UAE), Algeria, Nigeria, Ecuador, Angola, and Gabon (OPEC, N.d). Each of these countries joined at its own specific year with the earliest being Libya in 1962 while the latest to join being Angola in 2007 (OPEC, N.d).

Furthermore, countries like Indonesia and Gabon have since suspended their membership in the organization. OPEC mission is integrated in its broad objective, which is aimed at; co-coordinating and unifying petroleum policies among the member countries with sole goal of enabling the members secure fair and stable prices for their petroleum products (OPEC, N.d).

Moreover, the organization works to enhance members achieve an efficient, economic, and regular supply of petroleum to the consuming nations through the established policies to enhance efficient oil production. The policies adopted are largely aimed at ensuring the countries receive fair return on capital they have invested in the industry (OPEC, N.d).

OPEC operations and mandate in the wider environment of ‘petro-politics’ and ‘petro-economies’ has been to see oil producing countries receive benefit is for their hydrocarbons resources. In this way, OPEC has been at the forefront in advocating and leading the pace in setting oil prices at international level aimed at benefiting member countries.

Moreover, the organization is actively involved in regulating oil production among member countries through quotas and this is precisely aimed at ensuring members reap maximum benefits from their oil resources.

OPEC activities in the wider perspective have been viewed to constitute those of cartel tendencies, where the organization has actively participated in activities such as initiating pricing system for crude oil in the global market, introducing group production ceiling, initiating reference basket pricing, enhancing dialogue and cooperation between OPEC and non-OPEC countries, and ensuring oil market stability is realized (OPEC, N.d).

UAE being one of the members of OPEC has operated under the regulation of OPEC whereby the organization sets quotas for the member countries as far as oil production is concerned. Oil quotas operate as limits within which member states have to produce oil and not exceed the level or amount accepted.

Every year, OPEC reviews the oil quotas for each member state and as a regulation, each member is supposed to adhere to the set regulations.

The OPEC quotas aim at regulating oil production among member states with strength of ensuring fair competition prevail and that, members are able to receive benefits for the oil they produce. Nevertheless, in recent times, there have been concerns especially in UAE with regard to OPEC quotas where UAE believe that OPEC quota for the country has failed to reflect the size of its resources (Ayalon, 1992).

Moreover, the country believes that, concessions to other producers within the cartel were being made at its expense.

Advantages of OPEC quotas have been largely reflected in the manner member countries like UAE have been able to realize genuine revenue generated through oil production and international price stabilization but disadvantages on the other hand have effectively been manifested through limit countries have been made to operate within (Ayalon, 1992).

Non-Oil Sectors Economic diversification in the UAE started in 1970s, specifically after the discovery that Dubai had no enough oil resources. The government therefore set in motion to diversify the economy of the federation from over-dependence on oil.

Today, UAE diversified economy is booming to an extent that average annual non-oil growth rates in the country witnessed progress from initial 3.6% between 1981 and 1990 to 7.3% between 1991 to 2000 (USA International Publications, 2007).

Much of this growth has been stimulated by a surge in trade and manufacturing as well as the evolution of the UAE finance and insurance sectors (USA International Publications, 2007).

For instance, UAE government continue to promote liberalized trade regime which is further coupled by the country’s favorable geographical location and the country has in turn evolved into a powerful financial center among the GCC Countries (USA International Publications, 2007). At the same time, the backbone of the financial system is the banking sector, which is the second largest in the GCC in terms of total assets.

Apart from the financial sector, the tourism sector in the country is booming and it plays a significant economic role in the country, especially in Dubai. Investment from the government in the last number of years has seen growth and progress of tourism sector in the country and specifically in Dubai.

Investment in the sector has been directed at developing infrastructure and enhancing advertisement and marketing of the sector, and today Dubai is one of growing centers in the world visited by large number of visitors every year.

The developments in this sector and the related sectors have continued to play positive role to the country’s GDP whereby, the overall share of non-oil GDP rose from 35% in 1980 to over 70% in 2002 (USA International Publications, 2007).

Manufacturing industries have also emerged largely sprouting from the hydrocarbon sector. For example, in Abu Dhabi and Dubai, there has been massive establishment of manufacturing industries, which specialize in the production of fertilizers and cement. Furthermore, gas products have been promoted through establishment of various industries.

Market for these products has been both at local and international market where demand has forced the concerned industries to increase and enhance their production capacity. Other areas of specialization with regard to manufacturing industry has been in the limestone and marble mining and processing which again plays critical role to the country’s economy.

Agriculture has also become another area UAE has constantly injected resources and these efforts have bore fruits. For instance, the agricultural although affected largely by poor climatic conditions in the country continue to experience remarkable results where production has continued to increase.

Furthermore, immediately the country gained independence and the first ten years saw an increase of about 200% in food production in the country where also land under cultivation increased by about 500% ().

The federal government commitment to the promotion of the national agriculture of the country can be evident through increased annual budget allotment, which is estimated to be about $ 100 million every year (Peck, 1986). Further, every Emirate has been increasing its budgetary allocation to the agriculture sector a situation that has seen greater expansion and growth of agriculture.

Transport has become the key area the federal state of UAE has tried to open up its economy to local and outsider players. The country’s conviction is that presence of vibrant trade and commerce activities are the key to economic development and growth of the country.

In order to maintain contact and continued interaction with outside and local markets, the country continues to invest heavily in transport sector, which in turn has accelerated the country’s economic base.

For example, UAE has been involved in developing key transportation infrastructure projects that include Port Khalifa and industrial zone at Taweelah. In addition, there has been initiation of a mega-project (Union Railway project) which has an estimate cost of $ 8 billion (Anonymous, 2011).

The Abu Dhabi International Airport is another key project the country has heavily invested in where the cost of this project amounts to about $ 6.7 billion. More transport infrastructure that the country has heavily invested includes the expansion of the Dubai metro and construction of the Abu Dhabi metro and light rail (Anonymous, 2011).

The essence of all these transport projects is to see development of UAE economy especially through increased bilateral and multilateral trade relations. The country envision growth of economy specifically through presence of new systems construction that are largely related to multi-modal freight and intelligent supply chain management which in totality possess the ability to increase trade opportunities.

Current and future of UAE UAE economy as it appears for now seems to be largely diversified and oil economy no longer remains the sole backbone of the country’s economy. Nevertheless, the oil revenues remain the key resources to stimulate economies of other sectors. Together with the oil economy, service economy in UAE has been thriving at a promising rate a situation that has led to growth of UAE economy (Oxford Business Group, 2008).

As more effort remains centered on improving and accelerating the non-oil sector, it can be seen that economic development of the federal is likely to continue on an upward trend. For example, in 2003 and the subsequent four year-periods, the economy of the country oscillated around 10% and Abu Dhabi was the key contributing emirate (Oxford Business Group, 2008).

Oil remains the single-most contributor to the GDP of the country, accounting for about 35% of the GDP (Oxford Business Group, 2008). Following the oil sector is the manufacturing sector, which account for about 13% to the GDP of the country.

Trade and repair is at position three where it is perceived to account for about 11% of the GDP to the economy and thereafter, real estate sector contribute about 8% to the country’s GDP (Oxford Business Group, 2008). Predicted economic growth and progress for the country remain live despite impacts of financial crises that took place recently.

The advantage the country has can be exhibited in its strong economic fundamentals, which appear to be solid and steadfast despite the financial challenges. Because of these, in 2008, it was predicted that UAE real GDP growth would accelerate by about 6.5% with potentials of reaching 7% over the next five years despite the impacts of global economic slowdown (Oxford Business Group, 2008).

Inflation remains worry- factor in the federation and in the larger GCC Countries block. This aspect has become serious to extend that there was delayed GCC monetary union. The inflation in the region can be explained by the windfall gains from high oil prices, which gave GCC Countries more cash than many of their domestic markets could handle.

As a result, inflation has gradually become the bugbear that follows the successes of every economy in the region. In 2007, UAE surpassed the psychological inflation barrier of 10%, which further translated to an increase of 11.1% rise in the price of goods and services (Oxford Business Group, 2008).

Furthermore, in 2008, report by Samba Financial Group indicated that, inflation in the UAE went into double figures that reached 11.1% while it was 11.3% in Dubai and 11.7% in Abu Dhabi, which meant that consumer price index growth could be to something closer to 20% (Oxford Business Group, 2008).

Predicted economic growth

Source: Oxford Business Group, 2008

Conclusion UAE since it got its independence has become an economic hub and its influence within the GCC region countries continue to increase. Today, UAE is one of the leading countries in the world as far as matters of GDP and per capita growth are concerned. Moreover, the country has one of the satisfied citizenry populations in the world and this can be associated to increased equitable distribution of resources in the country.

Oil and gas resources are the key aspects upon which the economy of the country is founded and for a long time, revenues from the hydrocarbons remain the backbone of GDP for the country. Nevertheless, some emirates like Dubai have been found to be less blessed with these vast natural resources and the country has in return increased efforts to diversify its economy.

As a result, today the country has diversified its economy to numerous sectors such as construction and real estate, transport, financing, agriculture, tourism, and the entire service sector. The fruits from these diversifications are numerous, with results being reflected in the continued growth of the country’s GDP.

Furthermore, it has to be noted that, growth and economic progress in the country has come about due to political stability and transparency in the distribution of resources, which in turn has enabled the government to initiate more economic strategic plans and policies.

Therefore, as much as oil and gas resources remain key to economy of UAE, it should be remembered that non-oil sector at the same time is promising and remain quite viable hence numerous investments should be directed at these sectors.

References Al-Abed, I.,


A Brief History of the Conflict between India and Pakistan Essay college admissions essay help

India and Pakistan are listed among countries that have had complicated relationships for a very long time in history. The two countries gained their sovereignty from Britain simultaneously in 1947. This independence marked a separation of the former British India into two major countries, India and Pakistan.

According to the separation agreement, Pakistan was to cover an area occupied by approximately 75% of Muslims while the rest of the population was to occupy the remaining area, currently known as India (Indurthy 2). Nevertheless, the separation was not to be a source of peace as the two countries fought over Kashmir, with history recording three major battles in 1947, 1965 and 1999.

Despite numerous efforts that have been engaged to settle the matter, tension has remained high between the two countries. This fight for territorial occupation can be compared to that between Israel and Palestine, which have continuously fought over Gaza.

This essay gives a brief history of the conflict between India and Pakistan, with special coverage on the genesis of the conflict, historical wars and efforts, which have been witnessed in finding a lasting solution in the region.

The genesis of the India-Pakistan conflict dates back in 1947 when Hari Singh, resisted the decision to have Kashmir join either India or Pakistan with the hope of gaining state independence or recognition from the two nations. In his attempts to waste time, Singh signed two standstill agreements with both sides although they never materialized (Indurthy 2).

There was violence that erupted after India and Pakistan declared their independence. This violence involved Muslims, Sikhs and the Hindus and in September the same year, riots extended to Kashmir as the war was considered to be a resistance against Muslims. As a result, West Kashmir Muslims fell out with Maharaja and formed an independent government of Kashmir.

On October 22, 1979, Kashmir was invaded by Pathan-armed tribes who were mainly from the Northwest Frontier Province, extending beyond fifteen kilometers from the country’s headquarters (Malik et al. 28).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Sigh sought the intervention of India, which refused until Maharaja ratified the instrument of occasion which had been signed by other princely states. After a deal was reached, Indian troops responded in Kashmir on 27th October to repel the intruders (Indurthy 3).

The Indian intervention angered General Mohammed Ali Jinnah, who ordered Pakistani regular troops to be dispatched in Kashmir, a command that was resisted by Field Marshall Auchinleck, who persuaded the governor to withdraw the decree (Malik et al. 28).

However, in November, Jinnah agreed to supply the invaders with military equipment before sending ‘volunteer’ troops to Kashmir in 1948. Despite Pakistan’s involvement, Jinnah denied his country’s direct participation in the conflict in Kashmir until mid 1948 (Indurthy 3). Due to this involvement, India considered lodging a complaint with the UN Security Council.

The aim of this complaint was to invoke articles 34 and 35 of the charter which recommended peaceful settlement of the conflict between India and Pakistan.

The UN Security Council responded on January 20, 1948 by establishing a commission that was mandated to investigate the events and situation in Kashmir. This commission was later expanded to have five members in April that year and was given the responsibility of organizing for a plebiscite after the departure of all the tribal troops in the region.

A ceasefire was later agreed upon in July 1948 after which tribal troops left Kashmir. This agreement was effected early January 1949, a time when one-third of the state was still under the control of Pakistan. The Line of Ceasefire was monitored by both India and Pakistan under UN directives.

After the appointment of Fleet Admiral Chester Nimitz to act as the administrator of the plebiscite, the two sides objected the implementation of the Karachi agreement, based on their different interpretations of the UNCIP on demilitarization. General A. G. L. McNaughton led the demilitarization agreement starting December 1949 even though India objected it after citing legal and moral concerns (Indurthy 4).

We will write a custom Essay on A Brief History of the Conflict between India and Pakistan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Between 1951 and 1953, efforts to have the two countries reduce their military presence in Kashmir fell on deaf ears. The two countries withdrew the conflict from UN’s hands and decided to handle it following a meeting between Nehru and Ali Bogra during a Commonwealth conference in June 1953. Nehru’s efforts to conduct plebiscites in Kashmir were thwarted by political interests of General Ayub Khan, who wanted to oust him.

The U.S.-led Baghdad Pact of April 1954 and the SEATO of September 1956 forced Nehru to change his mind arguing that Pakistan’s alliance with the U.S. had nullified the plebiscite agreement (Indurthy 6).

The 1954 States Constituent Assembly’s resolution to recognize the accession of Kashmir to India was final, a stance that was rejected by Pakistan and the UN Security Council, reaffirming its position on a plebiscite in 1957. When a proposal to refer the issue to arbitration was put forward in April 1957, only Pakistan accepted.

After mediation and arbitration efforts by the United Nations had failed, the two countries fought over Kashmir in 1965. It is believed that the war begun after Pakistan became frustrated following continuous integration of Kashmir by India. Having had victory over India before, it planned to launch “Operation Gibraltar”, whose aim was to repossess Kashmir.

The war ended after the intervention of the United Nations, which pushed for peaceful negotiations and ceasefire. The two sides further fought in 1971, an encounter whose main outcome was the birth of Bangladesh, a region that was located to the East of Pakistan (Indurthy 6).

In 1974, India ignited its nuclear device in preparation for fierce protection of its territory. With tension still high in the two regions, separatists begun in Indian Kashmir with Pakistan carrying the blame of providing arms to Islamist militants (Haider 1).

The two countries engaged in a brief battle in 1999 at the Line of Control, before a summit that brought together Vajpayee of India and General Pervez Musharraf in July 2001 failed. In December 2001, Indian parliament was attacked by militants resulting into a harsh blame by India on Pakistan.

Moreover, the two sides started mobilizing more than a million troops, a plan that was drooped in 2002. In an attempt to find a solution to their conflict, India and Pakistan agreed to end fighting on the Line of Control in 2003 before establishing a formal peace finding process in 2004 (Haider 1).

Not sure if you can write a paper on A Brief History of the Conflict between India and Pakistan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More After an attack by Pakistan’s militants on Mumbai in November 2008 that killed 166 people, India resolved to break the peace talks. Pakistan admitted its involvement in 2009 after an investigation had been carried out (Haider 1).

Consequently, India insisted on removal of militant groups in Pakistan before resuming peace talks. After talks and consultations, Prime Minister Sigh considered the resumption of the “composite dialogue” that had been pushed for by Islamabad.

In January 2010, there were series of fire exchange on the border, raising tension and alarm before India invited Pakistan for fresh peace talks in February, as the duo agreed to conduct them at the high diplomatic level (Haider 1).

From the above summary of historic events between India and Pakistan, clearly the possibility of finding a lifetime solution lies squarely in the hands of Indian and Pakistani leaders. However, the international community through the UN Security Council has a role to play in promoting peace efforts. Nevertheless, nuclear war between the two states cannot be ignored as both sides have tested their devices before.

Works Cited Haider, Zeeshan. “Timeline-Flashpoints and flare-ups in India-Pakistan ties.” Nuclear Age Peace Foundation, 2010. Web.

Indurthy, Rathnam. “Kashmir between India and Pakistan: An Intractable Conflict, 1947 to Present.” Appalachian State University, 2011. Web.

Malik et al. Government and politics in South Asia. Boulder, Colorado: Westview Press, 2008. Print.